Sony PDW-850 Operation Manual
Advertisement
Advertisement
PROFESSIONAL DISC CAMCORDER
PDW-850
OPERATION MANUAL [English]
1st Edition (Revised 1)
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 : Overview
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls...................................... 12
Power supply................................................................................... 12
Accessory attachments .................................................................... 13
Operating and connectors section ................................................... 14
Status display on the viewfinder screen .......................................... 27
Chapter 2 : Preparations
Preparing a Power Supply ........................................................................ 33
Using a battery pack........................................................................ 33
Using AC power.............................................................................. 34
Attachment ...................................................................................... 34
Adjusting the viewfinder position................................................... 35
Moving the viewfinder shoe up....................................................... 35
Using the BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket ........................ 36
Adjusting the viewfinder focus and screen ..................................... 37
Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock ........................................... 38
Adjusting the Flange Focal Length .......................................................... 41
Preparing the Audio Input System .......................................................... 42
Connecting a microphone to the MIC IN connector ....................... 42
Connecting microphones to the AUDIO IN connectors ................. 42
Connecting line input audio equipment .......................................... 44
Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position ....................................................... 48
2
Connecting the Remote Control Unit ...................................................... 48
Chapter 3 : Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
Setting the Recording Format .................................................................. 51
Setting the system frequency .......................................................... 51
Setting the video recording format.................................................. 52
Mixed recording of clips in different formats on the same disc ..... 52
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance ............................. 53
Adjusting the black balance ............................................................ 53
Adjusting the white balance ............................................................ 55
Setting the Electronic Shutter................................................................... 58
Shutter modes.................................................................................. 58
Selecting the shutter mode and shutter speed ................................. 59
Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment ............ 62
Manually adjusting the audio levels of the audio inputs from the
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors............................................. 64
Manually adjusting the audio level of the MIC IN connector ........ 65
Recording audio on channels 3 and 4 ............................................. 65
Setting the timecode........................................................................ 67
Setting the user bits ......................................................................... 67
Synchronizing the timecode............................................................ 68
Chapter 4 : Shooting
Discs used for recording and playback ........................................... 71
Notes on handling ........................................................................... 71
Write-protecting discs ..................................................................... 71
Loading and unloading a disc ......................................................... 72
Formatting a disc............................................................................. 73
Basic Procedure for Shooting ................................................................... 75
Playing back the recorded clip ........................................................ 77
Deleting the recorded clip ............................................................... 78
Using the Freeze Mix function........................................................ 78
Using the Focus Assist function...................................................... 79
3
Advanced Operations for Shooting .......................................................... 80
Recording essence marks ................................................................ 80
Setting clip flags with switches....................................................... 80
Setting the thumbnail image at recording time ............................... 81
Starting a shoot with a few seconds of pre-stored picture data
(Picture Cache function) ........................................................... 81
Time-lapse video (Interval Rec function) ....................................... 82
Shooting with Slow & Quick Motion ............................................. 86
Recording with the Clip Continuous Rec function ......................... 88
Retaking the most recent clip.......................................................... 89
Assigning user-defined clip titles automatically ............................. 89
Assigning user-defined names to clips and clip lists ...................... 92
Using planning metadata................................................................. 94
Recording video from external devices........................................... 96
Using the Live Logging function .................................................... 97
Recording proxy data ...................................................................... 98
Obtaining GPS location information............................................. 101
Chapter 5 : Operations in GUI Screens
Switching between GUI screens ................................................... 103
Information and controls in thumbnail screens............................. 105
Displaying menus.......................................................................... 108
GUI screen operations................................................................... 112
Selecting thumbnails ..................................................................... 113
Searching with thumbnails............................................................ 114
Playing the scene you have found................................................. 116
Selecting clips by type (Filter Clips function) .............................. 117
Selecting the information displayed on thumbnails ...................... 118
Changing clip index pictures......................................................... 118
Checking clip properties ............................................................... 119
Setting clip flags............................................................................ 122
Locking (write-protecting) clips ................................................... 122
Deleting clips ................................................................................ 123
Scene Selection (Clip List Editing) ......................................................... 124
What is scene selection?................................................................ 124
Creating and editing clip lists........................................................ 125
Managing clip lists ........................................................................ 130
Checking disc properties ............................................................... 131
4
Using planning metadata............................................................... 132
Checking user-defined essence marks .......................................... 134
Formatting discs ............................................................................ 134
Displaying disc and clip properties in a web browser................... 135
Transferring Clips (Direct FTP function) ............................................. 138
Preparations for clip transfers ....................................................... 139
Uploading clips ............................................................................. 139
Downloading clips ........................................................................ 143
Copying clips directly between XDCAM devices ........................ 143
Chapter 6 : Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
TOP menu and top-level menus.................................................... 147
OPERATION menu ...................................................................... 149
PAINT menu ................................................................................. 160
MAINTENANCE menu................................................................ 168
FILE menu .................................................................................... 186
DIAGNOSIS menu ....................................................................... 190
Displaying menus.......................................................................... 192
Basic menu operations .................................................................. 192
Using the USER menu (example menu operation) ....................... 195
Editing the USER menu ................................................................ 196
Resetting USER menu settings to the standard settings................ 199
Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD
Selecting the display items............................................................ 200
Change confirmation/adjustment progress messages.................... 202
Setting the marker display............................................................. 202
Setting the viewfinder ................................................................... 203
Recording shot data superimposed on the color bars.................... 204
Setting the shot ID......................................................................... 205
Displaying the status confirmation screens................................... 206
Adjustments and Settings from Menus.................................................. 207
Setting gain values for the GAIN selector positions..................... 207
Selecting the output signals........................................................... 207
Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches .................................... 208
Setting power saving functions ..................................................... 211
Setting up a wireless LAN ............................................................ 212
Setting the color temperature manually ........................................ 215
5
Specifying an offset for the auto white balance setting ................ 216
Selecting the lens file .................................................................... 216
Setting the UMID data .................................................................. 217
Chapter 7 : Saving and Loading User Setting Data
Saving and Recalling User Files ............................................................. 219
Saving user menu data on a USB flash drive................................ 219
Loading saved data from a USB flash drive ................................. 221
Returning the user file settings to the standard settings................ 221
Saving and Loading Scene Files ............................................................. 222
Saving a scene file......................................................................... 222
Loading scene files........................................................................ 224
Returning the scene file settings to the standard settings.............. 225
Jumping to a File-Related Menu Page when Connecting a USB Flash
Chapter 8 : File Operations
Directory structure ........................................................................ 227
File operation restrictions.............................................................. 228
Making FTP connections .............................................................. 233
Command list ................................................................................ 234
Recording Continuous Timecode via FTP Connection ........................ 238
Chapter 9 : Maintenance
Testing the Camcorder before Shooting................................................ 239
Preparations for testing ................................................................. 239
Testing the camera ........................................................................ 239
Testing the VDR ........................................................................... 241
Cleaning the viewfinder ................................................................ 243
Note about the battery terminal..................................................... 243
6
Appendix
Important Notes on Operation ............................................................... 253
Input/output ................................................................................... 256
Audio performance........................................................................ 257
Camera section .............................................................................. 257
Viewfinder and related equipment ................................................ 258
Other equipment............................................................................ 258
Optical disc drive section .............................................................. 258
Supplied accessories...................................................................... 259
Additional equipment.................................................................... 259
Chart of Optional Components and Accessories .................................. 261
List of Supported USB Keyboards ......................................................... 262
Recommended USB Flash Drives (As of April 2014) ........................... 265
Trademarks and Licenses ....................................................................... 265
MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License ..................................... 265
About IJG (Independent JPEG Group) ......................................... 265
Character display software “iType” .............................................. 266
About libupnp................................................................................ 266
About OpenSSL ............................................................................ 267
7
Before Using the Unit
After purchasing this unit, before operating, it is necessary to set the region of use.
(Unless this setting is made, the unit will not operate.)
For details of these settings, see “Setting the Area of
Note
Before attaching/removing optional components or accessories to/from the camcorder, be sure to turn the power of the camcorder off.
8
Chapter
1
Overview
Features
2
/
3
-inch full-HD “PowerHAD FX” CCDs
• IT (Interline Transfer)
2
/
3
-inch progressive image sensors with 2.2 million pixels, for full
HD resolution (1920 × 1080)
• “PowerHAD FX” CCDs, featuring a signal processing ASIC with 16-bit A/D converters
These new image sensor technologies enable the capture of very high-quality images, with F11
(59.94i) and F12 (50i) sensitivity and an SN ratio of 62 dB.
1)
1) With noise suppression on (off value is 58 dB)
Noise suppression uses proprietary Sony signal processing technology to suppress noise in highfrequency regions.
Mechanisms for high reliability
A new duct cooling system prevents overheating inside the unit and on its surfaces, for greater reliability in high-temperature environments.
Reliability is also enhanced by the drip-proof design.
Recording can continue even when the unit is subjected to jarring shocks, because data is stored in shockproof memory before being recorded to the media. Reliable recording is ensured by a recording verification function, similar to the confidence playback function of tape recorders, qualifying the unit for use in demanding broadcast applications.
Multi-format support
The unit supports various system frequencies
(1080/59.94i, 1080/29.97P, 1080/50i, 1080/25P,
1080/23.98P, 720/59.94P, and 720/50p), offering the flexibility needed for worldwide HD recording. It also supports recording and playback of SD signals (both NTSC and PAL), allowing a stepwise transition from SD to HD systems.
A multi-format conversion function enables up- and down-conversion between SD and HD, and cross-conversion between 1080 and 720. Squeeze or edge cropping can be selected as the aspect pattern in up- and down-conversion between SD and HD.
Note
It is not possible to combine material recorded in
different frame frequency groups on single disc (see page 52)
.
Recording of more than 90 minutes of high-quality video and audio data
• Signals captured by the full-HD (1920 × 1080) image sensors are recorded in MPEG HD422 format
1)
for consistently high image quality.
2)
• The unit supports recording of four audio channels
3)
sampled at 24 bits for high quality.
• Dual-layer Professional discs can record about
95 minutes of high-quality video and audio data.
The generous recording times and the highquality of the recorded video and audio allow this unit to meet the most stringent requirements of production teams in a wide range of genres, from news gathering through digital cinema and program production.
The unit supports a variety of HD formats, including formats with 720 lines of resolution.
1) The MPEG-2 422P@HL codec performs 4:2:2 sampling and records at a video bit rate of 50 Mbps.
2) Image compression uses the MPEG-2 Long GOP system.
3) The PDW-HD1500 supports recording of up to eight channels in MPEG HD422 format.
Format compatibility with earlier models
The unit is capable of recording in the MPEG-2
MP@HL 35/25 Mbps formats used by earlier
XDCAM HD devices. These formats offer longer recording times than the MPEG-2 422P@HL
50 Mbps format.
It is also capable of recording and playback in the
MPEG IMX 50/40/30 Mbps and DVCAM
25 Mbps formats.
9
Rich selection of interfaces
• HDSDI and SDSDI output connectors: Allow free combination of HDSDI and SDSDI signals.
Timecode and other text data can be superimposed on signals from one of the two interfaces.
• Composite signal output connector
• Selectable video input connectors: The unit is designed to support recording in every type of environment, including reporting by pool coverage teams. HD SDI/SD SDI or composite signals can be selected. SD signals can be upconverted and recorded as HD signals.
• Gen-lock input connector: Enables synchronized operation of multiple units, with synchronization possible to either VBS or HD-
Y signals.
• Audio input connectors: Supports AES/EBU signal input, in addition to microphone input,
+48 V microphone input, and line input.
• Timecode input and output connectors
• Network connector: Enable transfer of MXFformat files.
• USB connector: Enables use of a Windows
USB keyboard or mouse. You can also connect a USB flash drive to record proxy data or load planning metadata, or connect the optional
CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi Adaptor or CBK-WA100
Wireless Adaptor to connect to a wireless LAN network.
Features for improved performance under various shooting conditions
Picture Cache function
The unit can utilize its internal memory to continuously record the current video input, allowing recording to commence a certain time (2 to 30 seconds) in advance of the time when the recording button is pressed, and allowing discs to be exchanged seamlessly without interrupting the recording.
Two optical filters
The unit is equipped with separate CC filters and
ND filters.
Noise suppression circuits
New noise suppression circuits offer improved performance under difficult evening or nighttime shooting conditions.
Slow shutter function
A maximum of 16 frames can be accumulated using the slow shutter function. In low light levels this allows clear and noiseless video to be shot, and provides a fantasy video effect with ghost images.
Time lapse function (interval recording)
Using this function slow-moving subjects can be shot with the movement compressed in time. This is convenient for many applications, such as monitoring plant growth, or the progress of a construction site.
Slow & quick motion function
1)
This function allows the shooting frame rate to be different from the playback frame rate, for the same effect as overcranking or undercranking a film camera. Unlike low-speed or high-speed playback of normally shot video, this provides a smooth slow-motion effect, or action speeded up beyond actual speed.
1) This function is available when the recording format is
MPEG HD422, 50 Mbps, and the resolution/system frequency is 1080/23.98P, 1080/25P, or 1080/29.97P.
Freeze Mix function
This allows a still image from previously captured video to be aligned with the current video output from the camera. Thus you can adjust the camera position to get exactly the same framing for new shots. For example, this function makes it easy to frame summer and winter shots of a landscape scene in exactly the same way.
Digital extender function
This magnifies the center section of the video. It utilizes electronic processing, which prevents the decrease in sensitivity (F-drop) that occurs when the lens extender function is used.
Focus assist function
A focus assist indicator is displayed in the viewfinder to aid in focusing.
This function is useful when trying to focus using only the image in the viewfinder.
Assignable switches
Frequently used function can be assigned to switches for quick and convenient operation.
Hyper gamma
This enables a wide dynamic range without using the Knee function, by smoothly compressing the high-luminance range.
10
Supports digital wireless microphone system
The digital wireless microphone system offers high-quality, superior resistance to noise, and simultaneous multi-channel operation.
Installation of the DWR-S02DN Digital Wireless
Receiver
1)
enables simultaneous reception of two channels.
1) These products are not available in countries where they are prohibited by radio frequency regulations.
3.5-inch high-resolution LCD monitor
The high-resolution 3.5-inch QHD color LCD monitor displays audio meters, menus, disc and battery capacity indications, and thumbnails of clips stored on disc.
Inherits unique features of XDCAM series
The unit inherits the workflow features of the
XDCAM series, including thumbnail display and metadata management, and improves them by introducing an improved man-machine interface.
Metadata includes new user-settable clip flags
(OK/NG/KEEP) in addition to the existing Rec
Start essence marks. The new metadata types enable more efficient workflows when clips recorded on this unit are edited on nonlinear editing systems.
Software Downloads
When the unit is used with a PC connection, download any device drivers, plug-ins, and application software you require from the following websites.
Sony Professional products website:
U.S.A.
http://pro.sony.com
Canada
Latin America http://www.sonybiz.ca
http://sonypro-latin.com
Europe http://www.pro.sony.eu/pro
Middle East, Africa http://sony-psmea.com
Russia
Brazil http://sony.ru/pro/ http://sonypro.com.br
Australia
New Zealand
Japan
Asia Pacific
Korea
China
India http://pro.sony.com.au
http://pro.sony.co.nz
http://www.sonybsc.com
http://pro.sony-asia.com
http://bp.sony.co.kr
http://pro.sony.com.cn
http://pro.sony.co.in
Sony Creative Software, software download page: http://www.sonycreativesoftware.com/ download/software_for_sony_equipment
11
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
Power supply
1 2 3 4 5 a LIGHT switch
Determines how a video light connected to the
LIGHT connector
is turned on and off.
AUTO: When the POWER switch of the video light is in the on position, the video light is turned on automatically while the camcorder is recording.
MANUAL: You can turn the video light on or off manually, using its own switch.
Notes
• When this switch is set to AUTO, at the beginning of the recording, the picture is recorded even though the lighting may fluctuate until the video light comes on.
If the beginning of the recording is important, you should set this switch to MANUAL.
• To ensure proper operation of the video light, Sony recommends the use of the BP-FLX75 Battery Pack with the camcorder.
b
POWER switch
Turns the main power supply on and off.
c DC IN (DC power input) connector
(XLR type, 4-pin, male)
To operate the camcorder from an AC power supply, connect an optional DC power cord to this terminal and then connect the cord to the DC output terminal of the BC-L70A, BC-L160, or another battery charger.
d DC OUT 12V (DC power output) connector (4-pin, female)
Supplies power for a CBK-WA100 Wireless
Adaptor (not supplied) (maximum 1.0 A).
Do not connect any equipment other than the wireless adaptor.
e Battery attachment shoe
Attach a BP-FLX75 Battery Pack. Alternatively, you can attach an AC-DN2B/DN10 AC Adaptor to operate the camcorder on AC power supply.
For details about how to attach the battery or AC
adaptor, see “Preparing a Power Supply” (page 33).
For details about attaching a digital wireless
receiver, see “Attaching a digital wireless receiver
(when using digital wireless microphone)”
Note
For safety and to ensure proper operation, use of the
BP-FLX75 battery pack is recommended.
12
Accessory attachments
1
8 9 0 qa qs qd
23 qf
4 567 qgqh qj qk ql a Shoulder strap fitting
Attach the supplied shoulder strap
.
b
Accessory fitting shoe
Attach an optional accessory such as a video light
.
c
Viewfinder front-to-back positioning lever
To adjust the viewfinder position in the front-toback direction, loosen this lever and the LOCK knob. After adjustment, retighten this lever and the LOCK knob.
d
Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring
Loosen this ring to adjust the left-to-right position
of the viewfinder (see page 35)
.
e Viewfinder fitting shoe
Attach an optional viewfinder.
f VF (viewfinder) connector (20-pin)
Connect an optional viewfinder.
Consult a Sony representative for information about available viewfinders.
g
Lens mount securing rubber
After locking the lens in position using the lens locking lever, fit this rubber over the lower of the two projections. This fixes the lens mount, preventing it from coming loose.
h
Viewfinder front-to-back positioning knob (LOCK knob)
Loosen this knob to adjust the front-to-back position of the viewfinder
.
i
Fitting for microphone holder
Fit an optional CAC-12 Microphone Holder (see page 42) .
j Shoulder pad
Raise the shoulder pad fixing lever to adjust the position in the front-to-rear direction. Adjust the position for maximum convenience when operating the unit on your shoulder.
For details of the adjustment, see “Adjusting the
Shoulder Pad Position” (page 48).
k LIGHT (video light) connector (2-pin, female)
A video light with a maximum power consumption of 50 W, such as the Anton Bauer
Ultralight 2 or equivalent can be connected
l Lens cable clamp
Clamp a lens cable.
m
MIC IN (microphone input) (+48 V) connector (XLR type, 5-pin, female)
Connect a stereo microphone to this connector.
The power (+48 V) is supplied via this connector.
n
LENS connector (12-pin)
Connect a lens cable to this connector.
Note
When connecting the lens cable to this connector, power off this unit first.
o
Tripod mount
When using the unit on a tripod, attach the tripod adaptor (optional).
13
p Lens mount (special bayonet mount)
Attach the lens.
Consult a Sony representative for information about available lenses.
q
Lens locking lever
After inserting the lens in the lens mount, rotate the lens mount ring with this lever to lock the lens in position.
After locking the lens, be sure to use the lens mount securing rubber to prevent the lens from becoming detached.
r
Lens mount cap
Remove by pushing up the lens locking lever.
When no lens is mounted, keep this cap fitted for protection from dust.
s CA (camera adaptor) connector (50pin)
Remove the connector cover, and connect the 50pin connector of the optional CA-FB70/TX70
Camera Adaptor.
Note
If the camera control unit does not support SLS (slow speed shutter), the SLS display and SLS setting cannot be changed.
Refer to the Operation Manual of the CA-FB70/TX70 for more information about how to mount it.
Operating and connectors section
Front
3
1
2
4
5
6
7 a REC START (recording start) button
Press to start recording. Press it again to stop recording. The effect is the same as that of the
REC button on the lens.
b
SHUTTER selector
Set to ON to use the electronic shutter. Flick to
SELECT to switch the shutter speed or shutter mode setting within the range previously set with the menu. When this switch is operated, the new setting appears on the setting change/adjustment progress message display area for about three seconds.
For details about the shutter speed and shutter mode
settings, see “Setting the Electronic Shutter”
c FILTER selector
Switches between optical filters built into this unit.
When this selector is used with the menu item for
filter selection display set to ON (see page 202) ,
the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about three seconds.
The unit is equipped with two switchable filters.
You can switch between four electrical CC filters and four ND filters.
14
B
C
D
FILTER selector
(outer knob) setting
A
CC filter
Cross filter a)
3200K
4300K
6300K a) A type of special effect filter. A cross of light appears in the highlight section.
FILTER selector
(inner knob) setting
1
2
3
4
ND filter
CLEAR
1
/
4
ND (attenuates light to approximately
1
/
4
)
1
/
16
ND (attenuates light to approximately
1
/
16
)
1
/
64
ND (attenuates light to approximately
1
/
64
) d
MENU knob
Changes the page selection or a setting within the menu.
For details about how to use the MENU knob, see
e EARPHONE jack (monaural, minijack)
You can monitor the E-E
1)
sound during recording and playback sound during playback.
When an alarm is indicated, you can hear the alarm sound through the earphone. You can use this with the EARPHONE jack on the rear of the unit at the same time. Plugging an earphone into the jack automatically cuts off the built-in speaker.
1) E-E: Abbreviation of “Electric-to-Electric”. In E-E mode, video and audio signals input to the camcorder are output after passing through internal electric circuits only. This can be used to check input signals.
f
AUTO W/B BAL (automatic white/ black balance adjustment) switch
Activates the automatic white/black balance adjustment functions.
WHT: Adjusts the white balance automatically.
If the WHITE BAL switch
is set to A or B, the white balance setting is stored in the corresponding memory. If the
WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST, the automatic white balance adjustment function does not operate.
BLK: Adjusts the black set and black balance automatically.
g MIC (microphone) LEVEL control
Adjusts the input level of audio channels 1, 2, 3 and 4.
For details, see “Adjusting the Audio Level”
Right side (near the front)
1
STATUS
ON/
SEL
OFF
2 3 4
0
6 7 8 9 qa qs
OFF
ON
MENU
CANCEL/PRST
ESCAPE
5 qd a
ASSIGN (assignable) 1/2 switches
You can assign the desired functions to these switches on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the
OPERATION menu.
Nothing is assigned to these switches when the camcorder is shipped from the factory (equivalent to a selection of OFF in the menu).
For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches” (page 208).
15
b ASSIGN (assignable) 5 switch
You can assign the desired functions to these switches on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the
OPERATION menu.
Nothing is assigned to these switches when the camcorder is shipped from the factory (equivalent to a selection of OFF in the menu).
For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches” (page 208).
c
ALARM (alarm tone volume adjustment) knob
Controls the volume of the warning tone that is output via the built-in speaker or optional earphones. When the knob is turned to the minimum position, no sound can be heard.
However, if the MIN ALARM VOL item on the
AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to SET, the alarm tone is audible even when this volume control is at the minimum position.
ALARM
Minimum Maximum d MONITOR (monitor volume adjustment) knob
Controls the volume of the sound other than the warning tone that is output via the built-in speaker or optional earphones. When the knob is turned to the minimum position, no sound can be heard.
e MONITOR (audio monitor selection) switches
By means of combinations of the two switches, you can select audio that you want to hear through the built-in speaker or optional earphones.
Position of down-side switch: CH-1/2
Position of up-side switch
CH-1/CH-3
MIX
CH-2/CH-4
Audio output
Channel 1 audio
Channels 1 and 2 mixed audio (stereo)
a)
Channel 2 audio
Position of down-side switch: CH-3/4
Position of up-side switch
CH-1/CH-3
Audio output
Channel 3 audio
Position of up-side switch
MIX
Audio output
CH-2/CH-4
Channels 3 and 4 mixed audio (stereo)
a)
Channel 4 audio a) By connecting stereo headphones to the EARPHONE jack on the rear of the unit, you can hear the audio in stereo. (On the AUDIO-1 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu, HEADPHONE OUT must be set to STEREO.) f
VDR SAVE/STBY (VDR save/standby) switch
Switches the status of the power supply to the
VDR while recording is stopped (STOP) or paused (REC PAUSE).
SAVE: The disc stops rotating and some functions are disabled. Power consumption is lower than when the camcorder is in STBY mode. Battery life is extended.
STBY: Recording to the disc starts immediately when the REC START button is pressed.
Note
An internal operating sound may be recorded at the start of recording when the VDR SAVE/STBY switch is set to
SAVE.
g GAIN selector
Switches the gain of the video amplifier to match the lighting conditions during shooting. The gains corresponding to the L, M, and H settings can be selected in the menu. (The factory settings are
L=0 dB, M=6 dB, and H=12 dB.)
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting appears on the setting change/adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen for about three seconds.
For details, see “Setting gain values for the GAIN selector positions” (page 207).
h
OUTPUT/DCC (output signal/dynamic contrast control) switch
Switches the video signal, which is output to the video disc drive (referred to as “VDR”), viewfinder, and video monitor from the camera section, between the following two.
BARS: Outputs the color bar signal.
CAM: Outputs the video signal from the camera.
When this is selected, you can switch DCC
1) on and off.
16
1) DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control): Against a very bright background with the iris opening adjusted to the subject, objects in the background will be lost in the glare. The DCC function will suppress the high intensity and restore much of the lost detail and is particularly effective in the following cases.
• Shooting people in the shade on a sunny day
• Shooting a subject indoors, against a background through a window
• Any high contrast scene i
WHITE BAL (white balance memory) switch
Controls adjustment of the white balance.
PRST: Adjusts the color temperature to the preset value (the factory default setting: 3200K).
Use this setting when you have no time to adjust the white balance.
A or B: Recall the white balance adjustment settings already stored in A or B. Flick the
AUTO W/B BAL switch (see page 15)
on the
WHT side, to automatically adjust the white balance, and save the adjustment settings in memory A or memory B.
However, the white balance does not function while ATW
1)
is operating, even if the AUTO W/B BAL switch is set to the
WHT position.
B (ATW): When this switch is set to B and
WHITE SWITCH <B> is set to ATW on the
WHITE SETTING page of the
OPERATION menu, ATW is activated.
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting appears on the setting change/adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen for about three seconds.
1) ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance): The white balance of the picture being shot is adjusted automatically for varying lighting conditions.
j
STATUS ON/SEL/OFF (menu display on/page selection/display off) switch
To enable this switch, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.
Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU
ON/OFF switch to OFF.
ON/SEL: Each time this switch is pushed upward, a window to confirm the menu settings and status of the camcorder appears on the viewfinder screen. The window consists of four pages, which are switched each time the switch is pushed upward. Each page is displayed for about 10 seconds.
OFF: To clear the page immediately after display, push this switch down to the OFF position.
You can select the pages to be displayed on the menu.
For details, see “Displaying the status confirmation screens” (page 206).
k MENU ON/OFF switch
To use this switch, open the cover.
This switch is used to display the menu on the viewfinder screen or the test signal screen.
Closing the cover automatically sets this switch to
OFF.
ON: Displays the menu on the viewfinder screen or the test signal screen.
OFF: Removes the menu from the viewfinder screen or the test signal screen.
l
CANCEL/PRST (preset)/ESCAPE switch
To enable this switch, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.
Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU
ON/OFF switch to OFF.
CANCEL/PRST: Flicking this switch up to this position displays the message to confirm whether the previous settings are cancelled or settings are reset to their initial values, depending on the menu operating condition.
Flicking this switch up to this position again cancels the previous settings or resets the settings to their initial values.
ESCAPE: Use this switch when the menu page, which has a hierarchical structure, is opened.
Each time the switch is flicked to this position, the page returns to one stage higher in the hierarchy.
m
Cover
17
Right side (near the rear)
g
EJECT
Z h k i l j
F REV m
PREV
.
PLAY/PAU S E
NX
S TOP x
F FWD
M
NEXT
> m n o p q r
DI S P S EL HOLD RE S ET DI S PLAY
EXPAND CHAPTER RETURN COUNTER TC U-BIT
BRIGHT a b c d e f a
Built-in speaker
The speaker can be used to monitor E-E sound during recording, and playback sound during playback. The speaker also sounds alarms to reinforce visual warnings.
If you connect earphones to the EARPHONE jack, the speaker output is suppressed automatically.
For details about alarms, see “Operation Warnings”
b LCD monitor
Displays camera video, VDR-related warnings, remaining battery capacity, remaining disc capacity, audio levels, time data, and so on.
For details, see “Status display on the LCD monitor”
c WARNING indicator
Lights up or flashes when an abnormality occurs in the VDR section.
For details about the meaning of the states of the
WARNING indicator, see “Operation Warnings”
d
ACCESS indicator
This lights when data is written to or read from the disc.
e Protection cover of the audio control section
Open to access the audio control section
.
f
Protection cover of the GUI screen operations section
Open to access the GUI screen operations section
.
g EJECT button and indicator
Press this button to insert a disc or eject the disc.
The indicator flashes while the disc is being ejected.
h F REV (fast reverse) button and indicator
This plays back at high speed in the reverse direction. The indicator lights during high-speed playback in the reverse direction.
i PLAY/PAUSE button and indicator
Press this button to view play back video images using the viewfinder screen or the LCD monitor.
The indicator lights during playback.
Press this button again during playback to pause, outputting a still image. At this time the indicator flashes.
To play back at approximately four times normal playback speed, press the F REV button or F
FWD button during playback.
At this time the PLAY indicator and F REV or F
FWD indicator light.
j
F FWD (fast forward) button and indicator
This plays back at high speed in the forward direction. The indicator lights during high-speed playback in the forward direction.
18
k PREV button
This jumps to the first frame of the current clip.
During the jump, the F REV indicator flashes.
If you press this together with the F REV button, the jump is to the first frame of the first recorded clip on the disc.
l
STOP button
Press this button to stop disc playback.
m
NEXT button
This jumps to the first frame of the next clip.
During the jump, the F FWD indicator flashes.
If you press this together with the F FWD button, the jump is to the last frame of the last recorded clip on the disc.
n DISP SEL (display selection) /EXPAND
(expand function) button
With each press of this button, the display in the
LCD monitor changes as follows.
Display indication Meaning
Video with The LCD monitor displays superimposed information (CHAR) the same text information as the viewfinder.
The video only appears.
Video without superimposed information (MONI)
Status display
(STATUS)
Counter indications, warnings, audio levels, and similar information appear.
No video image appears.
If you press this button when the thumbnail screen is displayed, the duration of the selected clip is divided into 12, and the first frame of each of the divisions is shown in a further thumbnail display (expand function). Each time you press this button, the division is repeated (to a maximum of three times, with 1,728 divisions).
Hold down the SHIFT button and press this button to step back through the division process.
For details of the expand function, see page 114.
o HOLD (display hold)/CHAPTER
(chapter function) button
Pressing this button instantly freezes the time data displayed in the counter display section. (The timecode generator continues running.) Pressing this button again releases the hold.
You can use this button, for example, to determine the exact time of a particular shot.
For details of the counter display, see page 21.
If you press this button when the clip thumbnail screen is displayed, those frames on which shot marks are recorded appear in a list (chapter function). Press the button once more to return to the normal thumbnail display.
By displaying thumbnails with shot marks attached in place of index frames, you can check the contents of clips more easily and more quickly. This is also useful for cueing up long clips.
For details of the chapter function, see page 115
p RESET/RETURN button
Resets the value shown in the time counter display. According to the settings of the PRESET/
REGEN/CLOCK switch (see page 23) and the F-
RUN/SET/R-RUN switch (see page 23)
, this button resets the display as follows.
Settings of switches To reset
DISPLAY switch:
COUNTER
Counter to 0:00:00:00
DISPLAY switch:
TC
PRESET/REGEN/
CLOCK switch:
PRESET
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch: SET
Timecode to 00:00:00:00
DISPLAY switch:
U-BIT
PRESET/REGEN/
CLOCK switch:
PRESET
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch: SET
User bits
a)
data to 00 00 00
00 a) Of the timecode bits for every frame recorded on the disc, those bits which can be used to record useful information for the user such as scene number, shooting place, etc.
For details, see “Setting Time Data” (page 67).
This button returns to the previous screen when pressed during thumbnail display.
For details, see “GUI screen operations”
q DISPLAY switch
This cycles the data displayed in the counter display through the sequence COUNTER, TC, and U-BIT.
19
COUNTER: Display the elapsed recording/ playback time (hours, minutes, seconds, frames).
TC: Display timecode.
U-BIT: Display user bit data.
For details, see “Status display on the LCD monitor”
r BRIGHT (brightness) button
Switches the brightness of the LCD monitor backlight.
Each press of the button selects the next setting in the order shown in the following table.
Setting LCD monitor backlight
H High (select this to view the LCD monitor outdoors in the daytime)
M
L
OFF
Brightness between H and L
Low (select this to view the LCD monitor indoors or outdoors at night)
Off (the display is also off)
Status display on the LCD monitor
The following display appears on the LCD monitor display which is set to STATUS with the
DISP SEL/EXPAND button.
1 2 3 4 5
O V E R
0
6
7
HD422 50
1080
P B
01 ..
H
5 9 . 9 i 2 4 b i t
N D F E X T - L K H O L D
M I N S E C
8
9
W A R N I N G : H U M I D
D I S C E
B A T T E
0
B
F
LCD monitor
F R M
10
20
30
40
1 ST 2 d B
P E A K
3 4 a Resolution
Indicates the resolution of HD output video.
Indication Resolution (horizontal × vertical)
1080
720
1080 lines (1920 × 1080)
720 lines (1280 × 720) b Video format
Indicates the format of video being currently played back or recorded.
Indication
HD422 50
HD420 HQ/SP/
LP a)
Format Bit rate
MPEG HD422 50 Mbps
MPEG HD420 35/25/18 Mbps
IMX 50/40/30
MPEG IMX 50/40/30 Mbps
DVCAM
DVCAM 25 Mbps a) LP is playback only.
c System frequency
Indicates the system frequency of video being currently played back or recorded.
If NTSC AREA is selected
1)
Indication Field or frame rate
59.9i
59.94 fields per second
59.9P
59.94 frames per second
Scan mode
Interlace
Progressive
29.9P
23.9P
29.97 frames per second
Progressive
23.98 frames per second
Progressive
If PAL AREA is selected
1)
Indication Field or frame rate
50i 50 fields per second
50P
25P
50 frames per second
25 frames per second
Scan mode
Interlace
Progressive
Progressive
1) Selected by COUNTRY setting on the FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu
Note
There may be no indication displayed when this unit cannot identify the system frequency, for example, when playing back a disc recorded with other equipment.
d Audio format
Indicates the format of audio being currently played back or recorded.
Indication Quantization bit rate/sampling frequency
24bit 24 bits/48 kHz
20
Indication Quantization bit rate/sampling
16bit frequency
16 bits/48 kHz e Audio level indicators
Indicates the audio recording or playback levels of channels 1 to 4.
f Status display
PB: Appears during playback.
NDF: Appears when non-drop-frame timecode is selected.
EXT-LK: Appears when the internal timecode generator is locked to an external signal input to the TC IN (timecode input) connector.
HOLD: Appears when the internal timecode generator is stopped.
g
Time counter display
Switches displays of time counter, timecode, and user bits, depending on the position of the
DISPLAY switch.
When the HOLD/CHAPTER button is pressed to hold the timecode value, the timecode is displayed in the format shown below. When the
HOLD/CHAPTER button is pressed again to release the hold, the timecode is displayed in the normal format.
Lights when the HOLD/CHAPTER button is pressed.
h Warning indicator area
Displays warnings when trouble with recording or moisture condensation occurs.
For details, see “Operation Warnings” (page 244).
Also, when it is possible to set clip names by
using planning metadata (see page 94) , displays
as clip information the title contained in the planning metadata that has been loaded into this unit. (The display format follows the setting of
Planning Clip Name in Clip Info. Area in the Disc
Menu.)
The following characters can be displayed.
• Digits: 0 to 9
• Alphabetic characters: a to z, A to Z
• The following symbols: !, ", #, $, %, &, ', (, ), *,
+, , (comma), -, . (period), /, : (colon), ;
(semicolon), <, =, >, ?, @, [, ], ^, _, {, |, }, ~
• Space
21
i Remaining disc capacity indicator
Indication
DISC E [ x x x x x x x ] B
DISC E [ x x x x x x x ] B
DISC E [ x x x x x x x ] B
DISC E [ x x x x x x x ] B
DISC E [ x x x x x x x ] B
DISC E [ x x x x x x x ] B
DISC E [ x x x x x x x ] B
DISC E [ x x x x x x x ] B (flashing)
DISC E [ x x x x x x x ] B (flashing)
Remaining recording time
More than 30 minutes
25 to 30 minutes
20 to 25 minutes
15 to 20 minutes
10 to 15 minutes
5 to 10 minutes
2 to 5 minutes
0 to 2 minutes
0 minutes j
Remaining battery capacity indicator
Indication
BATT E [ x x x x x x x ] F
BATT E [ x x x x x x x ] F
BATT E [ x x x x x x x ] F
BATT E [ x x x x x x x ] F
BATT E [ x x x x x x x ] F
BATT E [ x x x x x x x ] F
BATT E [ x x x x x x x ] F
BATT E [ x x x x x x x ] F a) You can change the threshold voltages on the
BATTERY 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu
.
Battery voltage
BP-L60S/L80S
15.5 V or more
15.1 to 15.5 V
14.6 to 15.1 V
13.8 to 14.6 V
12.9 to 13.8 V
12.0 to 12.9 V
10.8 to 12.0 V
10.8 V or less
Note
Other batteries
17.0 V or more
16.0 to 17.0 V
15.0 to 16.0 V
14.0 to 15.0 V
13.0 to 14.0 V
12.0 to 13.0 V
11.0 to 12.0 V
11.0 V or less
a)
For safety and to ensure proper operation, use of the
BP-FLX75 battery pack is recommended.
Indication
BATT E [ x x x x x x x ] F
BATT E [ x x x x x x x ]
BATT E [
BATT E [ x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
]
]
BATT E [ x x x x x x x ]
BATT E [ x x x x x x x ]
BATT E [ x x x x x x x ]
BATT E [ x x x x x x x ]
BATT E [ x x x x x x x ]
Battery voltage
BP-GL95A/GL65A/FLX75, Anton Bauer Battery
System
80 to 100%
70%
60%
50%
40%
30%
20%
10%
0%
Note
For safety and to ensure proper operation, use of the
BP-FLX75 battery pack is recommended.
22
GUI screen operations section and audio control section
1 2 3 4 5 6
LEVEL
THUMBNAIL
ESSENCE
MARK
SET
SUB CLIP
S.SEL
DISC MENU
MENU
SHIFT
F-RUN
S ET
R-RUN
PRE S ET
REGEN
CLOCK
0 10 0
AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO SELECT
CH-1
AUDIO IN
CH-2
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
F
R
W
F
R
W
10
CH-3
CH-4
7 8 9 0 qa qs a THUMBNAIL indicator
This lights when thumbnails are displayed.
b
THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK button
Press this button to carry out a thumbnail search
or create a clip list (see page 114) .
When pressed, the whole-screen display changes to a thumbnail display. Press once more to return to the whole-screen display.
For a thumbnail search using essence marks, hold down the SHIFT button and press this button
.
c SET/S.SEL (set/scene selection) button and arrow buttons
Use these buttons to make timecode and user bit settings, and for GUI screen operations.
The arrow buttons select items and change values, and the SET/S.SEL button confirms settings.
Pressing this button with thumbnails displayed and the SHIFT button held down adds a sub clip to the current clip list (scene selection).
See page 112 for more information about GUI screen
operations.
See page 124 for more information about scene
selection.
d MENU button
Displays a special menu for operations in GUI screens
When the whole-screen is displayed, pressing this button has no effect, and the operation is invalid.
e F-RUN/SET/R-RUN (free run/set/ recording run) switch
Selects the operating mode of the internal timecode generator. The operating mode is set as explained below, depending on the position of the switch.
F-RUN: Timecode keeps advancing, regardless of the operating state of the VDR. Use this setting when synchronizing the timecode with an external timecode.
SET: Sets the timecode or user bits.
R-RUN: Timecode advances only during recording. Use this setting to have a consecutive timecode on the disc.
For details, see “Setting the timecode” (page 67) and “Setting the user bits” (page 67).
f LEVEL CH-1/CH-2 (audio channel 1/2 recording level) knobs
Adjusts the audio levels to be recorded on channels 1 and 2 when the AUDIO SELECT CH-
1/CH-2 switches are set to MANUAL.
g SUB CLIP indicator
This lights when using a clip list for playback.
h
SUB CLIP/DISC MENU button
Press this to play back according to a clip list.
You can play back a particular clip or sequential clips, or carry out a search of the selected clip list.
To display the Disc Menu which allows you to carry out operations such as saving, recalling, or deleting a clip list, hold down the SHIFT button and press this button.
i
SHIFT button
Use this in combination with other buttons.
j PRESET/REGEN (regeneration)/
CLOCK switch
Selects whether to set a new timecode or to utilize the existing timecode.
PRESET: Records a new timecode.
REGEN: Records timecode continuous with the existing timecode recorded on the disc.
Accordingly, some extra time is required, compared to PRESET/CLOCK, if recording is started immediately after the power is turned on. Regardless of the setting of the
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch, the camcorder operates in R-RUN mode.
23
CLOCK: Records timecode synchronized to the internal clock. Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch, the camcorder operates in F-RUN mode.
k AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 (audio channel 1/2 adjustment method selection) switches
Select the audio level adjustment method for each of audio channels 1 and 2.
AUTO: Automatic adjustment
MANUAL: Manual adjustment l AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4
(audio channel 1/2/3/4 input selection) switches
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches
Select the audio input signals to be recorded on audio channels 1 and 2.
FRONT: Audio input signals from the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector
REAR: Audio input signals from an audio device connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors
WIRELESS: Audio input signals from the UHF portable tuner (not supplied) if it is installed
AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-4 switches
Select the audio input signals to be recorded on audio channels 3 and 4.
F (FRONT): Audio input signals from a microphone connected to the MIC IN connector
R (REAR): Audio input signals from an audio device connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/
CH2 connectors
W (WIRELESS): Audio input signals from the
UHF portable tuner (not supplied) if it is installed
Left side and upper section
1
2
3
S DI IN
4
GENLOCK
IN
5
TE S T
OUT
TC
OUT
6 7
TC IN a
ASSIGNABLE 3/4 switches
You can assign the desired functions to these switches on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the
OPERATION menu.
Nothing is assigned to these switches when the camcorder is shipped from the factory (equivalent to a selection of OFF in the menu).
For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches” (page 208).
b Lid of the disc compartment
This opens when the EJECT button on the top panel is pressed. Press the side of the lid to close.
c SDI IN connector (BNC type)
The unit can record HD-SDI or SD-SDI signals that are input to this connector. Input the return video signal.
Setting RETURN VIDEO to ON on the
ASSIGNABLE SW page of the OPERATION menu allows you to display the HD-SDI signal input on the SDI IN connector in the viewfinder while the RET button is pressed.
24
d GENLOCK IN (genlock signal input) connector (BNC type)
• This connector inputs a reference signal when the camera is to be genlocked or when timecode is to be synchronized with external equipment.
Use the GENLOCK page of the
MAINTENANCE menu to adjust the genlock
H-phase (phase of horizontal sync signal).
Available reference signals vary depending on the current system frequency as shown in the following table.
System frequency
1080/59.94i
1080/50i
1080/29.97P
1080/25P
1080/23.98P
720/59.94P
720/50P
Available reference signals
1080/59.94i, 525/59.94i
1080/50i, 625/50i
1080/59.94i, 525/59.94i
1080/50i, 625/50i
1080/23.98PsF
1080/59.94i, 525/59.94i
1080/50i, 625/50i
• This connector also inputs a return video signal.
You can display the HD-Y (1080i) signal in the viewfinder screen while holding the RET button down with RETURN VIDEO set to ON on the
ASSIGNABLE SW page of the OPERATION menu.
• Input an external video signal. The unit can record analog composite video signals that are input to this connector.
e TC IN (timecode input) connector
(BNC type)
To apply an external lock to the timecode of this unit, input the reference timecode.
For details of timecode, see “Setting the timecode”
f TEST OUT connector (BNC type)
This connector outputs the video signal for a video monitor. The output signal can be selected from composite video, HD-Y, and R, G, B. To switch output signals, use the TEST OUT
SELECT item on the OUTPUT 1 page of the
OPERATION menu.
If the output signal is set to one of R, G, or B, then this setting changes to HD-Y when the camcorder is powered off and on again.
Depending on menu settings, menus, timecode, and shot data can be superimposed on the image on the monitor. This connector can also be used to synchronize the timecode of an external VTR with the timecode of the camcorder.
g TC OUT (timecode output) connector
(BNC type)
To lock the timecode of an external VTR to the timecode of this unit, connect this connector to the external VTR’s timecode input connector.
Rear
d g h i e j f
LINE
AES/EBU
MIC
48V
OFF
12V 1.0A
AUDIO IN
LINE
AES/EBU
MIC
48V
OFF
HD
/SD
SDI OUT 1
SUPER
SDI OUT 2
CH1
1/2
CH2
3/4
AUDIO OUT a b c k l a TALLY (back tally) indicator (red)
Lights up during recording. It will not light if the
TALLY switch is set to OFF. This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings
same manner as the REC/TALLY indicator in the viewfinder.
For details, see “Operation Warnings” (page 244).
b TALLY switch
Set to ON to activate the TALLY indicator function.
c
(network) connector (RJ-45 type)
This is a 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connector for network connection.
25
Before using this connector, you must set
ETHERNET/USB on the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu to “ENABL”
CAUTION
• For safety, do not connect the connector for peripheral device wiring that might have excessive voltage to this port. Follow the instructions for this port.
• When you connect the network cable of the unit to peripheral device, use a shielded-type cable to prevent malfunction due to radiation noise.
d
EARPHONE jack (stereo, minijack)
You can monitor the E-E sound during recording and playback sound during playback. When an alarm is indicated, you can hear the alarm sound through the earphone. You can use this with the
EARPHONE jack on the front of the unit at the same time. Plugging an earphone into the jack automatically cuts off the built-in speaker.
You can select monaural or stereo on the AUDIO-
1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.
e LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selectors
These select the audio source of the audio input signals input to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors.
LINE: Line input audio equipment
AES/EBU: AES/EBU format audio signal
MIC: Microphone input
Note
When these switches are in the MIC position, and the
+48V/OFF switch is set to +48V, if you inadvertently connect any audio device other than a microphone to the
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors, the device may be damaged.
f
+48V/OFF switches
Select either of the following positions for the microphones to be connected.
+48V: For a microphone to use an external power supply
OFF: For a microphone to use an internal power supply g
REMOTE connector (8-pin)
Connect an RM-B170 remote control unit, which makes it possible to control the camcorder remotely.
Note
Before connecting/disconnecting the Remote Control
Unit to/from the camcorder, be sure to turn off the camcorder POWER switch.
h SDI OUT 1 connector (BNC type)
Outputs an HDSDI or SDSDI signal (with embedded audio). To switch between HDSDI and
SDSDI signal output, use the SDI OUT 1
SELECT item on the OUTPUT 1 page of the
OPERATION menu.
i SDI OUT 2 connector (BNC type)
Outputs an HDSDI or SDSDI signal (with embedded audio). To switch between HDSDI,
SDSDI and VF signal output, use the SDI OUT 2
SELECT item on the OUTPUT 1 page of the
OPERATION menu.
Setting menus, timecode, or shot data can be superimposed on the camera output video depending on the menu settings, and you can view them on the monitor screen.
j
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 (audio channel-1 and channel-2 input) connectors (XLR type, 3-pin, female)
These are audio input connectors for channels 1 and 2 to which you can connect audio equipment or a microphone.
When the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector is set to AES/EBU, the CH1 connector is used for channel-1 and -2 inputs, and the CH2 connector, for channel-3 and -4 inputs.
k AUDIO OUT connector (XLR type, 5pin, male)
Outputs the audio signals recorded on audio channels 1 and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4. The audio signals are selected by the MONITOR switch.
l (USB) connector
This is a USB 2.0 connector.
Connect one of the following devices, depending on what you want to do.
Device
Windows USB keyboard or mouse
Enables
Text input wth the on-screen
26
Device Enables
USB flash drive
Recording of proxy data (see page 98)
Loading of planning metadata
Saving and loading user
Making wireless LAN
Optional CBK-
WA01 Wi-Fi
Adaptor
Optional CBK-
WA100 Wireless
Adaptor
CBK-WA100 status indicator
Wireless LAN connection
Before using this connector, you must set
ETHERNET/USB on the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu to “ENABL”
Status display on the viewfinder screen
Layout of the status display on the viewfinder screen
The viewfinder screen displays not only the video picture but also characters and messages indicating the camcorder settings and operating status, a center marker, a safety zone marker, etc.
When the menu screen is not displayed and the
DISPLAY of the DISPLAY/ASPECT switch is set to on, the items for which an ON setting was made on the VF DISP 1, VF DISP 2, or VF DISP
3 page of the OPERATION menu or with related switches are displayed at the top and bottom of the screen.
The messages that give details of the settings and adjustment progress and results can also be made to appear for about three seconds while settings are being changed, during adjustment, and after adjustment.
For details about the display item selection, see
“Selecting the display items” (page 200).
For details about setting change and adjustment
progress messages, see “Change confirmation/ adjustment progress messages” (page 202).
For details about marker display, see “Setting the marker display” (page 202).
All items that can be displayed on the viewfinder screen are shown below.
Top of viewfinder screen ab c d e f
59.9 i[ 30] g h i
99 W 13.4V
H D 4 2 2 5 0 E 0 0 0 1 : 0 0 1 / 0 0 4 D C I N
13.9
K +
C O N T
F A N
Ext.
35-30
3G/4G
W H I T E : N G N C M L A N 2
L E V E L T O O H I G H E X T
R E C 2 T C G 0 1 : 2 3 : 4 5 : 1 5 H D S D I
5600
W:A 18 dB 1/ 2000 1
2
35 30 F1.7
jk l m n o p q a Color temperature
Displays a color temperature calculated from the gain of R and B, in the range 0.0 K to 99.9 K (in steps of 0.1 K). The +/– signs may be displayed depending on the OFFSET WHT setting
No display: OFFSET WHT is OFF
+: The value of OFFSET WHT is greater than
3200K.
–: The value of OFFSET WHT is less than
3200K.
b Video format
Indicates the format of video being currently played back or recorded
The video aspect ratio (16:9 or 4:3) can also be displayed when the recording format is set to
IMX 50, IMX 40, IMX 30, or DVCAM.
c
Extender
Displays the extender settings of this unit and the lens.
EX: The lens extender is on.
08: The lens shrinker is on.
x2D: The unit’s digital extender is x2.
Ex2D: The lens extender is on, and the unit’s digital extender is x2.
x3D: The unit’s digital extender is x3.
Ex3D: The lens extender is on, and the unit’s digital extender is x3.
x4D: The unit’s digital extender is x4.
Ex4D: The lens extender is on, and the unit’s digital extender is x4.
d
Zoom position
Indicates the zoom position of the zoom lens in the range from 0 to 99.
27
e Clip information
During shooting, displays information about the clip being recorded or the clip to be recorded next.
During playback, displays information about the playback clip.
The information that appears depends on the setting of DISP CLIP NAME on the VF DISP 3 page of the OPERATION menu. You can also set
DISP CLIP NO(PB) on the VF DISP 2 page of the
OPERATION menu to “ON” to display the clip number and total number of clips during playback.
When DISP CLIP NAME is set to “PLAN”:
During shooting, when Planning Clip Name
Display in the Disc Menu is set to “Enable”, this area displays the title specified in the currently loaded planning metadata. (The display format follows the setting of
“Planning Clip Name in Clip Info. Area” in the Disc Menu.)
When DISP CLIP NAME is set to “AUTO”:
During shooting, this area displays one of the following, depending on the setting of
AUTO NAMING on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu.
• “C****” or “TITLE”: The clip name
(standard name, user-specified name, or title) specified by “Display Title” in the
Disc Menu
• “PLAN”: During shooting, when Planning
Clip Name Display in the Disc Menu is set to “Enable”, the title specified in the currently loaded planning metadata. (The display format follows the setting of
“Planning Clip Name in Clip Info. Area” in the Disc Menu.)
During playback, this area displays the clip name (standard name, user-specified name, or title) specified by “Display Title” in the
Disc Menu.
The following characters can be displayed in this area.
• Digits: 0 to 9
• Alphabetic characters: a to z, A to Z
• The following symbols: !, ", #, $, %, &, ', (, ), *,
+, , (comma), -, . (period), /, : (colon), ;
(semicolon), <, =, >, ?, @, [, ], ^, _, {, |, }, ~
• Space f System frequency and frame rate
During Slow & Quick Motion shooting and playback, displays the system frequency and the frame rate. The frame is rounded to a 2-digit
integer and displayed in brackets ([ ]) (see page
.
This display does not appear during normal shooting and playback.
g
Wireless microphone reception level
When a UHF portable tuner is installed in the camcorder, “W” appears together with foursegment reception level indicators for each of the channels (1 or 2 channels) that can be used by the tuner. The indications are as follows.
Normal use: The number of white segments indicates the strength of the signal level.
Muted: The number of gray segments indicates the strength of the signal level.
Reception level over peak: “P” is displayed instead of the indicators.
1)
Tuner battery is low: The channel number and indicator of the corresponding channel flash.
1)
1) DWR-S02DN only h Power source voltage/battery remaining capacity
When the unit is powered from a battery pack, indicates the remaining capacity of the power source voltage. When the unit is powered from a battery connected to the DC IN connector or AC adaptor attached to the battery attachment shoe, indicates the power source voltage.
i External battery
Appears if the power is supplied from an external battery connected to the DC IN connector.
j Clip Continuous Rec function
Appears when the Clip Continuous Rec function
is enabled.
CONT (lit): Continuous recording to extend the previous clip is possible.
CONT (flashing): A new clip will be created and recorded.
k
Cooling fan control mode
This appears when FAN CONTROL on the CAM
CONFIG 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to “R.MIN” or “MIN”.
FAN (lit): The cooling fan is operating at low speed.
28
FAN (flashing): The cooling fan is operating at low speed, but the temperature inside the unit has risen to a level just below the level at which an alarm occurs.
Note
If you do nothing while the FAN display is flashing, the unit will attempt to lower the internal temperature by operating the fan at high speed. When the FAN display begins to flash, you should stop shooting and other operations and wait until the internal temperature drops, and then restart operations.
l
Streaming status indicator
Displays the streaming status of the optional
CBK-WA100 Wireless Adaptor.
Displayed when the following conditions are satisfied.
• OPERATION menu >VF DISP 4
>STREAMING STATUS is ON
• MAINTENANCE menu >CAM CONFIG 3
>Wi-Fi/ETHER RM is RM or ALL
• Streaming setting of CBK-WA100 is ON a)
• Network Client setting of CBK-WA100 is
OFF b) a) Set OFF while streaming from the CCM b) Set ON while streaming from the CCM
Example display
Display indication Meaning
STRM off Not streaming
STRM
STRMx
Video streaming in progress
Error m
GPS reception status
For details, see “Icons displayed on the screen”
n
Connection status display area
When a USB flash drive is connected
When a USB flash drive is connected to the enabled USB connector, a memory symbol appears indicating the mount status of the USB flash drive and its remaining capacity.
Indicator display
Icon Remaining Description capacity display
Lit
30-35
Proxy data recording is enabled, and there are 30 to
35 minutes of remaining capacity.
Lit
5MIN
Flashing
0MIN
Unlit
Proxy data recording is enabled, and there are at least
5 minutes of remaining capacity.
Proxy data recording is enabled, but there are less than 5 minutes of remaining capacity.
a)
Proxy data recording is disabled.
b)
Lit
INH
Not displayed
The USB flash drive is write protected.
c)
Recording is not possible.
d) a) Use a USB flash drive with enough free capacity remaining.
b) Enable the proxy data recording function. c) Clear the write protection on the USB flash drive.
d) Format or exchange the USB flash drive.
When connected to Wi-Fi (wireless LAN)
When Wi-Fi on the POWER SAVE page of the
OPERATION menu is set to “ENABL”, the wireless LAN connection status is displayed.
Indicator display
Icon Display
Lit
Flashing
Meaning
Not connected or connection not identified
Connecting
Lit
Lit
Connected (signal strength: 0)
Connected. Signal strength (1 to 4) indicated by the number of white segments displayed (1 to 4).
29
When connected to optional CBK-WA100
Wireless Adaptor via USB
The remaining media capacity on the
CBK-WA100 is displayed if Wi-Fi/ETHER RM is set to “RM” or “ALL” on the CAM CONFIG 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.
Indicator display
Icon Display
Lit xxMIN
Lit
0MIN
Not displayed
Meaning
Proxy data recording is enabled, and there are xx minutes of remaining media capacity.
There is no remaining media capacity.
Recording is not possible.
o
Network client mode status indicator
Displays the status of the connection to the CCM
(Connection Control Manager of the network RX station) of the optional CBK-WA100 Wireless
Adaptor.
Displayed when the following conditions are satisfied.
• OPERATION menu >VF DISP 4 >NW
CLIENT MODE is ON
• MAINTENANCE menu >CAM CONFIG 3
>Wi-Fi/ ETHER RM is RM or ALL
• Network Client setting of the CBK-WA100 is
ON
Example display
Display indication Meaning
NCM CCM connected
NCM (flashing) Connecting/disconnecting
CCM
(No display)
NCMx
CCM connection standby
CCM connection error p
Wired LAN connection status indicator
Displays the wired LAN network setting/ connection status of the optional CBK-WA100
Wireless Adaptor.
Displayed when the following conditions are satisfied.
• OPERATION menu >VF DISP 4 >WIRELESS
STATUS is ON
• MAINTENANCE menu >CAM CONFIG 3
>Wi-Fi/ ETHER RM is RM or ALL
Example display
Display indication Meaning
LAN2
(No display)
Wired LAN connected
Wired LAN not connected q
Wireless adaptor reception status
Displays the reception status of the optional
CBK-WA100.
LTE connections: Displays 3G/4G symbol.
Station mode: Displays 4-bar signal strength.
Access point mode: Displays AP symbol.
Bottom of viewfinder screen a b c
99 W 13.4V
H D 4 2 2 5 0 E 0 0 0 1 : 0 0 1 / 0 0 4 D C I N
13.9
K +
C O N T
F A N
Ext.
35-30
3G/4G
S T R M N C M L A N 2
L E V E L T O O H I G H E X T
R E C 2 T C G 0 1 : 2 3 : 4 5 : 1 5 H D S D I
5600
W:A 18 dB 1/ 2000 1
2
35 30 F1.7
defghij k l m n a External device control and single clip playback
REC2: Appears when HDSDI REMOTE I/F is set to “CHARA” and SDI REC CONTROL is set to “RM” on the CAM CONFIG 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, and the camcorder is remotely controlling recording on external devices connected to the SDI
OUT 1/2 connectors (HDSDI output).
1)
REC2 P PARALLEL REC: Appears when
HDSDI REMOTE I/F is set to “CHARA” and SDI REC CONTROL is set to “PARA” on the CAM CONFIG 1 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu, and the camcorder and external devices connected to the SDI
OUT 1/2 connectors (HDSDI output)
1)
are mutually controlling recording.
SNGL: Appears when SINGLE CLIP MODE in the CAM CONFIG 1 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu is set to “ON”, and
the unit is searching or playing a clip (see page 77)
.
1) SDI OUT 1 SELECT or SDI OUT 2 SELECT on the
OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu must be set to HDSDI.
30
b Setting change and adjustment progress message display area
For details, see “Change confirmation/adjustment progress messages” (page 202).
c
External input status and aberration correction function
EXT HDSDI/SDSDI/VBS: When the REC
VIDEO SOURCE item on the SOURCE SEL page of the OPERATION menu has been set to EXT, then “EXT” and the signal type
(HDSDI, SDSDI, or VBS) flashes when a valid signal is input to this unit.
For details, see “Recording video from external devices” (page 96).
ALAC: Appears when ALAC in the CAM
CONFIG 3 page of the MAINTENANCE
menu is set to “AUTO” (see page 179) .
d Electric color temperature filter/Scene file number
The electric color temperature filter display appears when the CC 5600K function is set to
ON.
When DISP SCENE FILE on the VF DISP 3 page of the OPERATION menu is set to “ON”, the number of the currently loaded scene file (“S1” to
“S5”) appears instead of the filter display.
e Filter
Indicates the currently selected filter type
.
The optical CC filter position (A, B, C, or D) appears to the right side of the ND filter display
(1 to 4).
f
White balance memory
Indicates the currently selected white balance automatic adjustment memory.
A: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to A.
B: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to B.
P: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST or when the preset button on an RM-
B170 has been pushed.
T: Displayed when ATW is being used.
g
Timecode
Indicates the elapsed recording/playback time, timecode, user bits or other information selected
by the DISPLAY switch (see page 19) .
h Gain value
Indicates the gain value (in dB) of the video amplifier, as set by the GAIN selector.
i
Shutter speed
Indicates the shutter speed or the shutter mode.
However, if the SHUTTER selector (see page 14)
is set to OFF, nothing is displayed.
For details of the displayed shutter speed, see
“Setting the Electronic Shutter” (page 58).
j
Operation/alarm display area and clip transfer status display area
For details, see “Operation/alarm messages”
It also displays clip transfer status when an optional CBK-WA100 is connected.
k Audio level
Indicates the level of audio channel 1 and channel
2. The peak indication of the VDR level meter is related as follows to the audio level.
1
2
3 -52 -28 -20 -12 -8 (dB)
1 Audio channel 1 level indicator
2 Audio channel 2 level indicator
3 VDR level meter indicator
The segment colors change from gray to white at or above the AU REF LEVEL set on the AUDIO-
2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu. This setting does not affect the relationship between the number of lit segments and the audio levels.
The example in the above figure shows the colors when AU REF LEVEL is set to –20 dB.
l Remaining disc capacity
Indicates the remaining recording time (in minutes) of the disc.
31
.
.
.
110 <
100 <
90 <
90 - 85
.
.
.
85 - 80
20 - 15
15 - 10
10 - 5
5MIN (flash)
4MIN (flash)
3MIN (flash)
2MIN (flash)
1MIN (flash)
0MIN (flash)
Examples of remaining recording time indication
Indication
.
.
.
Remaining recording time
120 to 110 minutes
110 to 100 minutes
100 to 90 minutes
90 to 85 minutes
.
.
.
85 to 80 minutes
20 to 15 minutes
15 to 10 minutes
10 to 5 minutes
5 minutes
4 minutes
3 minutes
2 minutes
1 minute
0 minutes
Note
During shooting in special modes, such as Interval Rec or Slow & Quick Motion, the indicated remaining disc time may differ from the time which can be actually shot and recorded. This is particularly true when FRAME
RATE is set to the maximum value in Slow & Quick
Motion shooting, in which case the actual remaining time is about half of the indicated remaining disc time.
m Remaining clips display
Displays the remaining number of clips that can be recorded. The display flashes once per second when the number of remaining clips is less than
10.
n Iris setting/auto iris override
Indicates the F value (iris setting) of the lens.
Auto iris override is shown by an indicator made up of two segments each on the upper and lower sides.
For details, see “Changing the Reference Value for
Automatic Iris Adjustment” (page 62).
32
Chapter
2
Preparations
Preparing a Power
Supply
For safety, use only the Sony battery packs and
AC adaptors listed below.
• BP-FLX75 Lithium-ion Battery Pack
• AC power using the AC-DN2B/DN10 AC
Adaptor
Using a battery pack
When a BP-L80S/FL75 Battery Pack is used, the camcorder will operate continuously for the time shown below.
Model name
BP-FLX75
Operating time
Approx. 85 minutes
Note
The battery pack operating time depends on the frequency of use of the battery pack, and the ambient temperature when used.
Before use, charge the battery pack with a charger suitable for each battery.
For details on the battery charging procedure, refer to the battery charger operation manual.
Note on using the battery pack
A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully recharged.
To attach the battery pack
1
Press the battery pack against the back of the camcorder, aligning the line on the side of the battery pack with the matching line on the camcorder.
1
2
1 BP-FLX75
2 Align these lines.
2
Slide the battery pack down until its
“LOCK” arrow points at the matching line on the camcorder.
1
2
1 “LOCK” arrow
2 Matching line on the camcorder
Note
If the battery pack is not attached correctly, the terminal may be damaged.
33
To detach the battery pack
Holding the release button in, pull the battery pack up.
Attaching the Viewfinder
Release button
Notes
• During recording and playback (while the ACCESS indicator is lit), be careful never to remove the battery pack.
• Make sure to power the camcorder off before replacing the battery pack.
Using AC power
When using the AC-DN10 AC Adaptor
Mount an AC-DN10 on the camcorder in the same way as a battery pack, then connect to the
AC power supply.
The AC-DN10 can supply up to 100 W of power.
To an AC outlet
Attachment
A viewfinder is available separately.
The following describes an attachment example.
CAUTION
When the viewfinder is attached, do not leave the camcorder with the eyepiece facing the sun. Direct sunlight can enter through the eyepiece, be focused in the viewfinder and cause fire.
For details about attaching a viewfinder, refer to the manual for the viewfinder.
Note
When attaching the viewfinder, make notes of the following points.
• Be sure to the power off the camcorder before coupling the viewfinder connector to the camcorder’s VF connector. If you make this connection when the camcorder power is on, the viewfinder may not function properly.
• Couple the viewfinder connector firmly to the camcorder’s VF connector. If the coupling is loose, noise may appear on the video or the tally light may not operate properly.
For more information about the connection of the viewfinder and camcorder, contact a Sony service representative.
1
1 Loosen the viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring, 2 attach the viewfinder to the viewfinder fitting shoe, and 3 tighten the viewfinder leftto-right positioning ring.
34
Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring
Stopper
3 1
Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring
2
2
Couple the viewfinder connector to the
VF connector.
VF connector
Viewfinder front-to-back positioning knob
Moving the viewfinder shoe up
1
Loosen the front-to-back viewfinder positioning levers and the front-to-back viewfinder positioning knobs, and then pull the viewfinder slide assembly forward.
Detaching the viewfinder
You can carry out this by following the attaching procedure in reverse order, but there is an additional action to take: when detaching the viewfinder from the fitting shoe, pull up the stopper.
Adjusting the viewfinder position
To adjust the viewfinder left-right position, loosen the left-right positioning ring, and to adjust the front-back position, loosen the front-to-back positioning knob.
2
Using a 2.5 mm diameter hexagonal wrench, detach the viewfinder slide assembly and handle front cover.
35
Handle front cover
Bolt with hexagonal hole
Using the BKW-401 Viewfinder
Rotation Bracket
By fitting a BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation
Bracket (not supplied), you can rotate the viewfinder out of the way so that your right leg does not hit the viewfinder while you are carrying the camcorder.
Viewfinder slide assembly
3
Attach the handle front cover with the bottom edge up.
1
Carry out steps 1 and 2 of the previous section “Moving the viewfinder shoe up” to detach the viewfinder slide assembly.
2
Attach the BKW-401 with the supplied bolts.
Bolts supplied with the BKW-401
To attach the viewfinder at the top
To attach the viewfinder at the bottom (factory default)
4
Attach the viewfinder slide assembly, reversing the steps of the removal procedure.
3
Adjust the front-to-back position so that the arm of the BKW-401 does not touch the handle when it is raised.
36
Adjust position so that arm does not touch handle
Setting the Area of Use
When using the unit for the first time
The area of use is not factory preset. Before using this unit, you need to set this item. (You cannot use the unit without setting this item.)
To set the area of use
Adjusting the viewfinder focus and screen
To adjust the viewfinder focus
Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the viewfinder image is sharpest.
Diopter adjustment ring
To adjust the viewfinder screen
Adjust the brightness, contrast, and peaking of the viewfinder screen with the controls shown below.
MENU knob
POWER switch
1
Set the POWER switch to the ON position.
The screen for setting the area of use appears in the viewfinder.
FORMAT SETTING
COUNTRY : NOT SELECTED
SYSTEM LINE : 1080
SET FORMAT
AND TURN OFF ONCE.
1 2
1 PEAKING control
2 CONTRAST control
3 BRIGHT control
3
2
Press the MENU knob.
z on the left of NOT SELECTED changes to
?
, and you can now select the area of use.
FORMAT SETTING
COUNTRY :?NOT SELECTED
SYSTEM LINE : 1080
SET FORMAT
AND TURN OFF ONCE.
37
3
Turn the MENU knob to display the desired area of use.
Setting
NTSC(J)AREA
NTSC AREA
PAL AREA
Area of use
NTSC area (Japan)
a)
NTSC area (for areas other than Japan)
b)
PAL area
c) a) The composite signal output from this unit is an
NTSC signal with no black setup. The system frequency is 59.94i.
b) The composite signal output from this unit is an
NTSC signal with a black setup (7.5 IRE). The system frequency is 59.94i.
c) The composite signal output from this unit is a
PAL signal. The system frequency is 50i.
4
Change the SYSTEM LINE (video resolution) setting as required.
Setting Resolution (horizontal × vertical)
1080 1080 lines (1920 × 1080)
720 720 lines (1280 × 720)
5
Set the POWER switch to OFF, then once again to ON.
The unit is now ready for use.
Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock
You can set or change the date and time of the internal clock. The date and time set are reflected in the timecode.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the TIME/DATE page of the
DIAGNOSIS menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
D02 TIME/DATE TOP
ADJUST : EXEC
GPS ADJUST : EXEC
HOUR : 12
MIN : 55
SEC : 58
YEAR : 14
MONTH : 03
DAY : 31
2
Press the MENU knob.
The TIME ADJUST setting window appears.
TIME ADJUST ESC
HOUR : 12
MIN : 55
SEC : 58
YEAR : 14
MONTH : 03
DAY : 31
OK
• HOUR: Sets the hour value.
• MIN: Sets the minutes value.
• SEC: Sets the seconds value.
• YEAR: Sets the year.
• MONTH: Sets the month.
• DAY: Sets the day.
3
Turn the MENU knob to move b to the item you want to set, and press the
MENU knob.
b on the left of the selected item changes to z and z on the left of the setting changes to
?
.
38
4
Turn the MENU knob to display the desired value, and press the MENU knob.
z changes to b and ?
changes to z .
5
To continue the remaining settings, repeat steps 3 and 4.
6
When you finish settings, turn the
MENU knob to move b to “OK”, then press the MENU knob.
The internal clock is set with the date and time set in steps 3 to 5 . The TIME/DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu appears again. The time set on the TIME ADJUST setting window is displayed.
To cancel the setting
Before executing step 6 , move b to “ESC” at the top right of the window and press the MENU knob.
Alternatively, flick the CANCEL/PRST/
ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE side.
All settings or changes are discarded and the
TIME/DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu appears.
Note
When you set the time, also set TIME ZONE.
Set TIME ZONE on the UMID SET page of the
OPERATION menu. For details, see “Setting the
Setting the Clock to GPS Time
You can set the camcorder clock using clocks on
GPS satellites.
Note
The following actions are required on the camcorder in order to use this function.
• GPS must be set to ON on the GPS SETUP page of the
OPERATION menu.
• GPS positioning
1
Display the TIME/DATE page in the
DIAGNOSIS menu, and turn the
MENU knob until the b cursor is pointing to GPS ADJUST.
D02 TIME/DATE TOP
ADJUST : EXEC
GPS ADJUST : EXEC
HOUR : 12
MIN : 55
SEC : 58
YEAR : 14
MONTH : 03
DAY : 31
2
Press the MENU knob.
The “EXECUTE OK?” message appears (the b cursor is pointing to NO, which is flashing).
3
Turn the MENU knob to select YES, then press the MENU knob.
The camcorder clock is set to the time using clocks on the GPS satellites.
39
Mounting the Lens
First power off the camcorder, and then mount the lens using the following procedure.
For information about using the lens, refer to the operation manual for the lens.
3
Lens mount securing rubber securing rubber be put on the lens locking lever as illustrated above.
4
Connect the lens cable to the LENS connector.
5
Secure the lens cable with the cable clamps.
5 4 2 1
1
Push the lens locking lever up and remove the lens mount cap from the lens mount.
2
Align the center pin on the lens with the center slot in the lens mount, and insert the lens into the mount.
3
Holding the lens in place, push the lens locking lever down to lock the lens.
Caution
If the lens is not firmly locked, it may come off while the camcorder is being used. This could cause a serious accident. Make sure the lens is firmly locked. It is recommended that the lens mount
40
Adjusting the Flange
Focal Length
If the lens does not stay in focus properly as you zoom from telephoto to wide angle, adjust the flange focal length (the distance from the plane of the lens mounting flange to the imaging plane).
Make this adjustment after mounting or changing the lens.
The position of the controls for adjusting the flange focal length vary somewhat from lens to lens. Check the identification of the various controls in the lens manual.
8
Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the chart stays in focus all the way from wide angle to telephoto.
9
Tighten the F.f or F.B ring fixing screws.
About 3 m (10 ft)
1
Set the iris to manual.
2
Open the iris. Place the flange focal length adjustment chart about 3 m
(10 ft) away from the camera, lit well enough to provide a satisfactory video output level.
3
Loosen the fixing screws on the F.f or
F.B ring (flange focal length adjustment ring).
4
Use manual or power zoom to set the lens to telephoto.
5
Point the camera at the chart by turning the focus ring and focus on it.
6
Set the zoom ring to wide angle.
7
Turn the F.f or F.B ring until the chart is in focus, being careful not to disturb the focus ring.
41
Preparing the Audio
Input System
2
Connecting a microphone to the
MIC IN connector
You can attach the ECM-680S stereo microphone
(not supplied) to the microphone holder of the
HDVF-20A viewfinder (not supplied).
1
Loosen the screw and open the microphone holder clamp.
Microphone holder clamp
1
2
4 3
1
On how to perform this operation, refer to the operation manual for the microphone.
3
Plug the microphone cable into the MIC
IN connector, then set the AUDIO IN switch for the channel on which you want to record the audio from this microphone to FRONT (for CH-1/
CH-2) or F (for CH-3/CH-4).
2
Place the microphone in the microphone holder.
1 Wind the microphone spacer (sheet type, supplied with this unit and the
ECM-680S) around the microphone, while peeling off the protective sheets on both sides of the microphone spacer.
2 Place the microphone in the holder so that “UP” is at the top.
3 Close the microphone holder.
4 Tighten the screw.
4
Secure the microphone cable with the cable clamps.
Connecting microphones to the
AUDIO IN connectors
You can connect up to two monaural microphones to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors, using a CAC-12 Microphone Holder
(not supplied).
42
The following is the procedure for attaching an electret condenser microphone such as the ECM-
678/673.
On how to attach the CAC-12, refer to the operation manual for the CAC-12.
1
Attach the electret condenser microphone.
1 Loosen the ball joint lock lever.
2 Wind the microphone spacer (sheet type, supplied with this unit and the microphone) around the microphone, while peeling off the protective sheets on both sides of the microphone spacer.
3 Place the microphone in the holder so that “UP” is at the top.
4 Close the microphone holder.
5 Tighten the screw.
6 Position so that the microphone does not interfere with the viewfinder and tighten the ball joint lock lever.
When attaching the ECM-678/673, use the microphone adaptor supplied with the CAC-
12 Microphone Holder.
2
Connect the microphone cable to the
AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector.
3
Set the switches as follows.
Set the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector to
MIC.
• Set the +48V/OFF switch indicated below, depending on the power supply type of the microphone.
Internal power supply: Set the +48V/OFF switch to OFF.
External power supply: Set the +48V/
OFF switch to +48V.
• Set the AUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-
4) switch for the channel to which the microphone is connected to REAR (for
CH-1/CH-2) or R (for CH-3/CH-4).
1 2
Microphone
3 4
1 +48V/OFF switch
2 Monaural microphone
3 AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches
4 To AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector
4
Switch the input level to match the sensitivity of the microphone used.
Switch the input level by changing the REAR
MIC REF setting on the AUDIO-1 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu (factory default setting is –60 dB).
.
XLR connection automatic detection function
With the XLR connection automatic detection function being on, when a cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector, the input from that connector is automatically selected for audio recording, regardless of the setting of the
AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch.
The XLR connection automatic detection function can be switched on or off on the
43
AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, with the REAR XLR AUTO item.
Notes
• If the input level on this unit is not at an appropriate setting for the microphone sensitivity, loud sounds may be distorted, and the signal-to-noise ratio may be affected.
• In order for the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 connectors on the camcorder to be able to provide a phantom 48 V power supply, female XLR connectors (3-pin) are fitted. If the microphone cable has a female connector, use an adaptor.
• When you detach a CAC-12 Microphone Holder once you have attached to the camcorder, be careful not to lose the two screws fixing the CAC-12 (in step 1 ).
After detaching the CAC-12, be sure to put the two screws back into their original places.
Attaching a digital wireless receiver (when using digital wireless microphone)
To use a Sony digital wireless microphone, attach one of the following wireless receivers.
• DWR-S02DN Digital Wireless Receiver
• URX-S03D UHF Synthesized Diversity Tuner
Also refer to the operating instructions for the digital wireless receiver.
To attach the DWR-S02DN/URX-S03D
1
Remove the four fixing screws holding the cover of the portable tuner/receiver housing slot located in the rear of this unit, to remove the cover.
2
Insert the DWR-S02DN or URX-S03D, and tighten the four screws to secure in place.
DWR-S02DN or URX-S03D
3
Set the AUDIO IN switch for the channel to which you want to input
audio signal to WIRELESS (see page
Notes
• When the XLR connection automatic detection function is on, even if the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch is set to WIRELESS, the signal input to the
AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector is automatically selected when an audio cable is connected to the
AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector. In such a case, set
REAR XLR AUTO to OFF on the AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu. (The factory default setting is OFF.)
• When the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector is set to
LINE or MIC, the audio signals recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 are not affected by the XLR automatic detection function. They are determined by the settings of the AUDIO IN CH-3 and CH-4 switches.
Connecting line input audio equipment
Connect the audio output connector of the audio equipment that supplies the line input signal to the
AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector.
Switch settings
Set the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector for the channel to which the audio signal source is connected to LINE.
Selecting the audio inputs to be recorded
• With the XLR connection automatic detection function being off (the factory default setting):
A signal must be selected for audio recording by setting the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch to
REAR depending on which of the AUDIO IN
CH1 and CH2 connectors is used for connecting the external audio equipment.
44
• With the XLR connection automatic detection function being on: When a cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector, the input from that connector is automatically selected for audio recording, regardless of the setting of the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch.
The XLR connection automatic detection function can be switched on or off on the
AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, with the REAR XLR AUTO item.
Tripod Mounting
1
Attach the VCT-14 tripod adaptor (not supplied) to the tripod.
Tripod adaptor
4
1 2 3
1 AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches
2 To AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector
3 Audio equipment
4 LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selectors
Camera mount
2
Mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor.
45
Slide the camcorder forward along the groove in the adaptor until it clicks.
3
Try to move the camcorder back and forth to confirm that it does not slip off the attachment.
To remove the camcorder from the tripod adaptor
Hold down the red button and pull the lever in the direction of the arrow.
Connecting a Video
Light
Red button
Lever
Note
The tripod adaptor pin may remain in the engaged position even after the camcorder is removed. If this happens, press the red button against the lever a second time and move the lever as shown above until the pin returns to the stowed position. If the pin remains in the engaged position, you will not be able to mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor.
With this camcorder, you can use the Anton
Bauer Ultralight 2 or equivalent video light
(powered by 12 V with maximum power consumption of 50 W).
• If you connect the video light to the LIGHT connector on the camcorder and set the LIGHT switch to AUTO, you can turn the light on and off automatically as you start and stop the VDR operation.
• The output of the LIGHT connector on the camcorder is controlled to 12 V even when the camcorder is supplied with over 12 V power
(through the DC IN connector or battery pack).
The brightness or color temperature of the light will not change according to voltage increase.
Notes
• Do not use a video light with power consumption of over 50 W.
• The brightness or color temperature of the light will change when the voltage (supplied through the DC IN connector or from the battery pack) is under 12 V.
To attach the video light
Fit the video light to the accessory fitting shoe on the camcorder grip, and connect the video light cable to the LIGHT connector.
Note
The accessory fitting shoe on this unit is of the
1
/
4
-inch tapped hole type. If you want to replace this with a slidetype shoe, contact a Sony service representative.
46
Using the Shoulder
Strap
To attach the shoulder strap
1
Fit one of the clips to a shoulder strap fitting.
Pull up the strap to lock the fitting.
To remove the shoulder strap
Press here and pull in the direction shown by the arrow to release.
g g
Clip
2
Fit the other clip to the shoulder strap fitting on the other side of the grip in the same way as in step 1.
47
Adjusting the Shoulder
Pad Position
Connecting the Remote
Control Unit
You can shift the shoulder pad from its center position (the factory default setting) backward by up to 10 mm (
13
/
32
inch) or forward by up to
25 mm (1 inch). This adjustment helps you get the best balance for shooting with the camcorder on your shoulder.
1,3
Note
Before connecting/disconnecting a remote control unit to/from the camcorder, be sure to turn the power of the camcorder off.
Connecting the RM-B170 Remote Control Unit enables remote control of the principal camera functions.
Connecting the remote control unit to the
REMOTE connector (8-pin) automatically puts the camcorder into remote control mode. If you disconnect the remote control unit, the remote control mode is cancelled.
1
2
Shoulder pad
1
Raise the lever in the center of the shoulder pad to unlock the shoulder pad.
2
Slide the shoulder pad backward or forward until it is in the most convenient position.
3
Bring down the lever to lock the shoulder pad in the selected position.
2
3
1 RM-B170
2 Remote control cable
3 REMOTE connector
Camcorder switch functions when the remote control unit is connected
The following switches on the camcorder do not function.
• GAIN selector
• OUTPUT/DCC switch
• WHITE BAL switch
• AUTO W/B BAL switch
• SHUTTER selector
• Button to which the TURBO SWITCH function has been assigned (ASSIGN 1/3/4/5 switch or
RET button on the lens)
• REC START button (and the VTR button on the lens, and the button to which the recording start/ stop function has been assigned (ASSIGN 1/3/
4/5 switch or RET button on the lens)) (when the RM REC START item on the CAM
48
CONFIG 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to RM)
Paint adjustment when the remote control unit is connected
The settings of the paint adjustment that were in effect the last time the remote control unit was used are recalled.
Function of the recording start/stop buttons when the remote control unit is connected
When the remote control unit is connected, you can make a setting to determine which of the recording start/stop buttons you will use. This setting is made using the RM REC START item on the CAM CONFIG 2 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu.
Relationship between the setting of the RM REC
START item and the function of recording start/ stop buttons
Recording start/ stop button
Settings of RM REC
START
RM CAM PARA
Disabled Enabled Enabled Camcorder’s REC
START button
Lens VTR button Disabled Enabled Enabled
Button to which the recording start/stop function has been assigned
(camcorder
ASSIGN 1/3/4/5 switch or RET button on the lens)
Remote control unit’s VTR button
Disabled Enabled Enabled
Enabled Disabled Enabled
When the monitor is connected to the
MONITOR OUT connector of the remote control unit
The MONITOR connector (BNC type) of the
RM-B170 outputs the same signal as that from the
TEST OUT connector on the camcorder.
Use the black cable supplied with the RM-B170 to connect the monitor to the MONITOR connector on the RM-B170.
When the remote control unit is disconnected from the camcorder
The camcorder settings return to the settings in effect before the remote control unit was connected.
Structure of the paint adjustment data
The non-volatile memory of the camcorder used for storing paint adjustment data consists of two regions as shown below: one is the “independent data region” that is used when a remote control unit is not connected, and the other is the “remote control data region” that is used when a remote control unit is connected. Paint adjustment data is automatically selected and output to the camera section depending on whether or not a remote control unit such as the RM-B170 is connected.
Setup menu of the camcorder
RM-B170
Independent data region
Remote control data region
MA S TER BLACK
MA S TER GAMMA
KNEE POINT
DETAIL LEVEL
R/B GAIN
R/B BLACK
MA S TER BLACK
MA S TER GAMMA
KNEE POINT
DETAIL LEVEL
R/B GAIN
R/B BLACK
Non-volatile memory
Hardware of the camera section
RM-B170 connected
RM-B170 not connected
Thus, when a remote control unit is connected to the camcorder, the effective data region is switched to the “remote control data region” and the settings of the paint adjustment that were in effect the last time the remote control unit was used are recalled.
The settings of the absolute value rotational controls
1)
and absolute value switches
2)
are overwritten by those on the remote control unit after the remote control unit is connected.
When the remote control unit is disconnected from the camcorder, the “independent data
49
region” becomes effective. Thus the camcorder will return to the settings that were in effect before the remote control unit was connected.
1) Absolute value rotational controls: The data corresponding to the angular position of controls is output. Rotational controls for which the data corresponding to the amount of their rotation is output are called relative value controls.
2) Absolute value switches: Like toggle switches or slide switches (except momentary switches), the switches (or knobs) whose positions must coincide with their functions are called absolute value switches.
When RM COMMON MEMORY on the CAM
CONFIG 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to “ON”, you can use settings of the paint adjustment data stored in the independent data region even if you connect the remote control unit. In this case, the settings stored in the independent data region will be renewed when you change the settings on the remote control unit. Thus, the settings of the paint data made with the remote control unit can be retained even if the remote control unit is removed. However, if the switch position on the remote control unit differs from the one on the camcorder, the switch position on the camcorder takes precedence over that on the remote control unit.
Also, it is possible to keep the settings that are in effect before you connect the remote control unit.
In this case, you should set the control knob to the relative value mode on the remote control unit.
For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with the remote control unit.
50
Chapter
3
Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
Setting the Recording
Format
The recording formats supported by this camcorder are as follows.
Video
Recording format Resolution System
MPEG HD422 50
(Bit rate: 50 Mbps)
1080 frequency a)
59.94i/29.97P/
50i/25P/
23.98P
MPEG HD420 HQ/
SP
(Bit rate: 35/25
Mbps)
720
1080
720
525
59.94P/50P
59.94i/29.97P/
50i/25P/
23.98P
59.94P/50P
MPEG IMX 50/40/
30
(Bit rate: 50/40/30
Mbps)
625
59.94i
b)
29.97P
50i
25P c)
DVCAM
(Bit rate: 25 Mbps)
525
59.94i
29.97P
b)
625
50i c)
25P a) 59.94i/29.97P/59.94P: When the area of use is set to
NTSC(J)AREA/NTSC AREA.
50i/25P/50P: When the area of use is set to PAL
AREA.
b) When the combination of the SYSTEM LINE and
SYSTEM FREQUENCY settings is 1080/59.9i or
720/59.9P
c) When the combination of the SYSTEM LINE and
SYSTEM FREQUENCY settings is 1080/50i or 720/
50P
Audio
Recording format
24bit/48kHz
16bit/48kHz
Number of channels
8 channels a)
4 channels b)
8 channels b)
4 channels c) a) When the video recording format is set to MPEG
HD422 50.
b) When the video recording format is set to MPEG IMX
50/40/30.
c) When the video recording format is set to MPEG
HD420 HQ/SP or DVCAM.
Notes
• It is not possible to combine material recorded in
different frame frequency groups on a single disc (see page 52) .
• This unit can record up to four channels of audio. If you select a format with eight channels of audio, silence is recorded in channels 5 to 8.
Setting the system frequency
1
Display the FORMAT page of the
OPERATION menu.
027 FORMAT TOP
SYSTEM LINE : 1080
SYSTEM FREQUENCY: 59.9i
REC FORMAT : HD422 50
COUNTRY : NTSC(J)AREA
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select SYSTEM FREQUENCY, and turn the MENU knob to select the desired system frequency.
51
You can select the frequency shown below depending on the combination of the
COUNTRY and SYSTEM LINE settings.
COUNTRY
NTSC(J)AREA
NTSC AREA
PAL AREA
SYSTEM
LINE
SYSTEM
FREQUENCY
1080
720
59.9i/29.9P/
23.98P
59.9P
1080
720
50i/25P
50P
Change the COUNTRY or SYSTEM LINE setting as required.
Setting the video recording format
1
Display the FORMAT page of the
OPERATION menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select REC FORMAT, and turn the
MENU knob to select the desired recording format.
As you turn the MENU knob, the recording format changes as follows: HD422 50 y
HD420 HQ y HD420 SP y IMX 50 y
IMX 40 y IMX 30 y DVCAM.
To set the aspect ratio (when IMX 50, IMX 40,
IMX 30, or DVCAM is selected)
Select ASPECT RATIO(SD) on the FORMAT page, and turn the MENU knob to select the desired aspect ratio.
As you turn the MENU knob, the aspect ratio changes as follows: 16:9 y 4:3.
027 FORMAT TOP
SYSTEM LINE : 1080
SYSTEM FREQUENCY: 59.9i
REC FORMAT : IMX 50
ASPECT RATIO(SD): 16:9
AU DATA LEN(IMX): 16bit
COUNTRY : NTSC(J)AREA
Note
The unit ignores this setting when it records video from
external devices (see page 96) .
To set the audio recording format (when IMX 50,
IMX 40, or IMX 30 is selected)
Select AU DATA LEN(IMX) on the FORMAT page or AUDIO-2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, and turn the MENU knob to select the desired audio recording format.
As you turn the MENU knob, the audio recording format changes as follows: 16bit y 24bit.
Mixed recording of clips in different formats on the same disc
As long as the frame frequency group is the same, clips in different recording formats can be recorded or written to the same disc.
1)
In this manual, this is referred to as “mixed format recording mode”.
1) The recording format is regarded as different whenever the system frequency, video resolution, video codec/bit rate, or number of audio channels or number of bits does not match.
Notes
• Regardless of frame frequency group matching, it is not possible to mix clips with different video resolutions (number of system lines) in the same clip list.
• When the unit is in a mode that calls for playback across clips that were recorded in different recording formats, video and audio playback may stop at the point where the format changes from one format into another, and then start again.
Frame frequency groups
The system frequencies supported by this unit are divided into frame frequency groups, as shown in the following table.
Frame frequency group System frequency
59.94 Hz 59.94P
59.94i
29.97P
50 Hz
23.98 Hz
50P
50i
25P
23.98P
You can record clips with different recording formats, for example HD422 and HD420SP clips, by putting this unit into mixed format recording mode.
To enable mixed format recording mode
Set MIXED RECORDING on the CAM
CONFIG 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu to “ENABL”.
If you want to disable mixing of clips with different recording formats, leave this item set to
52
“DSABL”. However, regardless of the mixed format recording mode setting, it is always possible to mix clips in the following format groups.
• HD420 HQ, SP, and LP
• 1080/59.94i and 1080/29.97P
• 1080/50i and 1080/25P
53
Adjusting the Black
Balance and the White
Balance
To ensure excellent image quality when using this camcorder, conditions may require that both the black balance and the white balance be adjusted.
Black balance adjustment
The black balance will require adjustment in the following cases.
• When the camcorder is used for the first time
• When the camcorder has not been used for a long time
• When the camcorder is used under conditions in which the surrounding temperature has changed greatly
• When the GAIN selector (L/M/H) values have been changed by using the USER menu
It is not usually necessary to adjust the black balance when using the camcorder after it has been off.
White balance adjustment
Always readjust the white balance when the lighting conditions change.
Viewfinder screen displays
If the black balance or white balance adjustment is started, messages that report on the progress and results are displayed on the viewfinder screen when the VF DISP MODE item is set to “2” or
“3” on the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu.
Note
Black balance and white balance adjustment values that are automatically set by the camcorder and the various settings are stored in the camcorder memory and retained even when the power is turned off.
Adjusting the black balance
In automatic black balance mode, adjustments are performed in the following order: black set and black balance. Manual black balance adjustment can be selected from the setup menu.
For details of manual black balance adjustment, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
2 1
1 OUTPUT/DCC switch
2 AUTO W/B BAL switch
1
Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM.
2
Flick the AUTO W/B BAL switch to
BLK and release the switch.
The switch returns to the center position, and the adjustment is executed.
During adjustment, the following message is displayed on the viewfinder screen.
ABB:EXECUTING
BLACK SET
The messages change in the following sequence :
BLACK SET r
BLACK BALANCE
The black balance adjustment ends in a few seconds with the message “ABB:OK” and the adjustment value is automatically stored in memory.
Notes
• During the black balance adjustment, the iris is automatically closed.
• During the black balance adjustment, the gain selection circuit is automatically activated so you may see flickering on the viewfinder screen, but this is not a fault.
If automatic black balance adjustment cannot be made
If the black balance adjustment cannot be completed normally, an error message will appear for about 3 seconds on the viewfinder screen.
Possible messages are listed below.
Error message
ABB : NG
IRIS NOT CLOSE
ABB : NG
TIME LIMIT
ABB : NG
R (or G or B) :
OVERFLOW
Meaning
The lens iris did not close; adjustment was impossible.
Adjustment could not be completed within the standard number of attempts.
The difference between the reference value and the current value is so great that it exceeds the range.
Adjustment was impossible.
If any of the above error messages is displayed, retry the black balance adjustment.
Keep pushing the AUTO W/B BAL switch to
BLK until “-BLACK SET-” appears after
“-BLACK BALANCE-” appears. If the error message occurs again, an internal check is necessary.
For information about this internal check, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
Note
If the lens cable is not firmly connected to the LENS connector, it may not be possible to adjust the lens iris. If this happens, the black balance will be incorrect.
Black balance memory
Values stored in memory are held until the black balance is next adjusted.
If a memory error occurs
If the error message “: STORED DATA : NG” flashes on the viewfinder screen when the camcorder is turned on, the black balance and white balance memory contents have been lost.
Adjust the black balance and white balance again.
Contact a Sony representative if this message continues to appear even after the black balance and white balance have been adjusted again.
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
54
Adjusting the white balance
1
Set the switches and selectors as shown in the figure below.
change and adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen (in display mode 3).
3
Place a white test card under the same lighting conditions as for the subject to be shot and zoom up to it.
Alternatively, any white object such as a cloth or a wall can be used.
The absolute minimum white area is as follows.
Rectangle centered on the screen. The lengths of the sides are 70% of the length and width of the screen.
1 2 34
1 FILTER selector
2 GAIN selector: Set as low as possible.
3 OUTPUT/DCC switch: CAM
4 WHITE BAL switch: A or B a) a)White balance setting values are stored in memory B only when the WHITE SWITCH <B> item is set to “MEM” on the WHITE SETTING page of the OPERATION menu.
If the setting of the GAIN selector or WHITE
BAL switch is changed, a message reporting the new setting position appears for about 3 seconds in the setting change and adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen.
2
Set the FILTER selector to suit the lighting conditions as follows.
The possible settings of the FILTER selector and their corresponding filters to be selected are listed below.
2
3
FILTER selector (inner knob) setting
1
4
ND filter
CLEAR
1
/
4
ND
1
/
16
ND
1
/
64
ND
If the setting of the FILTER selector is changed, a message reporting the setting appears for about 3 seconds in the setting
The white object must be within the rectangle and have an area of at least 10% of the screen.
Note
Make sure there are not bright spots in the rectangle.
4
Adjust the lens iris.
Manually adjusted lens: set the iris to an appropriate setting.
Lens with automatic iris: set the automatic/ manual switch on the lens to automatic.
5
Flick the AUTO W/B BAL switch to
WHT and then release the switch.
AUTO W/B BAL switch
The switch returns to the center position, and the adjustment is executed.
During adjustment, the message
“AWB:EXECUTING WHITE BALANCE”
55
is displayed on the viewfinder screen (in display mode 2 or 3).
The white balance adjustment ends in about one second with the message shown in the following figure, and the adjustment setting is automatically stored in the memory (A or
B) that was selected in step 1 .
AWB:OK
. K
Approximate color temperature of the subject
Note
If the camera has a zoom lens with an automatic iris, the iris may hunt
1)
during the adjustment. To prevent this, adjust the iris gain knob (indicated as
IG, IS, or S) on the lens.
For details, refer to the lens operation manual.
1) Hunting: Repeated brightening and darkening of the image, resulting from repeated response to automatic iris control.
If the automatic white balance adjustment cannot be made
If the white balance adjustment cannot be completed normally, an error message will appear for about 3 seconds on the viewfinder screen (in display mode 2 or 3).
Possible messages are listed below.
Error message
WHITE : NG
LOW LEVEL
WHITE : NG
COLOR TEMP
HIGH
WHITE : NG
COLOR TEMP LOW
WHITE : NG
TIME LIMIT
Meaning
The white video level is too low. Either open the lens iris or increase the gain.
The color temperature is too high.
The color temperature is too low.
Adjustment could not be completed within the standard number of attempts.
Error message
WHITE : NG
POOR WHITE
AREA
WHITE : NG
OVER LEVEL
Meaning
The white area could not be checked.
The white video level is too high. Either stop down the lens iris or change the
ND filter.
If any of the above error messages is displayed, retry the white balance adjustment. If the error message occurs again, an internal check is necessary.
For information about this internal check, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
If you have no time to adjust the white balance
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.
For details of automatic white balance adjustment,
White balance memory
Values stored in memory are held until the white balance is next adjusted.
There are two sets of white balance memories, A and B, and adjustments for each of the CC filters can be automatically stored in the memory corresponding to the setting (A or B) of the
WHITE BAL switch. The camcorder has four built-in CC filters, so a total of eight (4 × 2) adjustments can be stored. However, the memory contents are not linked to the CC filter settings in the following cases.
• When the number of memories allocated to each of A and B is limited to one by setting the
FILTER WHT MEM item on the WHITE
SETTING page of the OPERATION menu to
OFF.
If the WHITE BAL switch is set to B, and on the
WHITE SETTING page of the OPERATION menu, the WHITE SWITCH <B> item is set to
“ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance)”, the ATW function is activated to automatically adjust the white balance of the picture being shot for varying lighting conditions.
To save white balance settings obtained by ATW
Set ATW HOLD MEMORY in the WHITE
SETTING page of the OPERATION menu to
“ON”. When this is done, auto white balance settings obtained by ATW are written to the
56
memory corresponding to the setting (A or B) that is currently selected with the WHITE BAL switch.
1)
You can then turn ATW off and continue shooting with the current white balance values.
The unit continues to use the values that were in effect immediately before ATW was turned off.
1) This function is not available when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST. If you have connected a remote control unit, the unit uses the memory corresponding to the remote control unit setting (A, B, or C).
continues to appear even after the white balance and black balance have been adjusted again.
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
WB
ATW HOLD MEMORY: OFF a) t
ATW: ON ATW: OFF a) White balance settings stored in memory
A, B, or C
WB
ATW HOLD MEMORY: ON b)
ATW: ON ATW: OFF b) White balance settings immediately before ATW was turned off.
t
White balance settings used when ATW is turned off
(WB: White balance setting value, t: Shooting time)
If a memory error occurs
If the error message “: STORED DATA : NG” flashes on the viewfinder screen when the camcorder is turned on, the white balance and black balance memory contents have been lost.
Adjust the white balance and black balance again.
Contact a Sony representative if this message
57
Setting the Electronic
Shutter
Shutter modes
The shutter modes that can be used with the electronic shutter and the shutter speeds that can be selected are listed below.
Standard mode
Select this mode for shooting fast-moving subjects with little blurring.
SYSTEM
LINE setting
1080
System frequency
59.94i
720
50i
29.97P
25P
23.98P
59.94P
50P
Shutter speed (unit: seconds)
1
/
100
,
1
/
125
,
1
/
250
,
1
/
500
,
1
/
1000
,
1
/
2000
1
/
60
,
1
/
125
,
1
/
250
,
1
/
500
,
1
/
1000
,
1
/
2000
1
/
40
a)
,
1
/
60
,
1
/
120
,
1
/
125
,
1
/
250
,
1
/
500
,
1
/
1000
,
1
/
2000
1
/
33
a)
,
1
/
50
,
1
/
100
,
1
/
125
,
1
/
250
,
1
/
500
,
1
/
1000
,
1
/
2000
1
/
32
a)
,
1
/
48
,
1
/
50
,
1
/
60
,
1
/
96
,
1
/
125
,
1
/
250
,
1
/
500
,
1
/
1000
,
1
/
2000
1
/
100
,
1
/
125
,
1
/
250
,
1
/
500
,
1
/
1000
,
1
/
2000
1
/
60
,
1
/
125
,
1
/
250
,
1
/
500
,
1
/
1000
,
1
/
2000 a) This speed cannot be selected when the unit is in Slow
& Quick Motion mode and FRAME RATE on the
REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu is set to a value that is greater than the system frequency.
ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode
Select this mode for obtaining images with no horizontal bands of noise when shooting subjects such as monitor screens.
SYSTEM
LINE setting
1080
720
System frequency
59.94i
50i
29.97P
a)
25P
a)
23.98P
a)
59.94P
50P
Shutter speed
(unit: Hz)
60.00 to 4300
50.00 to 4700
30.00 to 2700
25.00 to 2300
24.00 to 2200
60.00 to 4300
50.00 to 4700 a) When the unit is in Slow & Quick Motion mode and
FRAME RATE on the REC FUNCTION page of the
OPERATION menu is set to a value that is greater than the system frequency, the lower limits for shutter speed settings are as shown below.
29.97P: 60.00Hz
25P: 50.00Hz
23.98P: 48.00Hz
SLS (slow speed shutter) mode
Select this mode for shooting subjects in low level lighting conditions.
SYSTEM LINE setting
1080
720
Shutter speed (unit: frames)
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 16
2, 4, 6, 8, 16
Notes
• Whatever the operating mode of the electronic shutter, the sensitivity of the CCD decreases with increasing shutter speed.
• When the automatic iris is used, the iris opens wider as the shutter speed increases, thus reducing the depth of field.
• Under artificial light, particularly fluorescent or mercury lamps, the light intensity may appear to be constant, but the red, green, and blue intensities are actually changing in synchronization with the frequency of the power supply causing flicker. Using an electronic shutter under such lighting could make the flicker even worse. Color flicker is particularly likely to happen when the power supply frequency is
60 Hz. However, if the power frequency is 50 Hz, setting the shutter speed to
1
/
100 can reduce this flicker.
• When a bright object is shot in ECS mode in such a manner that it fills the screen, the upper edge of the picture may have poor quality because of an inherent characteristic of CCDs. Before using ECS mode, check the shooting conditions.
• The selectable shutter speeds vary depending on the current system frequency.
• In SLS mode, white flecks are more prominent when you set the shutter speed (number of frames) to higher values.
Executing the APR(SLS) function on the APR page
58
(see page 181) may alleviate the problem of white
flecks in SLS mode.
Selecting the shutter mode and shutter speed
Switching the shutter mode, and the shutter speed in standard mode: Repeatedly flick the SHUTTER selector to the SELECT side
(see the next section) .
Switching the shutter speed in ECS mode and
SLS mode: Select ECS mode or SLS mode with the SHUTTER selector, and then turn the MENU knob
MENU knob
SHUTTER selector
You can use the SHT ENABLE page of the
OPERATION menu to narrow the range of choice in advance, or to select in advance whether or not you use ECS or SLS.
To set the shutter mode and standardmode shutter speed
Once the shutter speed is selected, it is retained even when the camcorder power is turned off.
1
Follow the procedure described in
“Selecting the display items” (page 200)
to set the VF DISPLAY MODE item to
“2” or “3” on the VF DISP 1 page of the
USER menu.
2
Flick the SHUTTER selector from ON to SELECT.
The current shutter setting indication appears for about 3 seconds in the setting change and adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen.
Examples: “: SS : 1/250”, “: ECS : 60.0 Hz”
3
Before the shutter setting indication disappears, flick the SHUTTER selector down to SELECT again and repeat this until the desired mode or speed appears.
When all modes and speeds are displayed, the display changes in the following order.
Standard mode (with system frequency: 59.94i)
SLS mode ECS mode
If you have changed the configuration, only the selected modes and speeds appear.
• When the unit is shipped from the factory, it is configured to display all of the modes and
speeds in “Shutter modes” (page 58), except
SLS mode. You can change this configuration by selecting only the required modes and speeds on the SHT ENABLE page of the
OPERATION menu (see page 157).
• Shutter speeds in standard mode can also be switched to angle display by using SHT DISP
MODE in the CAM CONFIG 2 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu (see page 178).
To set the shutter speed in ECS or SLS mode
1
Set the shutter speed mode to ECS or
SLS (see the previous item) .
2
Turn the MENU knob to select the desired frequency or number of frames.
When the RM-B170 Remote Control Unit is connected
You can set the shutter speed of ECS or SLS with the RM-B170.
To change the range of choice of shutter mode and speed settings
You can reduce the time required to select the shutter mode and speed by narrowing the choice of settings in advance. This can be done by using the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu.
Note
The settings selected on the SHT ENABLE page of the
OPERATION menu become invalid when the RM-B170 or another remote control unit is connected to the camcorder.
59
1
Display the SHT ENABLE page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
025 SHT ENABLE
SHUTTER ECS : ON
SHUTTER SLS : OFF
SHUTTER 1/100 : ON
SHUTTER 1/125 : ON
SHUTTER 1/250 : ON
SHUTTER 1/500 : ON
SHUTTER 1/1000 : ON
SHUTTER 1/2000 : ON
2
Turn the MENU knob to move b to the shutter mode or shutter speed you want, then press the MENU knob.
b on the left of the selected item changes to z and z on the left of the setting changes to
?
.
3
Turn the MENU knob until ON appears, then press the MENU knob.
z on the left of the selected item changes to b and ?
on the left of the setting changes to z .
To set another mode or speed, return to step
2 .
Note that only the shutter speeds set to ON can be selected with the SHUTTER selector.
4
To end the menu operation, set the
MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating section.
The menu disappears from the screen and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen.
To set the shutter speed in degree units
On the SHUTTER SELECT page of the
MAINTENANCE menu, you can specify degrees
(angle of opening of the shutter) to select the shutter speed in standard shutter mode.
Note
When you enable degree settings, the unit disables all items on the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu except SHUTTER ECS and SHUTTER SLS.
1
Display the SHUTTER SELECT page of the MAINTENANCE menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select SHUTTER SELECT, and turn the MENU knob to display DEGREE.
M27 SHUTTER SELECT TOP
SHUTTER SELECT : DEGREE
ADD: ---.-
DEL:
DEGREE SECOND
1: 216.0 1/99.85
2: 180.0 1/119.7
3: 90.0 1/239.0
4: 45.0 1/475.0
5: 22.5 1/940.0
6: 11.2 1/1880
Six shutter speeds appear. A registered shuttle angle appears in the DEGREE field of each line. A shutter speed (exposure time, in units of seconds) appears in the SECOND field, as calculated by converting from the selected frame rate.
Each time that you flick the SHUTTER selector to the SELECT side, the setting or mode changes in the following order. (SLS mode and ECS mode appear only when they are enabled on the SHT ENABLE page of the
OPERATION menu.)
Example of standard mode display
(shutter degrees setting)
1 2 3 4 5 6
SLS mode ECS mode
To register user-defined settings
You can register up to six shutter angle settings.
If six settings are already registered, you must delete one of the registered settings before registering a new one.
1
Rotate the MENU knob to move the b mark to the DEL position, and then press the MENU knob.
The b mark changes into a z mark, and the z mark changes into a ? mark.
Also, a * mark appears before the number.
60
M27 SHUTTER SELECT TOP
SHUTTER SELECT : DEGREE
ADD: ---.-
DEL:?
DEGREE SECOND
*1: 216.0 1/99.85
2: 180.0 1/119.7
3: 90.0 1/239.0
4: 45.0 1/475.0
5: 22.5 1/940.0
6: 11.2 1/1880
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the * mark to the number of the shuttle angle that you want to change, and then press the MENU knob.
The selected setting is deleted. The numbers of settings after the deleted setting are incremented to bring them up to replace the deleted setting. (The following example shows the display after deletion of the setting
“90.0”, which had been registered as setting number 3.)
M27 SHUTTER SELECT TOP
SHUTTER SELECT : DEGREE
ADD: ---.-
DEL:
DEGREE SECOND
*1: 216.0 1/99.85
2: 180.0 1/119.7
3: 45.0 1/475.0
4: 22.5 1/940.0
5: 11.2 1/1880
6: ---.- -------
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the ADD position, and press the
MENU knob.
The b mark changes into a z mark, and the z mark changes into a ? mark.
M27 SHUTTER SELECT TOP
SHUTTER SELECT : DEGREE
ADD:?180.0
DEL:
DEGREE SECOND
*1: 216.0 1/99.85
2: 180.0 1/119.7
3: 45.0 1/475.0
4: 22.5 1/940.0
5: 11.2 1/1880
6: ---.- -------
4
Turn the MENU knob to change the value to the right of the ? mark into the shutter angle that you want to register, and then press the MENU knob. (The setting value can be selected over the range 360.0 to 4.5.)
The newly specified shutter angle is assigned to a free slot in the list, and the list is sorted
61 in order of the setting values. (In the figure below, the shutter angle “144.0” was added, and then the list was sorted, so that the angle
“144.0” is registered as item number 3.)
M27 SHUTTER SELECT TOP
SHUTTER SELECT : DEGREE
ADD: ---.-
DEL:
DEGREE SECOND
*1: 216.0 1/99.85
2: 180.0 1/119.7
3: 144.0 1/150.0
4: 45.0 1/475.0
5: 22.5 1/940.0
6: 11.2 1/1880
To add more user-defined settings
If there is no empty number in the list:
Repeat steps 1 to 4 .
If there is an empty number in the list:
Repeat steps 3 and 4 .
Deleting unneeded settings
When you are selecting shutter speeds, the unit skips numbers that do not have assigned settings. You will be able to select settings more quickly if you delete settings that you use only rarely. You must leave at least one setting, but you can delete settings numbered
2 through 6.
Changing the Reference
Value for Automatic Iris
Adjustment
The reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be changed to aid the shooting of clear pictures of back-lit subjects, or to prevent blownout highlights. The reference value for the lens iris can be set within the following range with respect to the standard value.
• 0.25 to 1 (increasing by increments of 0.25):
About 0.25 to 1 stop further open
• –0.25 to –1 (decreasing by increments of 0.25):
About 0.25 to 1 stop further close
Also you can set the area where light detection occurs.
To change the reference value
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the AUTO IRIS page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
019 AUTO IRIS
2
Check that the b mark is at the IRIS
OVERRIDE position, and then press the MENU knob.
b on the left of the selected item changes to z and z on the left of the setting changes to
?
.
3
Turn the MENU knob until “ON” appears, then press the MENU knob.
z on the left of the selected item changes to b and ?
on the left of the setting changes to z .
The IRIS OVERRIDE item is set to “ON”.
4
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.
The AUTO IRIS page disappears from the screen.
5
Turn the MENU knob to change the reference value.
Note
Be sure to confirm that the current shutter mode is not ECS.
The changed reference value is retained until the power of the camcorder is turned off.
Even if the reference value is changed, it reverts to the standard value every time the power is turned on.
To make the iris more open
Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camera.
The iris stop indicators as shown in the following table appear in the upper part to the left of the F number in the iris indication.
Iris stop
0.25
0.5
0.75
1
Indicator
To stop down the iris
Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front of the camera.
The iris stop indicators as shown in the following table appear in the lower part to the left of the F number in the iris indication.
Iris stop
–0.25
Indicator
–0.5
–0.75
–1
62
4
Turn the MENU knob to move b to
IRIS WINDOW, then press the MENU knob.
b changes to z and z changes to ?
.
5
Turn the MENU knob until the desired auto iris window appears, then press the
MENU knob.
Opening the lens iris
Iris opened by 1 stop (two segments)
Iris opened by 0.5 stop (one segment)
Stopping down the lens iris
Iris stopped down by 1 stop (two segments)
Iris stopped down by 0.5 stop (one segment)
When the RM-B170 Remote Control Unit is connected
The IRIS control knob of the RM-B170 can be used for lens iris setting (auto iris). In this case, the indicator is not displayed.
To set the automatic iris window
1
Follow the procedure of steps 1 and 2 described in the previous item to display the AUTO IRIS page.
2
Turn the MENU knob to move b to
IRIS WINDOW IND, then press the
MENU knob.
b on the left of IRIS WINDOW IND. changes to z and z on the left of the setting changes to ?
.
3
Turn the MENU knob until ON appears, then press the MENU knob.
z changes to b and ?
changes to z .
The currently selected auto iris window appears on the screen.
If it is not necessary to display the auto iris window on the screen, set to OFF.
The shaded parts indicate the area where light detection z changes to b and ?
changes to z .
If you select “VARIABLE”, the following items become effective and you can set the window of the desired size. Set each item to the desired size.
Item Setting
IRIS VAR WIDTH The width of the window
IRIS VAR HEIGHT The height of the window
IRIS VAR H POS.
The position of the window in the horizontal direction
IRIS VAR V POS.
The position of the window in the vertical direction.
6
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.
The menu disappears from the screen and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen.
To counter problems with very bright highlights
If the subject is too bright, the iris may close too much, leaving the overall image dark, or the highlights may be blown out. In such cases, setting the highlight clip function on reduces the luminance range, avoiding problems from the automatic iris correction.
In the AUTO IRIS page of the USER menu, set the CLIP HIGH LIGHT item to ON.
63
Adjusting the Audio
Level
Setting the AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 switches to AUTO automatically adjusts the input levels of the audio signal to be recorded in audio channels 1 and 2. You can also adjust the audio level manually.
For audio channels 3 and 4, menu settings allow you to select automatic adjustment, manual adjustment, or fixed.
Target audio level for automatic audio level adjustment
Make adjustment using –20 dB as the target level.
If the audio level meter shows a maximum level of 0 dB, then it indicates that the input audio level is excessive.
Target input level
Excessive input level
Manually adjusting the audio levels of the audio inputs from the
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors
With the XLR connection automatic detection function being on, when a cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector, the input from these connectors is automatically selected for audio recording. In this case, start the operation from step 2 .
You can turn on and off the XLR connection automatic detection function on the AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.
MIC LEVEL control
LEVEL
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
PRESET
REGEN
CLOCK
0 10 0
AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO SELECT
CH-1
AUDIO IN
CH-2
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
F
R
W
10
CH3
F
R
W
CH-4
3
2
1
1
To adjust the signal input to the AUDIO
IN CH1 or CH2 connector, set the
AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch to
REAR.
To adjust both input signals, set both switches to REAR.
2
Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) corresponding to the channel(s) selected in step 1 to MANUAL.
3
With the LEVEL control(s) for the channel(s) selected in step 1, adjust so that the audio level meter shows up to
–20 dB for a normal input volume.
Correspondence between recording level adjustments and audio level controls
On the AUDIO-3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, you can select which audio level control controls the audio recording level of the input to each of the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors. The correspondences between the settings of the menu items and the controls are as follows.
REAR1/WRR LEVEL: Audio recording level of channel 1
Setting
SIDE1
FRONT
F+S1
Control
LEVEL (CH-1) control (on the left)
MIC LEVEL control
LEVEL (CH-1) control linked with
MIC LEVEL control.
64
REAR2/WRR LEVEL: Audio recording level of channel 2
Setting
SIDE2
FRONT
F+S2
Control
LEVEL (CH-2) control (on the right)
MIC LEVEL control
LEVEL (CH-2) control linked with
MIC LEVEL control.
Note
When you have operation of the LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls and MIC LEVEL control linked together, if the
MIC LEVEL control is set to 0, the audio signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check the position of the MIC LEVEL control before adjusting the LEVEL
(CH-1/CH-2) controls.
Manually adjusting the audio level of the MIC IN connector
Note
If the XLR connection automatic detection mode is on, when the cables are connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/
CH2 connectors, the camcorder detects the connection to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors. Thus, the AUDIO
IN switches are internally reset to REAR and the audio signals input to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors are automatically selected.
Before adjusting the audio level of the front microphone, confirm that no cables are connected to the AUDIO IN
CH1/CH2 connectors. Alternatively, set the REAR XLR
AUTO item to OFF on the AUDIO-1 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu.
LEVEL
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
PRESET
REGEN
CLOCK
0 10 0
AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO SELECT
CH-1
AUDIO IN
CH-2
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
F
R
W
10
CH3
F
R
W
CH-4
3
1
Set either or both of the AUDIO IN switch(es) to FRONT.
2
1
2
Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) for the desired channel(s) selected in step 1 to MANUAL.
3
Turn the MIC LEVEL control, and adjust so that the audio level meter shows up to –20 dB for a normal input volume.
Correspondence between recording level adjustments and audio level controls
On the AUDIO-3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, you can select which audio level control controls the audio recording level of the front microphone input. The correspondences between the settings of the menu items and the controls are as follows.
MIC CH1 LEVEL: Audio recording level of channel 1
Setting
SIDE1
FRONT
F+S1
Control
LEVEL (CH-1) control (on the left)
MIC LEVEL control
LEVEL (CH-1) control linked with
MIC LEVEL control.
MIC CH2 LEVEL: Audio recording level of channel 2
Setting
SIDE2
FRONT
F+S2
Control
LEVEL (CH-2) control (on the right)
MIC LEVEL control
LEVEL (CH-2) control linked with
MIC LEVEL control.
Note
When you have operation of the MIC LEVEL control and LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls linked together, if the
LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls are set to 0, the audio signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check the position of the LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls before adjusting the MIC LEVEL control.
Recording audio on channels 3 and 4
Selecting the recorded audio
You can select the audio recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 with the AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-
4 switches, or you can have the selection made automatically, as follows.
65
To automatically select the same audio as on channels 1 and 2
On the AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, set the AUDIO CH3/4 MODE item to “CH
1/2”.
page of the MAINTENANCE menu to
FRONT.
The levels of audio channels 3 and 4 can now be adjusted with the MIC LEVEL control.
To set to a fixed value
In step 2 of the previous procedure “To adjust manually”, set the menu items to FIX.
1
2
3
4
5
6
CH-3 switch
1 F: The audio signal from the front microphone is recorded.
2 R: The audio signal input to the AUDIO IN
CH1 connector is recorded.
3 W: The audio signal of the wireless microphone is recorded.
CH-4 switch
4 F: Same as with the CH3 switch.
5 R: The audio signal input to the AUDIO IN
CH2 connector is recorded.
6 W: Same as with the CH3 switch.
Note
When the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector is set to LINE or MIC, the audio signals recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 are not affected by the XLR automatic detection function. They are determined by the settings of the
AUDIO IN CH-3 and CH-4 switches.
Adjusting the audio recording levels
To adjust automatically
Set AU CH34 AGC MODE on the AUDIO-2 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu to STREO or MONO.
To adjust manually
1
Set AU CH34 AGC MODE on the
AUDIO-2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu to OFF.
2
Set AUDIO CH3 LEVEL (for audio channel 3) and AUDIO CH4 LEVEL
(for audio channel 4) on the AUDIO-3
66
Setting Time Data
Setting the timecode
The timecode setting range is from 00 : 00 : 00 :
00 to 23 : 59 : 59 : 29 (hours : minutes : seconds : frames).
1
3
RESET/RETURN button
DISP SEL HOLD RESET
,5
4
DISPLAY BRIGHT
EXPAND CHAPTER
THUMBNAIL
ESSENCE
MARK
SUB CLIP
SET
S.SEL
LEVE
COUNTER RC U-BIT
CLIP MENU
SHIFT
0 10
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
PRESET
REGEN
CLOCK
AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO SELE
CH-1
AUDIO IN
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS 2
1
Press DISP SEL to set the LCD screen to the status display.
2
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET.
3
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
SET.
The first (leftmost) digit of timecode flashes.
4
Use the up and down arrow buttons to change values, and use the left and right arrow buttons to move the flashing digit. Repeat until all digits are set.
To reset the timecode value to 00 00 00 00
Press the RESET/RETURN button.
5
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
F-RUN or R-RUN.
F-RUN: Free run. The timecode generator keeps running.
R-RUN: Recording run. The timecode generator runs only while recording.
To set the drop frame mode/non-drop frame mode
You can select the drop frame (DF) mode or nondrop frame (NDF) mode on the TIMECODE page of the MAINTENANCE menu.
To make the timecode consecutive
When the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set to
R-RUN, recording a number of scenes on the disc normally produces consecutive timecode.
However, once you remove the disc and record on another disc, the timecode will no longer be consecutive when you use the original disc again for recording.
In this case, to make the timecode consecutive, set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to
REGEN.
Saving the real Time in the Timecode
Setting the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to
CLOCK saves the real time in the timecode.
When it is necessary to set the actual time, use the
TIME/DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu.
For details, see “Setting the Date/Time of the
Setting the user bits
By setting the user bits (up to 8 hexadecimal digits), you can record user information such as the date, time, or scene number on the timecode track.
67
1
RESET/RETURN button
2,4
3
DISP SEL HOLD RESET DISPLAY BRIGHT
EXPAND CHAPTER
THUMBNAIL
ESSENCE
MARK
SUB CLIP
SET
S.SEL
LEVE
COUNTER RC U-BIT
CLIP MENU
SHIFT
0 10
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
PRESET
REGEN
CLOCK
AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO SELE
CH-1
AUDIO IN
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS generators of other camcorders/VTRs with the internal generator of this camcorder.
Connections for timecode synchronization
Connect both the reference video signal and the external timecode as illustrated below.
Example 1: Synchronizing with an external timecode
1
Set the DISPLAY switch to U-BIT.
2
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
SET.
The first (leftmost) digit flashes.
3
Use the up and down arrow buttons to change values, and use the left and right arrow buttons to move the flashing digit. Repeat until all digits are set.
To reset the user bit data to 00 00 00 00
Press the RESET/RETURN button.
4
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
F-RUN or R-RUN, corresponding to the desired operating mode for the timecode generator.
The set user bit data will be recorded for both
LTC and VITC.
To store the user bit setting in memory
The user bit setting (apart from the real time) is automatically retained in memory even when the power is turned off.
Synchronizing the timecode
You can synchronize the internal timecode generator of this camcorder with an external generator for the regeneration of an external timecode. You can also synchronize the timecode
1 2
1 GENLOCK IN
a)
2 TC IN
External timecode
Reference video signal a) Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page of the
MAINTENANCE menu, if GENLOCK is set to OFF.
68
Example 2: Interconnecting a number of camcorders or timecode synchronization
To lock the timecode to an external source
3
4
1
2
1
2
Reference camcorder
3
4
1
2
To another camcorder to be synchronized
1 TEST OUT
2 TC OUT
3 TC IN
4 GENLOCK IN
a) a) Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page of the
MAINTENANCE menu, if GENLOCK is set to OFF.
4
3
2
1
DISP SEL HOLD RESET DISPLAY BRIGHT
EXPAND CHAPTER
THUMBNAIL
ESSENCE
MARK
SUB CLIP
SET
S.SEL
LEVEL
COUNTER RC U-BIT
CLIP MENU
SHIFT
0 10 0
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
PRESET
REGEN
CLOCK
AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO SELECT
CH-1
AUDIO IN
CH-2
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
S DI IN
GENLOCK
IN TC IN
TE S T
OUT
TC
OUT
5
1
Turn on the POWER switch.
2
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET.
3
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
F-RUN.
4
Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.
5
Supply a timecode signal and a reference video signal complying with the SMPTE standard and in proper phase relationship, to the TC IN connector and to the GENLOCK IN connector, respectively.
69
This operation synchronizes the internal timecode generator with the external timecode. After about 10 seconds, you can disconnect the external timecode without losing the synchronization. However, there will be noise on the recorded image if you connect or disconnect the timecode signal during recording.
Notes
• When you finish the above procedure, the internal timecode is immediately synchronized with the external timecode and the counter display will show the value of the external timecode. However, wait for a few seconds until the sync generator stabilizes before recording.
• If the frequency of the reference video signal is not the same as the system frequency of the camcorder, the camera cannot be correctly genlocked. In such a case, the internal timecode is not correctly synchronized with the external timecode.
• When the GENLOCK ON/OFF item is set to OFF on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu, the timecode cannot be synchronized with the reference video signal. In this case, set the GENLOCK item to ON on the GENLOCK page of the
MAINTENANCE menu.
User bit settings during timecode synchronization
When the timecode is synchronized, only the time data is synchronized with the external timecode value. Therefore, each camcorder can have its own user bit settings.
You can lock the users bits of this camcorder to the user bits of external timecode by setting EXT-
LK UBIT in the TIMECODE page of the
MAINTENANCE menu to EXT.
To release the timecode synchronization
First disconnect the external timecode, then set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN.
To change the power supply from the battery pack to an external power supply during timecode synchronization
To maintain a continuous power supply, connect the external power supply to the DC IN connector before removing the battery pack. You may lose timecode synchronization if you remove the battery pack first.
Camera synchronization during timecode synchronization
During timecode synchronization, the camera is genlocked to the reference video signal input from the GENLOCK IN connector.
70
Chapter
4
Shooting
Handling Discs
Discs used for recording and playback
The following Professional Discs
1)
can be used for recording and playback on this unit:
• PFD23A (capacity 23.3 GB)
• PFD50DLA (capacity 50.0 GB)
1) Professional Disc is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
Notes
• It is not possible to use the following discs for recording or playback on this unit:
- Blu-ray Disc
- Professional Disc for Data
• PFD50DLA discs can be used only by XDCAM devices with the DL mark (see the following illustration). They cannot be used by XDCAM devices without this mark.
• Recording to disc and playback are not supported when connected to an optional CA-FA70/TX70
Camera Adaptor. In this case, eject the disc beforehand.
• Do not touch the surface of the disc itself within the cartridge.
• Deliberately opening the shutter may cause damage.
• Do not disassemble the cartridge.
• The supplied adhesive labels are recommended for indexing discs. Apply the label in the correct position.
Storage
• Do not store discs where they may be subjected to direct sunlight, or in other places where the temperature or humidity is high.
• Do not leave cartridges where dust may be able to gain ingress.
• Store cartridges in their cases.
Care of the discs
• Remove dust and dirt on the outside of a cartridge using a soft dry cloth.
• If condensation forms, allow ample time to dry before use.
Write-protecting discs
To protect the content recorded on the disc from accidental erasure, move the Write Inhibit tab on the lower surface of the disc in the direction of the arrow, as shown in the following figure.
DL mark
Notes on handling
Handling
The Professional Disc is housed in a cartridge, and is designed to allow handling free of risk from dust or fingerprints. However, if the cartridge is subjected to a severe shock, for example by dropping it, this can result in damage or scratching of the disc. If the disc is scratched, it may be impossible to record video/audio, or to play back the content recorded on the disc. The discs should be handled and stored carefully.
71
Lower surface of the disc Write Inhibit tab
2
Press the EJECT button.
This opens the lid of the disc compartment.
EJECT button
SAV
E
Slide in the direction of the arrow
Write Inhibit tab settings
SAVE SAVE
Recording enabled Recording disabled
You can also write protect-individual clips. For
details, see “Locking (write-protecting) clips”
Loading and unloading a disc
To load a disc
1
Turn on the POWER switch.
POWER switch
LCD monitor
3
1 Insert the disc in the V direction, and
2 close the disc compartment lid manually.
1
2
V indication on the outside
The disc is loaded.
Note
To insert the disc correctly, make sure that the camcorder is in the upright position (the grip upside, the bottom downside).
To unload a disc
With the power supply on, press the EJECT button to open the disc compartment lid and eject the disc, then remove the disc. If you are not going to insert another disc, close the disc compartment lid.
To unload a disc when the power supply is off
If the battery is exhausted, it is not possible to remove the disc by pressing the EJECT button. In such cases, use the following emergency procedure to remove the disc manually.
1
Turn off the POWER switch.
2
Carry out the operation shown in the following figure.
1 Open this rubber cover.
72
2 Using a screwdriver or similar implement, slide the black metal plate visible inside, in the direction of the rear of the camcorder.
The disc compartment lid opens. A red
Phillips screw is visible inside the rubber cap.
3 Use a Phillips screwdriver to turn the screw counterclockwise (the direction shown on the rubber cap).
This ejects the disc.
4 Close the rubber cover firmly.
You need not return the screw to its original position after taking out the disc. Turning on the power makes the disc compartment mechanism operable again.
Note
Do not touch the disc or try to forcibly remove it until it has been completely ejected.
Formatting a disc
When using a new disc
An unused disc requires no formatting operation.
The disc is automatically formatted so that it is ready to use when loaded into this unit.
To format a disc on which material is recorded
See page 134 for details of formatting a disc.
Note
When a recorded disc is formatted, all the data on the disc is erased. (Even locked clips
are also erased.)
Handling of discs when recording does not end normally (salvage function)
Recording processing does not end normally if, for example, the battery pack is removed during recording, or if the power cord is disconnected during recording. Because the file system is not updated, video and audio data recorded in real time is not recognized as files and clip contents recorded up to that point are lost.
However, this unit has a salvage function which can hold losses to the minimum by reconstructing clips on such discs.
Note that no recorded clip contents are lost when the POWER switch is set to OFF and when battery exhaustion is detected, because the unit does not become powered off until after the end of recording processing.
Notes
• Do not disconnect the battery pack or power cord until recording processing has finished and the ACCESS indicator has gone out.
• This function salvages as much recorded material as possible after an unforeseen accident, but 100% restoration cannot be guaranteed.
• Even when this function is used, it is not possible to recover data from immediately before the interruption of recording. The amount of data lost is as follows.
Quick salvage: From 2 to 5 seconds of data before the interruption of recording.
Full salvage: From 3 to 6 seconds of data before the interruption of recording.
(More data may be lost when the unit is subject to vibrations, when you switch frequently between recording and paused, and when you use functions such as Picture Cash.)
73
Quick salvage
When the unit is powered on again after a recording interruption due to a power interruption, with the disc still loaded in the unit, clips are reconstructed on the basis of backup data stored in nonvolatile memory and markers recorded on the disc. Processing time is about
5 seconds.
Full salvage
When recording on an XDCAM device is interrupted because of a power interruption, and a disc is manually ejected from that device with the power off, clips are reconstructed on the basis of markers recorded on the disc when the disc is loaded in this unit. Therefore, processing takes longer than for a quick salvage (about 30 seconds, although it depends on the state of the disc).
Proceed as follows to perform a full salvage.
1
Insert the disc on which recording did not end normally.
The following salvage message appears.
SALVAGE
TO RECORD ON THE
DISC, IT IS NECESSARY
TO EXECUTE SALVAGE.
SALVAGE OK?
YES NO
2
Turn the MENU knob to move b to
“YES”, and press the MENU knob.
Salvage processing starts, and the message
“EXECUTING” appears.
A results message appears when the processing finishes.
• If the salvage succeeded, the message
“COMPLETED” appears.
• If the salvage failed, the message
“INCOMPLETED” appears. Clips for which recording did not end normally are lost.
To exit without salvaging
Select NO in step 1 to exit without performing salvage processing.
However, the status of the disc does not change.
Salvage is still required to recover the clips for which recording did not end normally. The salvage message will appear again when that disc is inserted again, or when the camcorder is powered on again.
Notes
• If salvage processing is not done, sections which were recorded normally can be played back, but no new recording can be done on the disc.
• Full salvage of discs recorded by this camcorder can be performed with the PDW-F1600, PDW-HD1500,
PDW-F800, PDW-700, PDW-740, or PDW-HR1. Full salvage cannot be performed with any other XDCAM device. The following message may appear when you insert a disc that was not recorded normally. The
“XXXX” in the message is a code for XDCAM devices that can salvage the disc. Refer to the table below and use one of the indicated devices to salvage the disc.
SALVAGE
DISC CANNOT BE
RECORDED.
FORMAT DISC OR CONTACT
SERVICE TO RUN CLIP
SALVAGE PROGRAM.
(XXXX)
PUSH ESCAPE SWITCH
OR ROTARY ENCODER.
Code (XXXX) Model name
0002 PDW-1500/530/510/R1
PDW-F70/F350/F330
0200
0300
a)
0301
a)
PDW-F70/F350/F330 (Version
1.9 or higher)
PDW-F75/F355/F335
PDW-HD1500/HR1/700/740
PDW-HD1500/700/740
(Version 1.5 or higher)
PDW-F1600/F800 a) Does not appear on this unit.
To cancel the message and return to normal operation, exchange the disc for a usable disc and flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch to the ESCAPE side, or press the MENU knob.
74
Basic Procedure for
Shooting
This section describes the basic procedures for shooting and recording.
Before a shooting session, ensure that the camcorder is functioning properly.
For details, see “Testing the Camcorder before
Basic procedure for shooting: from power supply to disc loading
4 5 1
4
Check that there are no obstructions such as cables near the disc compartment lid. Then press the
EJECT button to open the disc compartment lid.
5
After checking that the disc is not write-
, load it and close the disc compartment lid.
Basic procedure for shooting: from adjusting the black balance and white balance to stopping recording
Switch settings
After turning on the power and loading a disc, set the switches and selectors as shown below and begin operation.
2 1 6
2 3
1
Attach a fully charged battery pack.
For details, see “Preparing a Power Supply”
2
Set the POWER switch to ON.
3
Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to switch the LCD monitor to status display, and check that the following condition is met.
The battery status indicator shows at least five segments ( x ).
If it does not, replace the battery pack with a fully charged one.
3 4 5
1 DISPLAY: ON
2 Iris: Automatic
3 Zoom: Automatic
4 OUTPUT/DCC: CAM, DCC: ON
5 F-RUN/SET/R-RUN: F-RUN or R-RUN
(set as needed)
6 AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2: AUTO
75
Shooting
3
5 , 6 4 1 2
1
Flick the AUTO W/B BAL switch to
BLK to adjust the black balance.
For details of black balance adjustment, see
2
Select the CC filter and ND filter to match the lighting conditions, and adjust the white balance.
For details, see “Adjusting the white balance”
3
Aim the camera at the subject and adjust the focus and zoom.
You can adjust the focus by using the Focus
.
4
If necessary, set the electronic shutter for an appropriate mode and speed.
For details, see “Setting the Electronic Shutter”
5
To start recording, press the REC
START button or the VTR button on the lens.
If the recording start/stop function is assigned to one of the ASSIGN 1/3/4/5 switches or RET button on the lens, you can also use this switch.
On how to assign functions to the ASSIGN
During recording, the REC indicator lights in the viewfinder. Perform zooming and focus control, if necessary.
Note
During recording (while the ACCESS indicator is lit) do not remove the battery pack. If you do, the internal processing for recording may not finish properly, which may cause the last few seconds of recording to be lost.
6
To stop recording, press the REC
START button or the VTR button on the lens again.
The REC indicator in the viewfinder goes off.
The material recorded from step 5 to step 6 is saved as a single clip.
To check the last two seconds of the recording (recording review)
If you press the RET button on the lens while recording is paused, the last two seconds of the recording is played back. If you hold down the RET button, a low-speed reverse search begins at a position two seconds before the recording end position. When you release the RET button, the reverse search stops and playback in the forward direction begins. After playback, the camcorder is ready to start recording again.
By assigning the same function as that of the
RET button on the lens to the ASSIGN 1/3/4/
5 switch, you can use the switch in the same way as the lens RET button.
On how to assign functions to the ASSIGN
7
Repeat steps 5 and 6 as required for shooting.
Each time you repeat steps 5 and 6 , successive clips are recorded on the disc.
Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3
REC
START
REC
STOP
REC
START
REC
STOP
REC
START
REC
STOP
76
Notes
• It is not possible to record a clip shorter than 2 seconds.
If you stop recording within 2 seconds of starting, this results in a 2-second clip. If recording is started, immediately stopped, and then restarted within
2 seconds of the first recording, two clips will be created.
• The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on a single disc is 300. If an attempt is made to record more than 300 clips, the error message “MAX # Clips” appears, even if there is free capacity on the disc.
Playback control buttons
During recording, the playback control buttons
(EJECT, F REV, F FWD, NEXT, PREV, PLAY/
PAUSE, STOP) have no effect.
Playing back the recorded clip
Normal playback
By pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button, you can review any length of recording on the viewfinder screen in black and white or in color on the LCD monitor. There are two other ways to review the recording.
Recording review: You can view the last two seconds of the recording on the viewfinder screen in black and white or in color on the
LCD monitor.
Viewing color playback on a video monitor:
You can view the recording in color on a color video monitor without the need for any external adaptor.
You can also view playback video during a fast forward or reverse search.
For details about the switches and controls used to select the audio output signal and to adjust the audio
level, see page 16 and page 23.
To freeze a picture during playback
The following operation can also be done from the RM-B170 Remote Control Unit.
1
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to start playback.
2
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button again at the instant when you want to freeze the picture.
The playback pauses and a frozen picture appears.
The timecode of the frozen frame is displayed in the counter display and the
PLAY/PAUSE indicator now flashes (one flash/second).
To restart playback
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button once again.
Clip playback modes
You can set the clip playback mode to either of the following.
Continuous playback mode: The playback target is all of the clips on the disc (factory default setting)
Single clip playback mode: The playback target is the currently selected clip only
To select single clip playback mode
Set SINGLE CLIP MODE in the CAM CONFIG
1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu to “ON”.
Playback in single clip playback mode
Playback stops when it reaches the start or end of the clip. The next and preceding clips are not played, even if they exist on the disc. The available playback types include normal playback, and high-speed playback in the forward or reverse directions.
To move to another clip, press the PREV, NEXT,
F REV + PREV, or F FWD + NEXT button, or perform a thumbnail search.
Disc playback start position
Although this unit uses optical discs, it is designed to offer the most convenient features of tape playback by VTRs. One of these is the playback start position, which works in the same way as with tape, as described below.
After playback stop
The unit stops at the position where the STOP button was pressed.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to resume playback at the stop position.
After recording
The unit stops at the position where recording ended.
To play back a clip, press the PREV button to move to the start frame of any clip, or press the
F REV button to move to any position.
77
After disc insertion
The unit stops at the position of the disc when it was most recently ejected.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to resume playback at the most recent position.
The playback position is saved to the disc when the disc is ejected, which allows playback to start at that position whenever it is loaded into any
XDCAM player.
Note
The playback position is not recorded to the disc if the disc is write-protected.
Deteriorating playback conditions
Deteriorating playback may be due to the following causes.
• Scratches and dust on the disc surface
This includes fingerprints, dust from the air, tar from cigarette smoke, and so on.
Scratches and soiling which occur before recording are not a problem because they are registered in advance as defects, and recording avoids them. However, scratches and soiling which occur after recording can lead to deteriorating playback conditions.
• Aging of disc recording layers
Over several decades, the recording layers of optical discs can age and cause deteriorating playback conditions.
• Deteriorating laser diodes performance
The performance of the laser diodes used in optical heads can worsen with age, leading to deteriorating playback conditions.
Refer to the Maintenance Manual for an approximate guide to when it is time to replace optical heads.
To prevent playback conditions from deteriorating
Pay attention to the following points when handling discs.
• Do not open disc cartridges and touch discs directly with your hands.
• Do not store for long periods in locations which are dusty or exposed to air circulated by fans.
• Do not store for long periods under high temperatures or in locations exposed to direct sunlight.
If playback conditions have deteriorated
Read errors occur when playback conditions continue to deteriorate.
When a read error occurs, the message “DISC
ERROR!” appears, the video freezes, and the audio output is suppressed.
If this happens, check the following points.
Whether the disc displays the same playback condition on other XDCAM devices: If so, the surface of the disc may be dirty or scratched, or the performance of the recording layers on the disc may have worsened due to age. Do not use discs with these symptoms.
Whether every disc inserted into an XDCAM device displays the same playback conditions: If so, the performance of the laser diodes may have deteriorated. Check the total optical output time.
Deleting the recorded clip
For details, see “Deleting clips” (page 123).
Using the Freeze Mix function
The Freeze Mix function allows you to display a freeze image over the current shooting video. For example, you can use this function to frame summer and winter shots of a landscape scene in exactly the same way, or to resume an interrupted shooting session with exactly the same framing.
To use the Freeze Mix function, you need to assign it to an ASSIGN 1/3/4/5 switch.
For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches” (page 208)
1
Play the disc that contains the scene you want to use as the framing standard.
2
When the scene that you want appears, press the PLAY/PAUSE button to pause playback.
3
Press the button to which you have assigned the Freeze Mix function.
The playback screen changes to black and white, and a freeze image appears over the current shooting video.
78
To change the standard image
Use the PLAY/PAUSE button, the F REV and F FWD buttons and other controls to find another image, and repeat step 2 .
4
Align the framing of the playback image and the shooting video.
5
Press the button to which you have assigned the Freeze Mix function once more.
The unit exits Freeze Mix mode.
6
Start recording.
Note
If you exchange discs before starting to record, be careful to keep the unit from moving.
Using the Focus Assist function
Displaying the focus assist indicator in the viewfinder makes it easier to focus. This is convenient in situations where it may be difficult to focus using only the video in the viewfinder.
To display the focus assist indicator
1
Display the FOCUS ASSIST page in the
OPERATION menu.
See “Basic menu operations” (page 192) for
more information about menu operations.
2
Select FOCUS ASSIST IND, and turn the MENU knob until ON appears.
The focus assist indicator appears.
3
Set the following items as required.
FOCUS IND POS: Select the focus assist indicator display position from BOTTM
(bottom), LEFT, TOP, and RIGHT.
FOCUS AREA MARK: Turn the display of the frame around the focus detection range OFF (hide) or ON (display).
Focus detection range frame
Focus assist indicator
Notes
• The focus assist indicator is not displayed when the gain is set to 18 dB or higher.
• When you display the focus assist indicator, the display of effective pixels (which you select by setting
100% MARKER in the MARKER 1 page of the
OPERATION menu to “ON”) is hidden.
• When you display the frame of the focus detection range, the box cursor (which you select by setting User
Box in the MARKER 2 page of the OPERATION menu to “ON”) is hidden.
How to read the focus assist indicator
The “in focus” position is the position where the bar reaches its maximum length. Focus on a subject by rotating the focus ring so that the bar extends to its maximum length.
In focus position: Position where bar is at maximum length
Note
The focus indicator may show little or no variation when you are shooting a smooth subject or a dark scene.
79
Advanced Operations for
Shooting
Recording essence marks
Shot marks and other essence marks can be recorded on the disc.
Recording essence marks for scenes containing important images and sounds enables quick access to the marked points. This increases editing efficiency.
To record a shot mark using the RET button on the lens
To make it possible to record shot marks using the
RET button on the lens, carry out the following procedure.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the ESSENCE MARK page of the MAINTENANCE menu.
?M11 ESSENCE MARK TOP
RET SHOT MARK 1 : ON
RET SHOT MARK 2 : ON
INDEX PIC POS : 0SEC
FIND MODE : R.ST
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select the essence mark to be recorded, and press the MENU knob to display
“ON”.
3
Repeat the step 2, as necessary.
To record shot mark 1/2
When the camcorder is in recording or playback mode, operate the lens RET button as follows.
Shot mark 1: Press the RET button once.
Shot mark 2: Press the RET button twice in rapid succession.
“ShotMark1” or “ShotMark2” appears in the viewfinder screen for about one second near the timecode display.
If the SHOT MARK 1 or SHOT MARK 2 recording function has been assigned to one of the
ASSIGN 1/3/4/5 switches, you can also use that switch to record a SHOT MARK 1 or SHOT
MARK 2 essence mark.
On how to assign functions to the ASSIGN switches,
If you connect a Windows USB keyboard to the
USB connector, you can record shot marks from
Shot Mark0 up to Shot Mark9 by pressing the 0 to
9 keys on the numeric keypad.
Setting clip flags with switches
You can set three types of clip flags (OK/NG/
KEEP) during recording, immediately after recording, or during playback. Setting these flags in each clip that you record makes it easy for editors and other colleagues to find and select the clips they need.
You can use switches on the unit to set these flags. But before you can do so, you need to assign the corresponding flag functions to the
ASSIGN 1/3/4/5 switches or the RET button on the lens
.
To set a clip flag
During recording, immediately after recording, or during playback (including search and still picture playback), press the button to which the flag function has been assigned. Press the button once at the position where you want to set the flag.
The specified flag is set, and “*** ClpFlg” (***:
OK, NG, or KEEP) appears near the timecode display in the viewfinder for about three seconds.
To clear a clip flag
During recording or playback, press the button to which the flag function has been assigned. Press the button twice in rapid succession.
The flag is cleared, and “ClpFlg DEL.” appears for about three seconds.
You can also set and clear clip flags from a GUI
screen. For details, see “Setting clip flags”
80
Setting the thumbnail image at recording time
When you record a clip, you can specify which frame to use as the clip thumbnail image
.
(The factory default setting is to use the first frame in the clip as the thumbnail.)
For example, if all clips have the same image in their first frames, you can specify a frame a few seconds after the start of the clip, so that all thumbnails will not show the same image.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the ESSENCE MARK page of the MAINTENANCE menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select INDEX PIC POS, and press the
MENU knob.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select the desired time.
4
Press the MENU knob.
Starting a shoot with a few seconds of pre-stored picture data
(Picture Cache function)
The camcorder has a large capacity internal memory, in which you can cache the last few seconds (maximum 30 seconds) of captured video and audio, so that recording starts from a point just before you press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens.
Note
Picture Cache settings cannot be made while this unit is in the following states.
• The Clip Continuous Rec function is enabled.
• The Live Logging function is set to Live View mode.
• During Slow & Quick Motion shooting
Setting the Picture Cache mode/Picture
Cache time
To record in Picture Cache mode, you need to turn on Picture Cache mode and set the picture data storage time (Picture Cache time) using the
USER menu.
The Picture Cache time determines the number of seconds recorded from the Picture Cache, counting back from the time when you press the
REC START button or the VTR button on the lens to start recording. However, the number of seconds actually recorded from the Picture Cache may be shorter immediately after the setting of the VDR SAVE/STBY switch is changed, and in the special situations explained in the following notes.
Notes
• Storage of images to memory begins after you select
Picture Cache mode. If you begin recording immediately after selecting Picture Cache mode, images from before the selection will not be recorded.
• During playback, recording review or GUI screen operations, no data is saved to the Picture Cache memory. Thus it is not possible to use this function to rerecord the last few seconds of material from playback or recording review.
To set the Picture Cache mode/Picture Cache time
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu.
005 REC FUNCTION TOP
SLOW & QUICK : ON
FRAME RATE : 30P
CACHE/INTVAL REC: OFF
DISC EXCHG CACHE: OFF
CLIP CONT REC : OFF
LIVE LOGGING : OFF
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select CACHE REC, and turn the
MENU knob to display CACHE.
3
Select CACHE REC TIME, and turn the MENU knob to display the desired
Picture Cache time.
As you turn the MENU knob, the Picture
Cache time changes as follows: 0-2s y 2-4s y 4-6s y 6-8s y 8-10s y 18-20s y
28-30s.
81
The Picture Cache mode settings once made continue to be effective until changed.
You can assign the Picture Cache on/off function to one of the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4/5 switches or RET button on the lens.
For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches” (page 208).
Notes
• You can do a menu operation to change the Picture
Cache time while the camcorder is in recording mode.
However, the new setting takes effect only after the recording is finished.
• In Picture Cache mode, the internal timecode generator operating mode is always F-RUN regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch.
Camcorder operations in Picture Cache mode
The recording procedure in Picture Cache mode is basically the same as that for normal recording.
However, note the following differences.
• When you record in Picture Cache mode, the picture you are shooting now is recorded to disc after the picture data stored in memory (equal to the Picture Cache time) is recorded to disc. For this reason, disc access may continue for a short time after you press the REC START button to stop recording. During this time, the playback control buttons are disabled, as in recording mode. Also, if you press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens to restart recording during this time, a separate clip is recorded.
• When you press the REC START button or the
VTR button on the lens to restart recording during disc access, the start point of the recorded clip may be later than the Picture
Cache time, especially when there are a large number of clips recorded on the disc. In Picture
Cache mode, you should avoid stop and start recording operations in quick succession.
• The time disc access stops after the REC
START button is pressed equals the Picture
Cache time. However, if you start recording within the Picture Cache time immediately after selecting Picture Cache mode, changing the
Picture Cache time or performing playback or recording review, the picture data for the duration of the Picture Cache time will not be stored in memory. Thus, the time disc access stops after the STOP button is pressed becomes shorter than the Picture Cache time.
• In Picture Cache mode, you cannot set the F-
RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET to make timecode settings. To make timecode settings, first exit Picture Cache mode.
When power is lost during recording in Picture
Cache mode
• If the POWER switch is turned off during recording in Picture Cache mode, the camcorder gets powered off after disc access has continued for a few seconds so that the picture at the moment when the POWER switch is turned off is recorded.
• If you remove the battery, pull out the DC cable, or cut power to the AC adaptor during recording in Picture Cache mode, video and audio stored in memory will be lost without being recorded to the disc. For this reason, make sure you do not replace the battery while recording.
Time-lapse video (Interval Rec function)
Using the memory in the camcorder, you can capture time-lapse video. There are two modes for this function, which is known as “Interval
Rec”.
Auto Interval Rec mode: In Auto Interval Rec mode, pictures are automatically shot a frame
(two frames when the recording format is set to 720p) at a time at the specified interval and stored in memory. To use this function, you must set the total time for shooting (TAKE
TOTAL TIME) and the length of time for recording on the disc (REC TIME).
Manual Interval Rec mode: A specified number of frames (NUMBER OF FRAME) is recorded when you press the REC START button or the lens VTR button.
There are two Manual Interval Rec modes: a single shot mode in which recording is done once with each press of the button, and a consecutive mode in which recording is done repeatedly at a specified interval after the button is pressed.
A pre-lighting function is available in Auto
Interval Rec mode and the consecutive mode of
Manual Interval Rec mode. This function automatically turns on the light before recording starts, which allows you to record pictures under stable light and color temperature conditions.
82
Note
Interval Rec settings cannot be made while this unit is in the following states.
• The Disc Exchange Cache function is enabled.
• The Clip Continuous Rec function is enabled.
• The Live Logging function is set to Live View mode.
• During Slow & Quick Motion shooting
Operation limitations during recording
Item
Time code
Description
The internal time code generator runs in R-RUN mode regardless of how the F-RUN/
SET/R-RUN switch is set.
Not recorded.
Audio signals
Playback control buttons
• Auto Interval Rec mode and the consecutive mode of
Manual Interval Rec mode
The EJECT, F REV, F FWD,
NEXT, PREV, PLAY/PAUSE and STOP buttons are disabled.
To use these buttons, stop recording by pressing the REC
START button or the VTR button on the lens.
• The single shot mode of
Manual Interval Rec mode
The F REV, F FWD, NEXT,
PREV, PLAY/PAUSE, and
STOP buttons are disabled. To use these buttons, exit the
Interval Rec mode by pressing the EJECT button.
Menu operations The settings of the Interval Recrelated items on the REC
FUNCTION page of the
OPERATION menu cannot be changed. To change the settings, do either of the following.
• Auto Interval Rec mode and the consecutive mode of
Manual Interval Rec mode
Stop recording by pressing the
REC START button or the VTR button on the lens.
• The single shot mode of
Manual Interval Rec mode
Exit the Interval Rec mode by pressing the EJECT button.
Item
When the camcorder power is switched off
Description
• When you set the POWER switch to OFF, the camcorder will switch off by itself after disc access has continued for a few seconds to record the picture data stored in memory.
• If you remove the battery, unplug the DC cable, or cut power to the AC adaptor, picture data stored before recording stops (a maximum of ten seconds) may be lost. Take care when replacing the battery.
Auto Interval Rec mode settings and shooting
To make settings
1
Display the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select CACHE/INTVAL REC, and turn the MENU knob to display
“A.INT”.
005 REC FUNCTION TOP
SLOW & QUICK : ON
FRAME RATE : 30P
CACHE/INTVAL REC: A.INT
TAKE TOTAL TIME : 5MIN
REC TIME : 5SEC
PRE-LIGHTING : OFF
DISC EXCHG CACHE: OFF
CLIP CONT REC : OFF
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes as follows: OFF y CACHE y
A.INT y M.INT.
3
Select TAKE TOTAL TIME, and turn the MENU knob to select the desired total time for shooting.
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes as follows: 5MIN y 10MIN y
15MIN y 20MIN y 30MIN y 40MIN y 50MIN y 1H y 2H y 3H y 4H y 5H y 7H y 10H y 15H y 20H y 30H y 40H y 50H y 70H y
100H.
Here MIN means minutes (5MIN is 5 minutes) and H means hours (1H is one hour).
83
4
Select REC TIME, and turn the MENU knob to select the desired time to be recorded on the disc.
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes as follows: 5SEC y 10SEC y
15SEC y 20SEC y 30SEC y 40SEC y 50SEC y 1MIN ... 85MIN.
Here SEC means seconds (5SEC is 5 seconds) and MIN means minutes (1MIN is one minute).
You cannot set a REC TIME that is more than one thirtieth of TAKE TOTAL TIME.
The setting value changes within the range that can be set.
For example: When TAKE TOTAL TIME is set to 1H, the maximum value of REC TIME is 2 MIN. (60 minutes divided by 30 gives 2 minutes.)
5
As required, select PRE-LIGHTING, and turn the MENU knob to select the lighting on-time before recording starts.
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes as follows: OFF y 2SEC y
5SEC y 10SEC.
Note
Set the LIGHT switch on the camcorder to AUTO to turn on the light before recording. The light switch must also be set to ON. With these settings, the light turns on and off automatically. However, the light remains on continuously if the off time is 5 seconds or less.
When the LIGHT switch is set to MANUAL and the light switch is set to ON, the light remains on continuously. (The light does not turn on and off automatically.)
When the setting is completed, the message
“AUTO INTERVAL **M**S” appears along the bottom of the viewfinder screen. “**M**S” indicates the shooting interval.
For example, the message “AUTO INTERVAL
00M04S” indicates that the shooting interval is four seconds.
The camcorder exits Auto Interval Rec mode whenever it is powered off. However, the TAKE
TOTAL TIME, REC TIME, and PRE-
LIGHTING settings are maintained. You do not need to set them again the next time you use Auto
Interval Rec mode.
To shoot and record
1
After performing the basic procedures for shooting and recording, following
the instructions in “Basic Procedure for
Shooting” (page 75), secure the
camcorder so that it will not move.
2
Press the REC START button or the
VTR button on the lens.
The camcorder starts recording in Auto
Interval Rec mode. When you use the PRE-
LIGHTING function, recording starts after the light is switched on.
The actual recording to disc begins when the camcorder has saved about ten seconds of video in memory, so disc access is intermittent.
While recording in Auto Interval Rec mode, the TALLY (green tally) indicator in the viewfinder flashes (4 flashes/second) and the message “AUTO INTERVAL **M**S” flashes on the viewfinder screen.
When the camcorder is capturing the picture in memory, the REC (recording, red tally) indicator in the viewfinder lights.
After the length of time for recording on the disc (REC TIME) has elapsed, the camcorder automatically stops recording.
To interrupt shooting
Press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens.
Disc access may occur for recording picture data already stored in memory.
To continue shooting
Press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens again.
To exit Auto Interval Rec mode
Do either of the following.
• Set the POWER switch to OFF.
• Set CACHE/INTVAL REC to OFF on the REC
FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu.
Time required for shooting and time required for recording on the disc
Auto Interval Rec mode is effective for shooting objects that move very slowly. To use this function, you need to set the total time for shooting (TAKE TOTAL TIME) and the length of time for recording on the disc (REC TIME).
The time required for shooting is the time required to capture the very slowly moving
84
subject, and the camcorder must be arranged so that during this time the subject is always in the frame.
The disc recording time indicates the running time of the completed recording. The camcorder calculates the time-lapse interval from these two times.
Total time for shooting (TAKE TOTAL TIME)
Shooting interval
Time for recording on the disc
(REC TIME)
Manual Interval Rec mode settings and shooting
Manual Interval Rec has the following two modes.
Single shot mode: Each time the REC START button or VTR button on the lens is pressed, the camcorder captures to memory a single shot consisting of the specified number of video frames.
Consecutive mode: Once the REC START button or VTR button on the lens is pressed, the camcorder captures consecutive shots to memory at the specified interval, with each shot consisting of the specified number of video frames.
To make settings
1
Display the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select CACHE/INTVAL REC, and turn the MENU knob to display
“M.INT”.
005 REC FUNCTION TOP
SLOW & QUICK : ON
FRAME RATE : 30P
CACHE/INTVAL REC: M.INT
NUMBER OF FRAME : 1
TRIGGER INTERVAL: M
DISC EXCHG CACHE: OFF
CLIP CONT REC : OFF
LIVE LOGGING : OFF
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes as follows: OFF y CACHE y
A.INT y M.INT.
When M. INT appears, the camcorder is in
Manual Interval Rec mode and the TALLY
(green tally) indicator in the viewfinder flashes.
3
Select NUMBER OF FRAME, and turn the MENU knob to select the desired number of frames to be recorded in each shot.
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes as follows: 1 y 3 y 6 (when
SYSTEM LINE is set to 720 and REC
FORMAT is set to HD422 50, HD420 HQ, or
HD420 SP: 2 y 6 y 12).
4
Select TRIGGER INTERVAL, and turn the MENU knob to select the desired trigger mode or length of interval.
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes as follows: M y 1SEC y 2SEC y 3SEC y 4SEC y 5SEC y 6SEC y 7SEC y 8SEC y 9SEC y 10SEC y 15SEC y 20SEC y 30SEC y
40SEC y 50SEC y 1MIN y 2MIN y
3MIN y 4MIN y 5MIN y 6MIN y
7MIN y 8MIN y 9MIN y 10MIN y
15MIN y 20MIN y 30MIN y 40MIN y 50MIN y 1H y 2H y 3H y 4H y 6H y 12H y 24H.
Here SEC means seconds (5SEC is 5 seconds) and MIN means minutes (1MIN is one minute).
M: The single shot mode (recording only one shot after one operation). In the viewfinder, the TALLY (green tally) indicator flashes twice per second.
A setting value other than “M”: The consecutive mode (recording shots repeatedly after one operation). In the
85
viewfinder, the TALLY (green tally) indicator flashes four times per second.
5
When a setting value other than “M”
(the consecutive mode) is selected in step 4, select PRE-LIGHTING, and turn the MENU knob to select the lighting on-time before recording starts as required.
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes as follows: OFF y 2SEC y
5SEC y 10SEC.
Note
Set the LIGHT switch on the camcorder to AUTO to turn on the light before recording. The light switch must also be set to ON. With these settings, the light turns on and off automatically. However, the light remains on continuously if the off time is 5 seconds or less.
When the LIGHT switch is set to MANUAL and the light switch is set to ON, the light remains on continuously. (The light does not turn on and off automatically.)
When the setting is completed, the following message appears along the bottom of the viewfinder screen.
In single shot mode: MANU INTERVAL *
FRAME
In consecutive mode: INTERVAL * SEC (MIN/
H) * FRAME
“* SEC”, “* MIN”, and “* H” indicate the length of interval and “* FRAME” indicates the number of frames.
The camcorder exits Manual Interval Rec mode whenever it is powered off. However, the
NUMBER OF FRAME, TRIGGER INTERVAL, and PRE-LIGHTING settings are maintained.
You do not need to set them again the next time you use Manual Interval Rec mode.
To shoot and record
1
After performing the basic procedures for shooting and recording, following
the instructions in “Basic Procedure for
Shooting” (page 75), secure the
camcorder so that it will not move.
2
Press the REC START button or the
VTR button on the lens.
The camcorder starts recording in Manual
Interval Rec mode. When you use the PRE-
LIGHTING function, recording starts after the light is switched on.
While recording in Manual Interval Rec mode, the TALLY (green tally) indicator in the viewfinder flashes (2 or 4 flashes/second) and the message “MANU INTERVAL (*
SEC) * FRAME” flashes on the viewfinder screen.
To exit shooting
Do one of the following.
• In the single shot mode, press the EJECT button.
• In the consecutive mode, press the REC START button or the lens VTR button to stop recording.
• Set the POWER switch to OFF.
After the camcorder has exited from Manual
Interval Rec mode, it records picture data stored in memory to the disc.
To exit Manual Interval Rec mode
Do one of the following.
• Set the POWER switch to OFF.
• Set the CACHE/INTVAL REC setting to OFF on the REC FUNCTION page of the
OPERATION menu.
Shooting with Slow & Quick
Motion
When the recording format is MPEG HD422,
50 Mbps, and the resolution/system frequency is
1080/23.98P, 1080/25P, or 1080/29.97P, you can specify a recording frame rate that is different from the playback frame rate.
By shooting with this function, you can obtain smooth slow motion and fast motion effects.
Notes
• No audio is recorded during Slow & Quick Motion shooting.
• Slow & Quick Motion cannot be enabled when the unit is set up to record external input video. Switch to shooting with the camera
• The following functions are disabled automatically whenever you enable the Slow & Quick Motion function.
- Picture Cache function
- Interval Rec function
- Disc Exchange Cache function
- Clip Continuous Rec function
86
- Live Logging function
• When you enable Slow & Quick Motion, limitations apply to the values that can be selected for the following items.
- Gain value: 0 to 12 dB only
- Color bar signal: 100% only
• Timecode is recorded as R-RUN during Slow & Quick
Motion shooting.
• Lower resolution in the vertical direction may be evident in video recorded at frame rates of 25P or higher (1080/23.98P), 26P or higher (1080/25P), and
31P or higher (1080/29.97P).
• Slow & Quick Motion can be used only with certain settings, including the recording format (MPEG
HD422 50 Mbps) and the resolution and system frequency settings (1080/23.98P, 1080/25P, or 1080/
29.97P). Slow & Quick Motion is disabled automatically if you change any of these to other settings.
To enable the function
1
Check that you are not recording and that the recording format of this unit is set to MPEG HD422, 50 Mbps, and the resolution/system frequency is set to
1080/23.98P, 1080/25P, or 1080/29.97P.
2
Display the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu.
See “Basic menu operations” (page 192) for
more information about menu operations.
3
Select SLOW & QUICK, and turn the
MENU knob until ON appears.
005 REC FUNCTION TOP
SLOW & QUICK : ON
FRAME RATE : 30P
CACHE/INTVAL REC : --
DISC EXCHG CACHE : --
CLIP CONT REC : --
LIVE LOGGING : --
4
Select FRAME RATE, and turn the
MENU knob until the desired frame rate appears.
The frame rate setting ranges are as follows.
Recording format Frame rate
1080/23.98P
1080/25P
1080/29.97P
1 to 48
1 to 50
1 to 60
When you have finished making settings, the system frequency and the frame rate appear at the top of the viewfinder screen. You can change the frame rate with the MENU knob while viewing this display.
Exchanging discs while recording
(Disc Exchange Cache function)
Even if you run out of free disc capacity while recording, you can continue recording by using the Disc Exchange Cache function. This function enables seamless recording over extended recording sessions, too long to fit on one disc, by recording to the unit’s internal memory while you exchange the disc.
Notes
• Disc Exchange Cache settings cannot be made while this unit is in the following states.
- The Interval Rec function is enabled.
- The Clip Continuous Rec function is enabled.
- The Live Logging function is set to Live View mode.
- During Slow & Quick Motion shooting
• The unit’s internal memory is not unlimited, so the video and audio may be interrupted if it takes too long to exchange the disc.
To enable the Disc Exchange Cache function
1
Display the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select DISC EXCHG CACHE, and turn the MENU knob to display “ON”.
The TALLY (green tally) indicator lights in the viewfinder.
To exchange discs with the function enabled
When the disc exchange cache function is enabled, the following procedure allows you to exchange discs while continuing to record.
87
1
Press the REC START button or the
VTR button on the lens to start recording.
The REC (recording, red tally) indicator lights in the viewfinder, and the tally indicator lights.
2
Press the EJECT button with the unit still in the recording state.
The REC (recording, red tally) indicator in the viewfinder and the tally indicator flash
(once per second), and the disc is ejected.
If the message “DISC FULL!” appears
You can continue recording, because video and audio continue to be saved to internal memory. Press the EJECT button and continue to step 3 .
Note
Do not stop recording before pressing the EJECT button. If you stop recording, the unit will stop storing video and audio in internal memory and this function will not work.
3
Quickly remove the disc, insert a formatted blank disc, and close the cover.
When the disc is loaded, the REC (recording, red tally) indicator in the viewfinder and the tally indicator change to lit, and recording continues.
If the REC indicator and tally indicator begin flashing rapidly during the disc exchange
If the indicators change to flashing twice per second, that means that the unit’s internal memory is almost full. Complete the disc exchange quickly.
Notes
• If you insert a disc that cannot be recorded (such as a full disc or one with the Write Inhibit tab of the disc set to the recording disabled position), the unit ejects that disc as soon as it is recognized.
• Recording may not start immediately if you insert an unformatted disc, or a disc that already contains a large number of clips. As a result, the video and audio may be interrupted.
Recording with the Clip
Continuous Rec function
Normally, a clip is created as an independent file each time that you start and stop recording. But this function allows you to start and stop recording while continuously recording to the same clip, for as long as the function remains enabled. This is convenient when you do not want to generate a large number of short clips, and when you want to record without worrying about exceeding the clip limit (up to 300 clips). It is still easy to find recording start points, because a Rec
Start essence mark is recorded at the recording start point each time you start recording.
1
Display the REC FUNCTION page in the OPERATION menu.
See “Basic menu operations” (page 192) for
more information about menu operations.
2
Select CLIP CONT REC and turn the
MENU knob until ON appears.
“CONT” appears in the viewfinder, and the function is enabled.
You can assign the Clip Continuous Rec on/off function to one of the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4/5 switches or the RET button on the lens.
For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches” (page 208).
Note
Clip Continuous Rec settings cannot be made while this unit is in the following states.
• The Picture Cache function is enabled.
• The Interval Rec function is enabled.
• The Disc Exchange Cache function is enabled.
• The Live Logging function is set to Live View mode.
• During Slow & Quick Motion shooting
To stop the function
When the function is enabled, you can stop it by executing any of the following operations. (A new clip will be created when you next start recording.)
• Operate on a clip (lock, delete, or rename a clip)
• Establish a network connection
• Eject the disc
• Change the recording format
• Power the unit off
88
To disable the function
Set CLIP CONT REC in the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu to OFF.
Retaking the most recent clip
A retake function is available, making it easy to erase and retake the most recently recorded clip.
To use the retake function, you need to assign it to one of the ASSIGN 1/3/4/5 switches in advance.
For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches” (page 208).
Example: After recording clip 3, you want to delete it and record a new clip 3 after clip 2.
Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3
New clip
To retake the most recent clip
With recording paused or after the end of a
recording review (see page 76) , proceed as
follows.
1
Hold down the button to which the retake function has been assigned.
While the button is held down, the last frame of the recorded clip and the message “PUSH
RET FOR CLIP DELETE” appears.
2
In this state, press the RET button.
The message “DELETING LAST CLIP” appears, and the processing for deleting the last recorded clip begins.
When the deleting has finished, the message
“LAST CLIP WAS DELETED” appears.
Notes
• The retake function cannot be used when the Clip
Continuous Rec function is enabled.
• If an operation (other than recording review) which is not a retake operation is carried out after the last clip has been recorded, the retake function does not work even when the camcorder is in the recording pause state.
In this case, the message “RE-TAKE NOT
ALLOWED!” appears. When you want to replace the
last clip with a new clip, delete the clip (see page 123)
.
Once you carry out a retake operation, the last clip is deleted even if you do not carry out a recording operation afterwards.
Assigning user-defined clip titles automatically
About the automatic title generation function
By default, clips on each disc are assigned names in the range C0001.MXF to C9999.MXF. For this reason, two discs can contain clips with the same names.
The automatic title generation function allows you to assign titles to all of the clips on several discs, which facilitates clip management. For example, if the titles TITLE00001 to
TITLE00020 are assigned to clips C0001.MXF to
C0020.MXF on disc 1, then the titles
TITLE00021 to TITLE00037 are assigned to clips C0001.MXF to C0017.MXF on disc 2.
Titles are made up of prefixes, up to 10 characters in length, and five-digit serial numbers such as
TITLE 00001.
C0020.MXF
C0002.MXF
C0001.MXF
TITLE00020
TITLE00020
TITLE00001
Clips recorded on Disc 1
C0017.MXF
C0002.MXF
C0001.MXF
TITLE00037
TITLE00022
TITLE00021
Clips recorded on Disc 2
Setting the title prefix
You can assign title prefixes by choosing from a prefix list stored in internal memory, or by entering the prefix directly.
However, to choose from a prefix list, you must create the list beforehand on a computer and
89
transfer it to the unit’s internal memory using a
USB flash drive.
Setting the initial value of the serial number
The initial value of the serial number can be set to
00001 (the default) or to any other number. The number is automatically incremented by 1 each time you record a clip. When it reaches 99999, it returns to 00001 for the next clip.
Note
Duplicate clip titles can be generated depending on the serial number setting, for example if you reset the serial number to the original value after recording several clips.
Care should be taken when setting the serial number.
To assign user-defined titles automatically when clips are recorded
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the CLIP TITLE page of the
OPERATION menu.
030 CLIP TITLE TOP
TITLE : DSABL
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select “TITLE” and then press the
MENU knob.
3
Turn the MENU knob to display
“ENABL” and then press the MENU knob.
030 CLIP TITLE TOP
TITLE : ENABL
SELECT PREFIX : EXEC
CLEAR NUMERIC : EXEC
LOAD PREFIX DATA: EXEC
PREFIX : TITLE
NUMERIC : 00001
Clip titles will be generated automatically if you record in this state.
The title of the next clip to be recorded will be a combination of the prefix in the PREFIX field and the serial number in the NUMERIC field.
To create a list of title prefix strings
Prepare the data beforehand according to the following rules.
File name
Assign the name “TITLES.TXT” to the file.
Input format
Enter title prefixes one at time, separated by newline (CRLF) characters.
Prefixes can be up to 10 characters long. A prefix file can contain up to 20 prefixes.
Allowable characters
• Digits: 0 to 9
• Alphabetic characters: a to z, A to Z
• The following symbols: !, #, $, %, &, ', ( , ), ~,
=, -, ^, @, [, ], {, }, +, ; (semicolon), , (comma),
. (period), _ (underscore)
• Space
Title prefix list example
Tennis<CRLF>
Basketball<CRLF>
Skiing_1<CRLF>
Skiing_2<CRLF>
To transfer a title prefix list to the internal memory of the camcorder
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Create the following directory on the
USB flash drive and copy the title prefix file (TITLES.txt) into it.
\\MSSONY\PRO\XDCAM\GENERAL\VA
L_LIST
2
Connect a USB flash drive with the title prefix file (TITLES.TXT) to the USB connector of the camcorder.
3
On the CLIP TITLE page of the
OPERATION menu
select “LOAD PREFIX DATA” and then press the MENU knob.
“USB MEMORY ACCESS” appears, and the file on the USB flash drive
(TITLES.TXT) is transferred to the internal memory of the unit.
90
The message “COMPLETE!” appears when the transfer finishes.
Note
The message “FILE NOT FOUND!” appears if no list of title prefixes is found.
Check the location where the file is stored on the
USB flash drive.
To select a prefix from the title prefix list
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the CLIP TITLE page of the
OPERATION menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select “SELECT PREFIX” and then press the MENU knob.
A list of up to 20 title prefixes appears.
P00 TITLE PREFIX ESC
001: Tennis
002: Basketball
003: Skiing_1
004: Skiing_2
005: Athletics
006: Aquatics
007: Cycling
008: Softball
009: Fencing
010: Sailing
Note
When no list of title prefixes has been transferred to the internal memory of this unit, only the initial value “TITLE” appears.
3
Select the desired title prefix from the list, and then press the MENU knob.
The CLIP TITLE page appears again, and the selected prefix appears in the PREFIX field.
To enter a title prefix directly
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the CLIP TITLE page on the
OPERATION menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select “PREFIX” and then press the
MENU knob.
A prefix string appears.
030 CLIP TITLE TOP
TITLE : ENABL
SELECT PREFIX : EXEC
CLEAR NUMERIC : EXEC
LOAD PREFIX DATA: EXEC
PREFIX : TITLE
!#$%&'()+,-.0123456789;
=@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV
WXYZ[]^_abcdefghijklmnop
qrstuvwxyz{}~
INS DEL RET ESC END
3
Move x onto the character you want to change, and then press the MENU knob.
4
Turn the MENU knob to move x onto the desired character in the list of selectable characters, and then press the MENU knob.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the remaining characters.
6
When you have finished entering the prefix, turn the MENU knob to move x to “END” and then press the MENU knob.
The camcorder exits prefix input mode, and the original CLIP TITLE page appears.
To set the initial value of the clip title serial number
You can set the initial value of the clip title serial number to 00001 (default) or to any 5-digit value.
To return the initial value to 00001
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the CLIP TITLE page on the
OPERATION menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select “CLEAR NUMERIC”and then press the MENU knob.
The message “CLEAR OK? b YES NO” appears.
3
Select “YES” and then press the MENU knob.
The value in the NUMERIC field returns to
00001.
91
To set the initial value to any number
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the CLIP TITLE page on the
OPERATION menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select “NUMERIC” and then press the
MENU knob.
3
Move x onto the digit you want to change, and then press the MENU knob.
4
Turn the MENU knob to move x onto the desired digit in the list of selectable digits, and then press the MENU knob.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the remaining digits.
6
When you have finished entering the value, turn the MENU knob to move x to “END” and then press the MENU knob.
The camcorder exits numeric input mode, and the original CLIP TITLE page appears.
To check clip titles
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail screen, and select the clip whose title you want to check.
The title of the selected clip appears in the upper left of the screen.
See “Clip thumbnail screen” (page 105) for more
information about the thumbnail screen.
Notes
• It is not possible to specify 00000 as the initial value.
Even if you enter 00000, the value is reset to 00001 when the camcorder exits numeric input mode.
• The value of the serial number is incremented by 1 every time a title is generated. When the value reaches
99999, the next number restarts from 00001.
• Duplicate clip titles can be generated if you reset the serial number after recording several clips or the same is true depending on the value setting. Care should be taken when setting the serial number.
Assigning user-defined names to clips and clip lists
The following standard format names are assigned automatically to clips and clip lists that are created or recorded by XDCAM devices.
Clips: C0001.MXF to C9999.MXF
Clip lists: E0001E01.SMI to E0099E01.SMI
When you record or create clips and clip lists, you can assign user-defined names instead of the standard format names. Assigning meaningful names to clips and clip lists can facilitate file management.
Limitations
• Letters, numbers and symbols from the Unicode
2.0 character set can be used.
However, the following control characters and symbols cannot be used.
Control characters: U+0000 to U+001F,
U+007F
Symbols: ", *, /, :, <, >, ?, \, |
• Depending on the character type, the length of name (“C*” part) may be limited to 14 characters. (The limit for ASCII characters is 56 characters.)
• All file name extensions are converted automatically to uppercase.
• Titles are used as user-defined clip names on this unit. Therefore, the available characters are limited to those supported by the title function.
• Files generated along with clips and clip lists are assigned the same names (the “C*” or “E*” part of the following file names).
Clips: Metadata files (C*M01.XML), user metadata files (C*M02.KLV), proxy AV data files (C*S01.MXF)
Clip lists: Metadata files (E*M01.XML)
• The following names cannot be assigned.
Clips: C0000.MXF
Clip lists: E0000E01.SMI, E0100E01.SMI to
E9999E01.SMI, E0000.SMI, E0100.SMI to
E9999.SMI
• The following names should be avoided.
Clips: C5000.MXF to C9999.MXF
Clip lists: E0001.SMI to E0099.SMI
To assign clip names on this unit
The title assigned to a clip is also used as the name of that clip (or the file name).
92
C0001.MXF
TITLE00001
When sub item “AUTO NAMING” is set to
“C****”
TITLE00001.MXF
TITLE00001
When sub item “AUTO NAMING” is set to
“TITLE”
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Before starting, set TITLE on the CLIP
TITLE page of the OPERATION menu to ENABL and set a title
.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Display the FILE NAMING page of the
OPERATION menu.
3
Select NAMING FORM and then press the MENU knob.
4
Turn the MENU knob to display
“FREE” and then press the MENU knob.
You can now enter a user-defined name.
031 FILE NAMING TOP
NAMING FORM: FREE
AUTO NAMING: C****
5
Turn the MENU knob to select “AUTO
NAMING” and then press the MENU knob.
6
Turn the MENU knob to display
“TITLE” and then press the MENU knob.
The same name will now be given to newly recorded clips.
Notes
• An FTP client software that supports UTF-8 is required to use Unicode characters other than ASCII characters. Command prompt FTP commands do not support UTF-8.
• When the first letter of the title setting on the CLIP
AUTO TITLING menu is a space or period (.), the clip name is the title string minus the first letter.
To use clip names and clip list names via FTP
Carry out steps 2 to 4
of “To assign clip names on this unit” (page 92).
It is possible to write, transfer, and rename clips and clip lists with user-defined names over FTP connections
.
Fuji.MXF
User-defined clip names can be used via FTP
Sakura.SMI
User-defined clip list names can be used via FTP
To check clip names
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail screen, and select the clip whose name you want to check.
The name of the selected clip appears in the upper left of the screen.
See “Clip thumbnail screen” (page 105) for more
information.
93
Note
The item at the upper left of the screen is displayed according to the following order of priority.
Title > user-defined clip name > standard format clip name
Therefore, the display of this item changes as follows, depending on whether or not there is a title.
• When a title has been set as a clip name on this unit, the title is displayed for clips recorded on this unit.
• The user-defined name or standard format name is displayed for clips without a title.
To check clip information (name, title, etc.)
For details, see “Checking clip properties”
Using planning metadata
Planning metadata is a file that contains metadata about the clips to be shot and recorded.
To use planning metadata, you need to load a planning metadata file into the unit’s memory before starting to shoot.
There are three ways to load files.
• Automatically load a file that has been written to the following directory on a Professional
Disc via an FTP connection.
If you do not want to load a file automatically, add a “load” property to the PlanningMetadata tag and set the value of the property to “false”, as shown in the shaded part of the following example.
Example: <PlanningMetadata … sp load="false" sp version="1.00">
• Use a GUI screen to load a file that has been written to the following directories on a
Professional Disc or a USB flash drive
• Use a web browser to load a planning metadata
File creation rules
File location
Professional Disc:
General/Sony/
Planning directory a)
USB Flash drive:
General/Sony/
Planning directory
File name
• Format that can be used in the General directory
• Extension: XML
• ASCII characters (up to
63 characters including the extension)
• Extension: XML a) The General/Sony/Planning directory is generated automatically when you format a disc.
Note
Do not save more than 100 planning metadata files in the above save locations. The unit may fail to load the files correctly if more than 100 are saved.
For greater convenience in planning metadata operations, you can use the optional CBK-WA01
Wi-Fi Adaptor and the supplied Sony Planning
Metadata Add-in application software. For details, refer to the operation manual of the CBK-WA01
Wi-Fi Adaptor.
To set clip names by using planning metadata
The following two types of clip name strings can be written in a planning metadata file.
• The ASCII format name that appears in the viewfinder
1)
• The UTF-8 format name that is actually registered as the clip name
2)
1) It is also possible to display the UTF-8 format name,
2) When no UTF-8 format name string is specified, the
ASCII format name string is registered as the actual clip name.
Clip name string format
In a text editor, modify the two fields in the
<Title> tag that contain the clip name strings (the shaded fields in the example in the next section
“Clip name string example”).
Enter a name in the first field in ASCII format (up to 50 characters), and enter another name in the second field in UTF-8 format (up to 50 bytes).
Clip name string example
<?xml
sp version= "1.0" sp encoding="UTF-8"?> 3
<PlanningMetadata sp xmlns="http:// xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/ planningmetadata" sp assignId="
P0001" sp creationDate="
2008-01-20T17:00:00+09:00" sp lastUpdate="
2008-03-28T10:30:00+09:00" sp version="1.00"> 3
<Properties sp propertyId=" assignment" sp update="2008-01-20T09:00:
00+09:00" sp modifiedBy="Chris"> 3
<Title sp usAscii=" Typhoon " sp xml:lang
="en"> Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo </
Title> 3
</Properties> 3
94
</PlanningMetadata> 3
In the above example, sp
indicates a space and 3 indicates a carriage return.
Notes
• When you create a file, enter each statement as a single line with a CRLF only after the last character in the statement line, and do not enter spaces except where specified.
• If the UTF-8 format string exceeds 50 bytes, the ASCII format string is used as the clip name string.
If no ASCII format name is specified, the standard format clip name is used.
When an ASCII format name string exceeds 50 characters, and when an UTF-8 format name string exceeds 50 bytes, the standard format clip name is used.
Setting clip names
1
Load a planning metadata file containing clip names into the unit’s memory
.
2
Carry out steps 2 to 5 of “To assign clip names on this unit” (page 92)
.
3
Turn the MENU knob to display
“PLAN”, and then press the MENU knob.
Each time that you start recording, the unit automatically creates clip names using the names specified in the planning metadata file. An underscore (_) and a five-digit serial number (00001 to 99999) is appended to each clip name.
Examples of automatically generated clip names
• Clip names displayed in the viewfinder:
Typhoon_00001, Typhoon_00002, ...
1)
• The actually recorded clip names:
Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00001,
Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00002, ...
1) When display of the ASCII format clip name has
.
Notes
• The serial numbers return to 00001 on the next recording operation if you reach number 99999.
• Serial numbers are not reset when you power the unit off or exchange discs (newly generated numbers are continuous on the old ones).
• If the ASCII format clip name string is longer than 14 characters, it is displayed in the viewfinder as the first 7 characters + x
(abbreviated) + the last 5 characters, for a total of
13 characters.
You can change the serial numbers by using
Planning Clip Name Suffix in the Disc Menu
To specify user disc IDs by using planning metadata
You can use planning metadata to define user disc
IDs which are saved in metadata files on
XDCAM discs. To define a user disc ID, specify it as an ASCII or UTF-8 format disc name string in the planning metadata.
Notes
• A user disc ID is set only after the recording is finished.
• User disc IDs cannot be set to the disc where another user disc ID is already set. Use one of the following to change the user disc ID, or delete it before starting the operation described below.
- Software keyboard screen (see page 131)
- One of the software applications
Disc name string format
Use a text editor to enter an ASCII string (up to
127 characters) or a UTF-8 string (up to about 42 multibyte characters) in the shaded part of the example in the next section, “Example of disc name specification”.
Example of disc name specification
<?xml
sp version="1.0" sp encoding="UTF-8"?> 3
<PlanningMetadata xmlns="http://xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/ planningmetadata" sp assignId="H00123" sp creationDate="2009-09-10T08:00:00-05:00" sp lastUpdate="2009-09-10T13:43:52-05:00" sp version="1.00"> 3
<Properties propertyId="assignment" sp class="original" sp update="
2009-09-10T15:00:00-05:00" sp modifiedBy="Chris"> 3
<Title usAscii="Football Game" sp xml:lang="ja">Football Game 10/09/
2009</Title> 3
<Meta name="MediaName" sp content=" FootBall "/> 3
</Properties> 3
</PlanningMetadata> 3
In this example, sp
indicates a space and 3 indicates a newline.
95
You can check user-specified disc name strings in
the Disc Properties screen (see page 131) , where
they appear as the user disc ID.
Note
When you create a planning metadata file, enter the specification as a single statement with newlines at the indicated newline positions only and spaces at the indicated space positions only (except for spaces in the disc name string).
To set essence mark names by using planning metadata
You can use planning metadata to specify userdefined names for the Shot Mark0 to Shot Mark 9 essence marks that correspond to the 0 to 9 keys on a USB keyboard. When planning metadata that contains user-defined essence mark name strings is loaded into this unit’s memory, the unit displays those names for the essence marks that correspond to the keys and that are recorded when the keys are pressed.
See page 80 for more information about recording
essence marks, and see page 94 for more information
about how to load files.
Essence mark name string format
Use a text editor to enter essence mark names in the sections indicated by shading in “Essence mark name string example”. Names can be either in ASCII format (up to 32 characters) or UTF-8 format (up to 16 characters).
Note
If a name string contains even one non-ASCII character, the maximum length of that string is 16 characters.
Essence mark name string example
<?xml
sp version="1.0" sp encoding=
"UTF-8"?> 3
<PlanningMetadata xmlns="http:// xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/planningmetadata
" sp assignId="H00123" sp creationDate=
"2009-04-15T08:00:00Z" sp lastUpdate=
"2009-04-15T15:00:00Z" sp version="1.00"> 3
<Properties propertyId="assignment" sp class="original" sp update=
"2009-04-15T15:00:00Z" sp modifiedBy=
"Chris"> 3
<Title usAscii="Football
Game" sp xml:lang="en">Football Game
15/04/2009</Title> 3
<Meta name="_ShotMark1" sp content=
" Goal "/> 3
<Meta name="_ShotMark2" sp content=
" Shoot "/> 3
<Meta name="_ShotMark3" sp content=
" Corner Kick "/> 3
<Meta name="_ShotMark4" sp content=
" Free Kick "/> 3
<Meta name="_ShotMark5" sp content=
" Goal Kick "/> 3
<Meta name="_ShotMark6" sp content=
" Foul "/> 3
<Meta name="_ShotMark7" sp content=
" PK "/> 3
<Meta name="_ShotMark8" sp content=
" 1st Half "/> 3
<Meta name="_ShotMark9" sp content=
" 2nd Half "/> 3
<Meta name="_ShotMark0" sp content=
" Kick Off "/> 3
</Properties> 3
</PlanningMetadata> 3
In the above example, sp
indicates a space and 3 indicates a carriage return.
You can check user-defined essence mark name strings in the User Defined Essence Marks screen
.
Note
When you create a definition file, enter each statement as a single line with a CRLF only after the last character in the statement line, and do not enter spaces except where specified, except within essence mark name strings.
Recording video from external devices
You can select between recording of data shot by the camera and recording of data input from an external device by using a menu or by using the
ASSIGN 2 switch.
Notes
• If you want to use the ASSIGN 2 switch, you must assign the video switching function to the ASSIGN 2 switch beforehand
• Switching by the ASSIGN 2 switch takes priority over switching by the menu. (Switching by menu is not possible if the function has been assigned to the
ASSIGN 2 switch.)
• Video breakup may occur around the switch if you switch the input during recording.
96
• Camera video is recorded if you switch to external input without inputting an external video signal to the
SDI IN connector or the GENLOCK IN connector.
• It is not possible to record external input video with a changed aspect ratio.
To record SDI signals
You can record HD-SDI or SD-SDI signals input to the SDI IN connector. When an HD recording format (MPEG HD422 50, or MPEG HD420 HQ/
SP) is selected, SD-SDI signals are upconverted to HD signals before recording.
Notes
• It is not possible to record HD-SDI signals when an SD recording format (MPEG IMX 50/40/30, or DVCAM) is selected.
• The system frequency and resolution (HD-SDI input only) of input signals must match the current settings of this unit. Otherwise the input signals cannot be recorded.
• Only audio signals embedded in SDI signals are recorded, regardless of the settings of the AUDIO IN
CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4 switches.
1
Display the SOURCE SEL page of the
OPERATION menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select REC VIDEO SOURCE, and turn the MENU knob to display “EXT”.
3
Select EXT VIDEO SOURCE, and turn the MENU knob to select the desired signal to be recorded.
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting changes as follows: HDSDI
1) y SDSDI y VBS.
1) HDSDI cannot be selected when an SD recording format is selected.
After you complete this setting, you can record the video signals of external devices by inputting the HD SDI signals selected in step 3 to the SDI
IN connector.
Recording analog composite signals
You can record analog composite signals input to the GENLOCK IN connector. When an HD recording format (MPEG HD422 50, or MPEG
HD420 HQ/SP) is selected, analog composite signals are upconverted to HD signals before recording.
Note
Even if the GENLOCK item on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to OFF, the unit automatically genlocks to external video signals that are input to the GENLOCK IN connector. When
GENLOCK is set to OFF, the genlock is cancelled when the input of external video signals stops and the unit switches to camera shooting.
1
Display the SOURCE SEL page of the
OPERATION menu.
2
Select REC VIDEO SOURCE, and turn the MENU knob to display “EXT”.
3
Select EXT VIDEO SOURCE, and turn the MENU knob to display “VBS”.
After you complete this setting, you can record external video signals by inputting analog composite signals to the GENLOCK IN connector.
Using the Live Logging function
The Live Logging function allows you to transfer proxy AV data to a computer as you are shooting, or to send and receive metadata between this unit and a computer.
On this unit, you can transfer data via Ethernet or a wireless LAN.
1)
This function allows you to do the following on your computer.
• View proxy AV data
• Add and edit metadata (titles, comments, essence marks, and so on)
• Create clip lists
After adding or editing metadata, or creating a clip list, you can transfer the metadata or clip list from the computer back to this unit for recording on the original disc.
97
1) To make wireless LAN connections, you must install the optional CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi Adaptor or the optional CBK-WA100 Wireless Adaptor.
See page 212 for more information about wireless
LAN settings.
There are two Live Logging operating modes:
Live mode and Live View mode. The following table lists the main functions provided by each operating mode.
Operating mode
Main functions as seen from this unit
Live • Send clip metadata
• Write edited clip metadata back to disc
• Receive planning metadata
• Receive clip lists
Live View • Same functions as above
• Send proxy AV data
Notes
• In Live View mode, it is not possible to set time data by setting the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET. To set time data, first switch from Live View mode to another operating mode.
• Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch, time data advances in F-RUN mode while the unit is operating in Live View mode.
• In Live View mode, it is not possible to set the
PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to REGEN and record timecode that is continuous with timecode read from the disc.
To record with the Live Logging function enabled
On the REC FUNCTION page of the
OPERATION menu, set LIVE LOGGING to one of the following.
LIVE: Live mode
VIEW: Live view mode
Notes
• It is not possible to enable the Live Logging function while this unit is in the following states.
- The proxy data recording function is enabled.
- During Slow & Quick Motion shooting
• It is not possible to set the Live Logging function to
Live View mode while this unit is in the following states.
- The Picture Cache function is enabled.
- The Interval Rec function is enabled.
- The Disc Exchange Cache function is enabled.
- The Clip Continuous Rec function is enabled.
• The Live Logging function is disabled automatically whenever you enable the proxy data recording function.
Recording proxy data
You can connect a USB flash drive to the USB connector and use it to save proxy data. (Here,
“proxy data” refers to proxy AV data for the clips on the disc as well as to metadata.)
1)
You can then connect this USB flash drive to a computer to view the recorded proxy AV data, to edit and enter metadata (titles, comments, essence marks, and so on), and to create clip lists.
1) When recording of proxy data finishes, the planning metadata that has been loaded into this unit (if any) is also copied to the USB flash drive. The data is saved in the following directories, which are created automatically when a USB flash drive is mounted.
• Proxy AV data: \MSSONY\PRO\XDCAM\
MEMDISC\PROAVID\Sub
• Metadata: \MSSONY\PRO\XDCAM\MEMDISC\
PROAVID\Clip
• Planning metadata: \MSSONY\PRO\XDCAM\
MEMDISC\PROAVID\General\Sony\Planning
Notes
• USB flash drives must be formatted with the FAT32 file system. If a drive is formatted with any other file
system, reformat it on this unit (see page 100) .
• Never remove a USB flash drive or disconnect the battery pack or power cord while it is being accessed
(while this unit’s ACCESS indicator is lit). Doing so can corrupt the data on the USB flash drive and make it unusable.
To enable proxy data recording and copying to USB flash drives
Before starting, set ETHERNET/USB in the
POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu to “ENABL”.
1
In the OPERATION menu, display the
MEMORY REC page.
See “Basic menu operations” (page 192) for
more information about menu operations.
2
Select MEMORY REC, and turn the
MENU knob until ENABL appears.
98
032 MEMORY REC TOP
MEMORY REC : ENABL
COPY CURRENT CLP : EXEC
COPY ALL CLIPS : EXEC
ABORT COPY : EXEC
DEL ALL MEM CLP : EXEC
FORMAT MEMORY : EXEC
This enables proxy data recording and copying from discs to USB flash drives.
Notes
• It is not possible to make proxy data recording settings while this unit is in the following states.
- Wireless LAN connections are enabled.
• The Live Logging function is disabled automatically whenever you enable the proxy data recording function.
To record proxy data while synchronizing with disc recording
1
Connect a USB flash drive to the USB connector.
2
Check the memory symbol and the memory remaining display
.
3
After confirming that the USB flash drive has enough free capacity, press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens to start recording as normal.
1)
The clip’s proxy data is written to the USB flash drive at the same time that the clip is recorded to the disc.
1) After the unit is powered on. some time is required for the memory symbol to appear. However, if the connected USB flash drive has enough free memory and recording is enabled, then recording of proxy data to the USB flash drive begins as soon as recording starts, even if the memory symbol has not yet appeared. The proxy data is the same data as the proxy data for clips that are recorded to the disc.
Notes
• If you start recording immediately after powering the unit on, and then stop recording after only a short time, the recording operation does not end until the unit has recognized the USB flash drive and recorded the proxy data to it. Note that if you enable this function and start recording without connecting a USB flash drive, recording will take longer because the unit will require more time to recognize that no flash drive is connected.
• The message “USB MEMORY INHIBIT!” or “USB
M. INHI” appears if you connect and attempt to access a write protected USB flash drive, In this case, remove the USB flash drive, set it to enable recording, and connect it again.
• The message “MEM REC NG!” appears if you start recording without a USB flash drive connected. After recording stops, connect a USB flash drive, refer to
“To copy the proxy data of a clip on a disc to a USB flash drive”, and copy the proxy data that could not be written to the USB flash drive during recording.
• It is not possible to record proxy data to a USB flash drive while the Clip Continuous Rec function is enabled. If you attempt to do so, the message “MEM
REC NG!” appears and the data is not recorded. To record the proxy data, stop recording and copy the data to the USB flash drive as explained below in “To copy the proxy data of a clip on a disc to a USB flash drive”, and then resume shooting.
• Never disconnect the battery pack or power cord while recording to a USB flash drive (while the ACCESS indicator of this unit is lit). If you do so, recording processing will not end normally, and the clip proxy data that was recorded to the USB flash drive before the interruption will be lost.
• The message “MEM REC NG!” appears if the USB flash drive runs out of memory during recording (while the ACCESS indicator of this unit is lit), and the clip proxy data that was being recorded immediately before the message appeared is lost. If this occurs, exchange the USB flash drive, refer to “To copy the proxy data of a clip on a disc to a USB flash drive”, and copy the proxy data that could not be recorded.
• It is not possible to record proxy data to a USB flash drive only.
To stop recording
Recording to a USB flash drive stops whenever recording to the disc stops.
To stop recording to the USB flash drive only, set
MEMORY REC on the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION menu to “DSABL”.
To copy the proxy data of a clip on a disc to a USB flash drive
Proceed as follows to select an already recorded clip on a disc and copy its proxy data to a USB flash drive.
Note
The following functions stop during execution of a copy.
• Playback cue up
• Picture Cache recording
99
1
Search for the video of the clip (being played or stopped) that you want to copy.
2
Select COPY CURRENT CLP in the
MEMORY REC page of the
OPERATION menu, and then press the
MENU knob.
The message “EXECUTE OK?” appears.
3
Select “YES”, and then press the
MENU knob.
During the execution of the copy, the message “MEMORY ACCESS **%” appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor, where “**” is replaced with a number (0 to 99) that indicates the percentage completed. When processing finishes, the message “COMPLETE!” appears.
The proxy data of the current clip (the currently stopped clip, or the one that being played) is copied to the USB flash drive.
To copy the proxy data of all clips on a disc to a USB flash drive
Proceed as follows to copy the proxy data of all clips on a disc to a USB flash drive.
Note
The following functions stop during execution of a copy.
• Playback cue up
• Picture Cache recording
1
Select COPY ALL CLIPS in the
MEMORY REC page of the
OPERATION menu, and then press the
MENU knob.
The message “EXECUTE OK?” appears.
2
Select “YES”, and then press the
MENU knob.
During the execution of the copy, the message “MEMORY ACCESS **%” appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor, where “**” is replaced with a number (0 to 99) that indicates the percentage completed. When processing finishes, the message “COMPLETE!” appears.
The proxy data of all clips on the disc is copied to the USB flash drive.
Note
The message “M. Shortage” appears when the mount of data to be copied exceed the free capacity of the USB flash drive. The copy is not executed. Exchange the USB flash drive for one with enough free capacity.
To cancel a copy to a USB flash drive
1
Select ABORT COPY in the MEMORY
REC page of the OPERATION menu, and then press the MENU knob.
The message “EXECUTE OK?” appears.
2
Select “YES”, and then press the
MENU knob.
The message “ABORTING” appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor while the unit is aborting the copy operation. The message “ABORT” appears when the abort processing is completed.
To delete recorded proxy data
To delete data recorded on the disc at the same time that you delete proxy data from a USB flash drive, execute the DELETE CLIP command in the Thumbnail menu
.
To delete proxy data from the USB flash drive only, proceed as follows.
1
Select DELE ALL MEM CLP in the
MEMORY REC page of the
OPERATION menu, and then press the
MENU knob.
The message “EXECUTE OK?” appears.
2
Select “YES”, and then press the
MENU knob.
During the execution of the deletion, the message “MEMORY ACCESS” appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor.
When processing finishes, the message
“COMPLETE” appears.
All of the proxy data in the USB flash drive is deleted.
To format a USB flash drive
Proceed as follows to format a USB flash drive with the FAT32 file system.
1
Select FORMAT MEMORY in the
MEMORY REC page of the
100
OPERATION menu, and then press the
MENU knob.
The message “EXECUTE OK?” appears.
2
Select “YES”, and then press the
MENU knob.
During the execution of the format, the message “MEMORY ACCESS” appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor.
When processing finishes, the message
“COMPLETE” appears.
All of the data in the USB flash drive is deleted.
Obtaining GPS location information
To record location information
Set GPS to “ON” on the GPS SETUP page of the
OPERATION menu of the camcorder.
is displayed in the top right of the viewfinder to indicate that the unit is attempting to obtain location information. When the position is established, location information is recorded when shooting video.
Icons displayed on the screen
The icon displayed on the screen changes as follows depending on the state of the signals received from GPS satellites.
Positioning status
Off
Display GPS receive state
Positioning not available
Searching for satellites
Positioning
No display GPS SETTING is set to “OFF” or an error has occurred.
A GPS signal cannot be received, preventing location information from being obtained. Move to a location with a clear view of the sky.
Searching for GPS satellites. Several minutes may be required in order to fix the position.
A weak GPS signal is being received.
Positioning status
Positioning
Display GPS receive state
Positioning
A GPS signal is being received, and location information is available.
A strong GPS signal is being received, and location information is available.
Notes
• If a positioning icon is not displayed after several minutes, there may be a problem with signal reception.
You can continue shooting or move to an area with a clear view of the sky. Shooting when a positioning icon is not displayed means that location information will not be recorded.
• The GPS signal may not be received when indoors or near tall structures. Move to a location with a clear view of the sky.
• The recording of GPS information may be interrupted, depending on the strength of the received signal, even if a positioning icon is displayed.
To display the state of GPS data reception in the viewfinder
Set DISP GPS to ON on the VF DISP 2 page of the OPERATION menu to display the GPS data reception status at all times in the viewfinder.
Verifying the GPS location
When recording or playing video with GPS data, you can check the location on the GPS
INFORMATION screen in the viewfinder.
To display the GPS INFORMATION screen in the viewfinder
1
Set STATUS GPS to ON on the SET
STATUS page of the OPERATION menu.
2
Push the STATUS ON/SEL/OFF switch on the camcorder to the ON/SEL position.
The displayed screen changes each time the switch is pushed. Push the switch until the
GPS INFORMATION screen appears.
The GPS INFORMATION screen, below, is displayed for a few seconds.
101
GPS INFORMATION
LATITUDE : N 35 40 '12.36
LONGITUDE: E135 25 '13.31
ALTITUDE : +0123m
CALC: 13-03-31T12:45:35Z
REAL: 13-03-31T12:45:36Z
TIME ZONE +9:00
GPS xxx DOP:02
Displayed items
Item
LATITUDE
LONGITUDE
ALTITUDE
CALC
REAL
TIME ZONE
Description
Latitude
a)
Longitude
a)
Altitude
a)
Calculated date and time
b)
Current date and time
c)
Time zone offset from UTC a) When recording, the current latitude, longitude, and altitude are displayed. During playback, recorded information is displayed.
b) The calculated date and time displays the time obtained using positioning data received from three or more GPS satellites. After positioning is established, the display stops when positioning is subsequently lost. The time is displayed when positioning is reestablished. While positioning is established, the time displayed is always the same as the current date and time.
During playback, the calculated time is not displayed.
c) The current date and time displays the time obtained from one or more GPS satellites. It matches the GPS satellite clock. When no GPS satellites are available, it displays the time using a crystal-operated clock within the module.
During playback, the calculated date and time recorded on the disc is displayed.
When shooting without available GPS data,
[---------] is displayed.
Problems when using GPS
GPS signals cannot be received
The signals from GPS satellites may not be received due to interference caused by obstructions. In this case, move to a location with a clear view of the sky. For details about locations that may obstruct the signal, see
Calculated location appears incorrect
An error of up to a few hundred meters (yards) may occur if the received GPS signal is reflected off nearby structures or if the signal is very weak.
102
Chapter
5
Operations in GUI Screens
Overview
You can perform scene searches, play the searched scenes, and select scenes (edit clip list) in Graphical User Interface (GUI) screens. The
GUI screens are your gateways to discs and the data saved on discs.
Switching between GUI screens
The most important GUI screens are:
Clip thumbnail screen: Displays thumbnails of clips on the disc. “Clip” is displayed as the
title at the upper left of the screen (see page 104)
.
Clip list thumbnail screen: Displays thumbnails of sub clips in a clip list. “Clip List” is displayed as the title at the upper left of the screen
.
There are also two playback screens:
Clip playback screen: Playback screen for normal video
Clip list playback screen: Playback screen for clip list video
You will use the THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE
MARK button 1 and the SUB CLIP/DISC
MENU button 2 to switch between these four screens. Each press of these buttons switches between the screens as shown in the following figure. The THUMBNAIL and SUB CLIP indicators light as follows, according to the type of screen that is currently displayed.
Note
To switch between these four screens, a disc with recorded clips must be loaded in the unit.
(The GUI screens can display European languages, Japanese, Korean, Simplified
Chinese, and Traditional Chinese for clip names and titles.)
103
Clip playback screen
a)
Unlit THUMBNAIL
Unlit
ESSENCE
MARK
SUB CLIP
DISC MENU
2 2
1
1
Clip thumbnail screen
Clip: C0006 006/040
TC 00:23:00:25 TC 00:23:40:07 TC 00:24:45:11 TC 00:25:06:14
TC 00:25:49:23 TC 00:26:22:10 TC 00:27:19:04 TC 00:27:51:09
TC 00:28:06:09 TC 00:28:22:02 TC 00:23:34:18
DATE&TIME
30 NOV 2005 13:38
DUR
TC 00:23:54:22
0:00:10:23
Lit
THUMBNAIL
Unlit
ESSENCE
MARK
SUB CLIP
DISC MENU
2 2
Clip list playback screen
a), b)
Unlit
Lit
THUMBNAIL
ESSENCE
MARK
SUB CLIP
DISC MENU a) The playback screens appear when the LCD monitor is switched to display of video with
(CHAR) or without (MONI) superimposed text.
Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to switch the
LCD monitor to these modes (see page 19) .
b) The clip list playback screen appears when a clip
list is loaded into the unit’s memory (see page 130)
.
The other thumbnail screens are:
• Expand thumbnail screen
• Chapter thumbnail screen
• Essence mark thumbnail screen
1
1
Clip list thumbnail screen
b)
Clip List: E0001 002/013
TC 00:00:00:00 TC 00:00:04:14 TC 00:00:12:04 TC 00:00:20:13
TC 00:00:28:08 TC 00:00:35:15 TC 00:00:46:08 TC 00:00:53:22
TC 00:00:59:16
DATE&TIME
TC 00:01:06:18
28 JUL 2006 19:55
TC 00:01:13:11
TOTAL DUR
TC 00:01:17:27
00:01:31:16
Lit THUMBNAIL
Lit
ESSENCE
MARK
SUB CLIP
DISC MENU
104
Information and controls in thumbnail screens
About the display of clip and clip list names
You can specify that titles should appear instead of names in the clip name areas of thumbnail screens. You can also change the display language.
To specify that titles
(see page 92) , if they exist,
should be displayed with higher priority than names, select one of the following under Settings
>Display Title in the Disc Menu.
On: Title1 "title1": Display in the order title1, title2, clip or clip list name.
On: Title2 {title2}: Display in the order title2, title1, clip or clip list name.
To change the display language according to the area of use
, select the desired language under Settings >Select Font in the Disc
Menu.
Area of use setting
NTSC(J)AREA
(Japan)
NTSC AREA
(NTSC area other than
Japan) or PAL
AREA
Select Font setting
–
European
Alphabet
Korean
Simplified
Chinese
Traditional
Chinese
Displayable languages
English/Japanese
English/European languages
English/Korean
English/Simplified
Chinese
English/Traditional
Chinese
Clip thumbnail screen
This screen displays thumbnails of clips on the disc in the order that they were recorded. You can use this screen to work with clips – deleting or locking them, selecting their index pictures, adding them to clip lists, and so on.
a
Clip name
Displays the name or a title of the selected clip
.
b
Selection frame
Indicates that the thumbnail is selected. To select
another thumbnail, move the frame (see page 113) . Multiple selection frames appear
when multiple thumbnails are selected
c Clip number/total number of clips
Displays the total number of clips on the disc, and the number of the selected clip.
d Scrollbar
When not all of the thumbnails can be displayed in the thumbnail display area, the position of the slider shows the relative position of the currently displayed clips, and the length of the slider shows the relative length of currently displayed clips within all of the clips.
When you have a large number of thumbnails, you can save time by using the Skip Scroll function to jump directly to the thumbnail you want
.
e
Recording format
The recording format of the selected clip is displayed as a combination of the following information.
• Video format logo
• Number of system lines
• Recording quality
• Number of audio channels f
Clip date and time
Displays the date and time when the selected clip was shot and recorded.
105
g Duration
Displays the duration (recording time) of the selected clip. When multiple clips are selected, displays the total recording time of the selected clips.
1 Thumbnail display items
1 2 3
4
OK
TC 00:26:22:10
5 6 a Index picture
Displays an image to stand for the content of the clip. The index picture is normally the first frame of the clip.
b
Index picture changed mark
This mark, like the folded-over corner of a page that you want to remember, appears when the index picture has been changed to any frame other than the first frame of a clip
.
Note
When you cue up a clip, the unit always cues up the first frame, even when the index picture has been changed to a different frame.
c
S mark
This mark appears when shot marks or other
essence marks have been set in the clip (see page 80)
.
The chapter thumbnail screen can be displayed for clips that show this mark
.
d Clip flag icon
Displays the corresponding icon when a clip flag
(OK/NG/KP (KEEP)) is set in the clip
.
e
Clip and frame information
Displays the clip or frame information selected with the Clip Information item in the Thumbnail
Menu
. The factory default selection is the timecode of the first frame or the timecode of the thumbnail frame.
f Lock icon
This icon appears when the clip is locked
(protected) (see page 122) . Clips cannot be
deleted and their clip information cannot be changed when this mark is displayed.
Clip list thumbnail screen
This screen displays thumbnails of the clips in the current clip list. You can use this screen to create and edit clips lists.
1
Clip List: E0001
2 3 4
002/013
TC 00:00:00:00 TC 00:00:04:14 TC 00:00:12:04 TC 00:00:20:13
TC 00:00:28:08 TC 00:00:35:15 TC 00:00:46:08 TC 00:00:53:22
TC 00:00:59:16
DATE&TIME
TC 00:01:06:18
28 JUL 2006 19:55
TC 00:01:13:11
TOTAL DUR
TC 00:01:17:27
00:01:31:16
5 6 a Clip list name
Displays the name or a title of the clip list (see page 105).
b
Selection frame
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page
c Sub clip number/number of sub clips
Displays the total number of sub clips in the clip list, and the number of the selected sub clip.
d
Scrollbar
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page
e Clip list date and time
Displays the date and time when the clip list was created, or the date and time of its most recent modification. An asterisk (*) appears after the date and time of creation when the current clip list has not been saved to the disc.
106
Notes
• “New File” appears when no clip list has been loaded into the unit’s memory, and when a clip list has been cleared from the unit’s memory.
• A mark appears before the date of creation or modification when a disc is write inhibited. You can create clip lists when the disc is write inhibited, but you cannot save them.
f
Total duration
Displays the total duration of all sub clips in the clip list.
Expand thumbnail screen
This screen displays thumbnails of equally sized divisions of the selected clip.
1 2
Expand Clip 008/024 x 12
3
001/012
TC 00:01:35:17 TC 00:01:38:00 TC 00:01:36:14 TC 00:01:36:27
4
TC 00:01:37:11 TC 00:01:37:24 TC 00:01:38:08 TC 00:01:38:22
TC 00:01:39:06 TC 00:01:38:19
CLIP Tene
TC 00:01:40:02 TC 00:01:40:16
DUR 0:00:00:13
5 6 a
Selection frame
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page
b
Clip number/total clips x number of divisions
Displays the number of the selected clip, the total number of clips on the disc, and the number of times that the selected clip has been divided to display the expansion thumbnails.
c
Thumbnail number/total thumbnails
Displays the total number of expanded thumbnails and the number of the selected thumbnail.
d
Scrollbar
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page
e Clip name
Displays the name or a title of the expanded clip
f
Duration
Displays the time from the selected thumbnail to the next one.
Chapter thumbnail screen
Chapters are the sections between the shot marks,
Rec Start marks, and other essence marks that have been recorded in clips. This screen allows you to display thumbnails of the chapters in the selected clip.
Note
Shot marks can be set by the user during recording and playback. They can be deleted and moved.
Essence marks other than shot marks are set automatically. They cannot be deleted or moved.
1 2
Chapter of Clip 001/024
3
TC 00:23:00:25 TC 00:23:02:00 TC 00:23:04:00
4 5
001/004
CLIP
C0001
6
DUR
0:00:01:05
7 a Selection frame
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page
b
Clip number/total clips
Displays the total number of clips on the disc and the number of the clip that contains the displayed chapters.
If the essence mark name is a user-defined name, it is displayed between quotation marks, for
example as [Chapter: “Touch Down”] (see page 134) .
c S1/S2/RS marks
The “S1”, “S2”, and “RS” marks on the thumbnails indicate frames where Shot Mark1,
Shot Mark2, and Rec Start essence marks are set.
107
d Chapter number/total chapters
Displays the total number of chapters and the number of the selected chapter.
Note
The total number of chapters is the total number of chapters in the specified clip only.
e Scrollbar
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page
f Clip name
Displays the name or a title of the clip whose chapter is displayed
g Duration
Displays the time from the first frame of the selected chapter to the first frame of the next chapter.
Essence mark thumbnail screen
This screen displays thumbnails of the specified essence mark, found by searching all clips on the disc.
1 2
Shot Mark1
3 4
001/029
TC 00:23:02:00 TC 00:24:45:25 TC 00:25:07:01 TC 00:25:40:24
TC 00:26:22:11 TC 00:27:19:25 TC 00:27:51:25 TC 00:28:06:17
TC 00:28:35:00 TC 00:28:55:02
30 NOV 2006 19:55
TC 00:29:10:05 TC 00:29:20:03
"Capping literally years of spe..."
5 6 a Essence mark name
Displays the name of the essence mark (Shot
Mark1 here). If the shot mark name has been defined by the user, it is enclosed in quotation marks (" ") in the display
.
b
Selection frame
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page
c Essence mark number/total essence marks
Displays the total number of essence marks and the number of the selected essence mark.
108
Note
The total number of essence marks is the total number of essence marks that have been set in all clips on the disc.
d
Scrollbar
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page
e Clip date and time
Displays the date and time when the clip that contains the selected thumbnail was recorded or last modified.
f
Clip name
Displays the name or a title of the clip that contains the selected frame
Displaying menus
Thumbnail Menu
The Thumbnail Menu displays menu items that are valid for the currently displayed thumbnail screen.
To display the Thumbnail Menu
To display the Thumbnail Menu, press the
MENU button with a thumbnail screen displayed.
To return to the original screen, press the MENU button again, or press the RESET/RETURN button.
2 RESET/RETURN button
1 MENU button
DISP SEL HOLD RESET DISPLAY BRIGHT
LEVEL
EXPAND CHAPTER RETURN COUNTER RC U-BIT
THUMBNAIL MENU
ESSENCE
MARK
SUB CLIP
DISC MENU
SET
S.SEL
SHIFT
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
PRESET
REGEN
CLOCK
0 10 0
AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO SELECT
CH-1
AUDIO IN
CH-2
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
F
R
W
10
CH-3
F
R
W
CH-4
Thumbnail screen a)
Clip:"Navigeting sibiling relati..." 018/036
TC 00:29:19:23 TC 00:29:38:25 TC 00:29:50:04 TC 00:30:25:11
TC 00:30:40:13 TC 01:01:28:25 TC 00:09:43:14 TC 00:24:24:29
TC 00:24:34:27
DATE&TIME
TC 00:24:46:22 TC 00:25:42:08
30 NOV 2005 14:14
TC 00:25:49:07
DUR 0:23:22:26
1 1 2
Thumbnail Menu
Clip Information
Select Index Picture
Clip Properties
Add Sub Clips
Delete Clip
Lock/Unlock Clip
Set Clip Flag
Skip Scroll
Thumbnail Search
SHIFT+SET
SHIFT+RESET
SHIFT+STOP
Thumbnail Menu b) a) Clip thumbnail screen b) Thumbnail Menu of the clip thumbnail screen
Shortcut operations
Shortcut button names are displayed next to the
menu items of commands that have shortcuts (see page 145)
.
Note
Shortcuts displayed within parentheses should be used with all menus closed.
Thumbnail Menu submenus
• The Thumbnail Search Menu contains the basic commands for thumbnail searches.
• The Thumbnail View Menu contains the basic commands for moving to other menus.
109
Disc Menu
The Disc Menu allows you to do the following.
(Underlined values in the Operation/Setting column are the factory defaults.)
Item
Load Clip List
Save Clip List
Save Clip list as...
Delete Clip List
Clear Clip List
Load Planning Metadata/Select Drive
Planning Metadata Properties
Planning Clip Name Suffix
Clear Planning Metadata
Lock or Delete All Clips Sub-Item
Lock All Clips
Unlock All Clips
Delete All Clips
Delete All Voice
Disc Properties
Format Disc
Download Clip via Direct FTP
Operation/Setting
Load clip list into this unit’s memory.
Save a clip list to the disc under its current name, overwriting the old contents.
Save a clip list to the disc under a new name.
Delete a clip list from the disc.
Clear the current clip list from the unit’s memory.
Select a media disc or drive and load planning metadata into this unit’s memory.
Display the properties of the currently loaded planning metadata.
Change the serial number added to clip names created by using planning metadata.
Clear the currently loaded planning metadata from the unit’s memory.
Lock all clips.
Unlock all clips.
Delete all clips.
Delete all voice data.
Display the properties of the currently loaded disc.
Or edit the user disc ID, title 1, and title 2.
Format (initialize) the currently loaded disc.
Used to send clip to and from remote devices and remote computers.
110
Item
Settings
To display the Disc Menu
• Clip list thumbnail screen
• Clip playback screen
Sub-Item
SET Key on Thumbnail
Select USB Keyboard
Language
Select Mouse Pointer
Speed
To display the Disc Menu, press the SUB CLIP/
DISC MENU button with the SHIFT button held down in one of the following screens.
• Clip thumbnail screen
Operation/Setting
Sort Clip List by...
Sort Planning Metadata by...
Display Title
Planning Clip Name in
Clip Info. Area
Planning Clip Name
Display
Setting Format Disc
Select Font
Selects the behavior of the unit when the SET/S.SEL button or MENU knob is pressed with one thumbnail selected.
Cue up & Still: Cue up the selected thumbnail.
Cue up & Play: Cue up and play the selected thumbnail.
Selects a method to sort the clip list.
Name (A-Z): Sort in ascending alphabetic order.
Date (Newest First): Sort by date and time of creation, newest clip list first.
Selects a method to sort the planning metadata.
Name (A-Z): Sort in ascending alphabetic order.
Date (Newest First): Sort by date and time of creation, newest planning metadata first.
Selects whether to display clip and clip list titles.
On: Title1 "title1" : Display the title in the following order of priority: Title1, Title2, Clip name or Clip list name.
On: Title2 {title2}: Display the title in the following order of priority: Title2, Title1, Clip name or Clip list name.
Off: Do not display the title. Always display the clip name or clip list name.
Selects how to display in the video monitor screen the title contained in a planning metatdata file that is loaded into this unit.
ASCII Clip Name: Display title in ASCII format.
C lip Name: Display title in UTF-8 format.
Selects whether to display in the video monitor screen the title contained in a planning metatdata file that is loaded into this unit.
Disable: Do not display titles.
Enable: Display titles.
Selects whether to disable the Format Disc command.
Disable: Disable the command.
Enable: Enable the command.
Selects the language (font) used to display clip names, clip list names, and title2 clip titles.
Selects the language of the USB keyboard used in the software keyboard screen.
Selects the speed of the USB mouse pointer used in the software keyboard screen from among the following.
5 Fast/4/3 Middle/2/1 Slow
• Clip list playback screen
To return to the original screen, press the RESET/
RETURN button.
111
3 RESET/RETURN button
DISP SEL HOLD RESET DISPLAY BRIGHT
LEVEL
EXPAND CHAPTER RETURN COUNTER RC U-BIT
THUMBNAIL MENU
ESSENCE
MARK
SUB CLIP
DISC MENU
SET
S.SEL
SHIFT
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
PRESET
REGEN
CLOCK
0 10 0
AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO SELECT
CH-1
AUDIO IN
CH-2
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
F
R
W
10
CH-3
F
R
W
CH-4
1 SHIFT button
2 SUB CLIP/DISC MENU button
Clip list thumbnail screen
Clip Li s t: E0001 002/01 3
TC 00:00:00:00 TC 00:00:04:14 TC 00:00:12:04 TC 00:00:20:1 3
TC 00:00:2 8 :0 8 TC 00:00: 3 5:15 TC 00:00:46:0 8 TC 00:00:5 3 :22
TC 00:00:59:16
DATE&TIME
TC 00:01:06:1 8 TC 00:01:1 3 :11
2 8 JUL 2006 19:55 TOTAL DUR
TC 00:01:17:27
00:01: 3 1:16
1 + 2 3
Di s c Men u
Lo a d Clip Li s t
Sa ve Clip Li s t
Sa ve Clip Li s t as ...
Delete Clip Li s t
Cle a r Clip Li s t
Lo a d Pl a nning Met a d a t a / S elect Drive
Pl a nning Met a d a t a Propertie s
Cle a r Pl a nning Met a d a t a
Lock or Delete All Clip s
GUI screen operations
MENU knob
Left-/right-arrow buttons
DISP SEL HOLD RESET DISPLAY BRIGHT
LEVEL
EXPAND CHAPTER RETURN COUNTER RC U-BIT
THUMBNAIL MENU
ESSENCE
MARK
SUB CLIP
DISC MENU
SET
S.SEL
SHIFT
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
PRESET
REGEN
CLOCK
0 10 0
AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO SELECT
CH-1
AUDIO IN
CH-2
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
F
R
W
F
R
W
10
CH-3
CH-4
Up-/down-arrow buttons
SET/S.SEL button
To select items
Do one of the following to select thumbnails, menu items, timecode digits, and other items.
• Turn the MENU knob.
• Press the up-, down-, left-, or right-arrow button.
• Press the PREV or NEXT button.
• With the SHIFT button held down, press the
PREV or NEXT button (to move to the first or last item).
• Press the PREV button with the F REV button held down, or press the NEXT button with the F
FWD button held down (to move to the first or last item).
• With the SHIFT button held down, press the up- or down-arrow button (to move to the previous or next page).
• Press the F REV or F FWD button (to move to the previous or next page).
To select multiple thumbnails
Do one of the following.
• With the SHIFT button held down, turn the
MENU knob.
• With the SHIFT button held down, press the left- or right-arrow button.
112
To return to the previous screen
Press the RESET/RETURN button.
To move from a menu level to the next lower or higher menu level
For a menu item displayed together with a B or b mark, you can move to the next lower or higher menu level by pressing the right- or left-arrow button.
To scroll hidden parts of the string into view
When a B or b mark is displayed for an item, you can press the left or right arrow button to scroll the display by one character for each press.
The up and down arrow buttons scroll the beginning and end of the string into view.
To increment and decrement numbers
Do one of the following.
• Press the up- or down-arrow button.
• Turn the MENU knob.
To confirm selections
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
Thumbnail Operations
You can use thumbnail screens to display clip information and to find, protect, and delete clips.
The thumbnails provide visual confirmation of these and other operations.
Selecting thumbnails
The thumbnail selection frame (see page 105)
indicates the currently selected thumbnail.
To move the thumbnail selection frame
Turn the MENU knob, or press the arrow buttons.
To skip quickly through thumbnails (Skip
Scroll function)
When you have a large number of thumbnails, like in expand thumbnail screen, you can use the
Skip Scroll function to skip through them quickly.
See page 112 for more information about operations
in thumbnail screens.
1
In the screens like clip thumbnail screen or expand thumbnail screen, display the
Thumbnail Menu.
2
Select Skip Scroll, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
A small popup window appears on the scrollbar to indicate the position of the currently selected thumbnail within the set of all thumbnails.
Expand 007/235
DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01
Skip Scroll
DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01
CLIP "Seashore"
DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
113
3
Turn the MENU knob, or press the up or down-arrow button.
The current position moves by an amount equal to
1
/
10
of the total number of thumbnails.
4
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob at the new position.
The thumbnail at the position indicated in the small popup window appears in a thumbnail screen like the following
1)
.
Expand 007/235
DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01
CLIP "Seashore"
DUR 0:00:00:01 DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
1) Expand thumbnail screen
To select multiple thumbnails
Move the selection frame to the first thumbnail that you want to select. Then, with the SHIFT button held down, Turn the MENU knob, or press the right-arrow button.
To cancel the multiple selection, move the selection frame without the SHIFT button held down.
Clip:"Navigating sibling relati..." 018/036
TC 00:29:19:23 TC 00:29:38:25 TC 00:29:50:04 TC 00:30:25:11
TC 00:30:40:13 TC 01:01:28:25 TC 00:09:43:14 TC 00:24:24:29
TC 00:24:34:27 TC 00:24:46:22 TC 00:25:42:08 TC 00:25:49:07
DATE&TIME 30 NOV 2005 14:14 DUR 0:23:22:26
Searching with thumbnails
By using the thumbnails that appear in the various thumbnail screens, you can easily cue up and play clips and sub clips.
Using thumbnails to find clips
The clip thumbnail screen displays thumbnails of all clips recorded on the disc. You can use this screen to cue up the selected clip and to carry out
See “Selecting thumbnails” (page 113) for more
information.
Using the expand function to find scenes
The expand function allows you to divide a selected clip into equally sized blocks, and to display thumbnails of the first frame in each block. This is a quick and efficient way to review the selected clip and search for target scenes. You can specify 12, 144, or 1728 divisions.
Note
The maximum number of blocks may be other than 1728 when the recorded duration of the clip is short. In this case, the frame interval of expanded thumbnails is fixed at 1 frame. This allows you to view expanded thumbnails at equal intervals.
See page 112 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail of the clip that contains the scene you want to find.
2
Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button.
The selected clip is divided into 12 blocks, and a list appears in the expand thumbnail
with the first frame of each block displayed as a thumbnail.
3
Select the thumbnail that you want to expand further.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 up to twice, as required.
Note
Thumbnails cannot be further expanded when they already have the minimum duration (1 frame).
To return to the previous expansion level
Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button with the
SHIFT button held down.
To display the expand thumbnail screen of the previous or next clip
With the expand thumbnail screen still active, press the PREV button or the NEXT button.
114
Using the chapter function to find scenes
Chapters are the sections between the shot marks,
Rec Start marks, and other essence marks.
Rec Start essence marks are set automatically at the start of recording, but shot marks can be set at any scene during recording or playback.
The chapter function allows you to display thumbnails of the chapters in a clip.
See “Recording essence marks” (page 80) for more
information.
See page 112 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail of a clip with chapters set.
The “S” mark appears on the thumbnails of clips with chapters set.
2
Press the HOLD/CHAPTER button.
The chapter thumbnail screen
appears, with thumbnails of the frames where chapters are set.
The “S1”, “S2”, and “RS” marks on the thumbnails indicate frames where Shot
Mark1, Shot Mark2, and Rec Start essence marks are set.
To delete the shot mark at a chapter position
You can delete the shot mark (Shot Mark0 to Shot
Mark9) at the chapter position in the chapter thumbnail screen. (Rec Start essence marks cannot be deleted.)
1
In the chapter thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail for the frame whose shot mark you want to delete.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Delete Essence Mark.
A message appears asking if you are sure that you want to delete the shot mark.
4
Select OK to delete the mark, or Cancel to cancel the deletion, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
To adjust the position of shot marks at chapter positions
You can use the chapter thumbnail screen to adjust the position of shot marks (Shot Mark0 to
Shot Mark9) at chapter positions. (The positions of Rec Start essence marks cannot be adjusted.)
1
In the chapter thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail of the shot mark whose position you want to adjust.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Move Essence Mark.
The Move Essence Mark screen is displayed.
You can perform playback and searches in this screen.
4
Use the PLAY/PAUSE button or F
REV/F FWD buttons to display the frame you want.
You can also perform jog playback by turning the MENU knob.
5
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
To display the chapter thumbnail screen of the previous or next clip with chapters
With the chapter thumbnail screen still active, press the PREV button or the NEXT button.
The unit searches in the reverse or forward direction for the next clip with chapters, beginning with the previous or next clip.
Using essence marks to find scenes
See page 112 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip playback screen or the clip thumbnail screen, press the
115
THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK button with the SHIFT button held down.
The Select Essence Mark screen appears.
The names of essence marks that are not recorded on the disc are displayed in gray.
Select Essence Mark
Shot Mark1
Shot Mark2
Rec Start
Cut
Others
If planning metadata with user-defined essence mark has been loaded
You can select user-defined essence marks
2
Select the essence mark that you want, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The essence mark thumbnail screen
displays a list of frames where the selected essence mark is set.
To switch directly to the Rec Start essence mark thumbnail screen
Before starting, set FIND MODE in the
ESSENCE MARK page of the MAINTENANCE menu to “R.ST”.
When the Rec Start essence mark thumbnail screen is displayed, each press of the
THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK button switches between that screen and the clip playback screen (Resume function). This setting allows you to use the THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE
MARK button as a shortcut to Rec Start essence mark thumbnail screen, which is convenient for checking start points in clip recorded with the
Clip Continuous Rec function.
To return to the clip thumbnail screen from the
Rec Start essence mark thumbnail screen, press the RESET/RETURN button.
In the clip playback screen, the PREV and NEXT buttons jump to the previous or next recording start points.
Playing the scene you have found
After finding a clip with one of the methods
explained in the previous section, “Searching with thumbnails” (page 114) , you can cue up and
play the clip that you have found.
To search for a thumbnail position and cue it up
See page 112 for more information about GUI screen
operations.
1
Select the thumbnail that you want to cue up.
Clip: C0010 010/041
OK
TC 00:23:00:25 TC 00:23:40:07 TC 00:24:45:11 TC 00:25:06:14
TC 00:25:49:23 TC 00:26:22:10 TC 00:27:19:04 TC 00:27:51:09
TC 00:28:06:09 TC 00:28:22:02 TC 00:23:34:18 TC 00:23:54:22
DATE&TIME 30 NOV 2005 13:40 DUR 0:00:04:14
2
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
To play clips with the SET/S.SEL button
In the Disc Menu, set Settings >SET Key on
Thumbnail to “Cue up & Play”. Play begins from the selected frame when you press the SET/S.SEL button, in the same way as when you press the
PLAY/PAUSE button.
To search for a thumbnail position and play from there
See page 112 for more information about GUI screen
operations.
1
Select the thumbnail that you want to play.
116
2
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
Selecting clips by type (Filter
Clips function)
You can select clips of a certain type from among all of the clips on a disc (Filter Clips function).
For example, you can do the following.
• Select clips in a certain video format from a disc that contains clips in different video formats.
• Select clips that have been set “NG” as a clip flag, and delete all of those clips in one operation.
• Select only clips that have been recorded on the basis of a specified planning metadata entry, and transfer those clips to an external device using the Direct FTP function
.
To filter clips
See page 112 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
Display the clip thumbnail screen.
2
If you want to select clips by video format, select the thumbnails of clips in that format.
3
Display the Thumbnail menu.
4
Select “Filter Clips”, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The Filter Clips screen appears.
5
Select the clip filtering condition.
Item name
Clip Flag: OK
Clip Flag: NG
Clip Flag:
KP(KEEP)
Clip Flag: none
Current Planning
Metadata
Filtering condition
Clip flag set in the clip
(OK/NG/KP(KEEP)/ none)
Clips that have been recorded according to the instructions in the currently loaded planning metadata
Video format of the selected clips
AV Format of
Selected Clip
6
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
A filter thumbnail screen appears, showing only clips that meet the specified condition.
The filtering condition appears at the lower left of the screen.
7
If you want to filter the clips again with a different filtering condition (to narrow down the filtering results), repeat steps 2 to 6. (The command name selected in step 4 changes to Filter
Clips(Narrowing).)
To play selected clips continuously
Register all of the filtered clips in an automatically generated clip list, and play the clip list.
1
Display the Thumbnail Menu in the filter thumbnail screen.
2
Select “Copy to Clip List”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
A clip list thumbnail screen appears, showing filtered clips that have been registered in the clip list.
117
3
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The screen changes to the clip playback screen, and playback starts.
Operations on filtering results
You can use the Thumbnail Menu in the filter thumbnail screen to perform the following operations.
Item name
Clip Information
Function
Select the information to be displayed at the bottom of the thumbnails.
Lock all of the filtered clips.
Lock or Delete All
Filtered Clips >Lock
All Filtered Clips
Lock or Delete All
Filtered Clips
>Unlock All Filtered
Clips
Lock or Delete All
Filtered Clips >Delete
All Filtered Clips
Unlock all of the filtered clips.
Delete all of the filtered clips.
Filter
Clips(Narrowing)
Copy to Clip List
Upload Clips via
Direct FTP
Narrow down the filtering results.
Copy all of the filtered clips to a new clip list.
Transfer all of the filtered clips to an external device via a network.
To display clip filtering conditions as Title2 titles
For clip lists created with the Copy to Clip List command, you can display the clip filtering conditions as Title2 titles.
When Settings >Display Title in the Disc Menu is set to “On: Title2 {title2}”, the clip filtering conditions are displayed automatically in screens such as the Load Clip List screen.
Selecting the information displayed on thumbnails
You can select the information to be displayed at the bottom of the thumbnails in thumbnail screens.
See page 112 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
Display the Thumbnail Menu in the clip thumbnail screen.
2
Select Clip Information.
A window appears in which you can select the information to display.
Th u m b n a il Men u
Clip Inform a tion
Ret u rn to Upper Men u
D a te
Time Code
D u r a tion
S e qu ence N u m b er
3
Select the items that you want to display.
Return to Upper Menu: Returns to the
Thumbnail Menu
Date: Date and time of creation, or date and time of the more recent modification
Time Code: Timecode of first frame
Duration: Playback time
Sequence Number: Thumbnail sequence number
The selected information will appear at the bottom of the thumbnails when you display a thumbnail screen.
Changing clip index pictures
The clip thumbnail screen displays thumbnails as index pictures for clips. Normally the index picture is the first frame in a clip, but you can set any frame in the clip as the index picture.
Note
You can only change index pictures from the clip thumbnail screen. The thumbnails shown in the clip list thumbnail screen, the expand thumbnail screen, and the chapter thumbnail screen cannot be changed.
118
To select a clip index picture while viewing the video
See page 112 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail of the clip whose index picture you want to change.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Select Index Picture.
Select Index screen appears.
Select Index: "Navigating sibling relati..." 018/036
TCR 01:09:16:13 OK
Cancel
You can play and search with this screen.
4
Use the PLAY/PAUSE button or F
REV/F FWD buttons to display the frame you want.
You can also perform a jog operation by turning the MENU knob.
5
Press the up-arrow button to select OK, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
To select index pictures by using the expand and chapter functions
After using the expand function (see page 114)
or chapter function
(see page 115) to find a frame,
you can set that frame as the index picture of the clip.
The following example explains how to do so from the expand thumbnail screen.
See page 112 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the expand thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail to set as the index picture.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Set Index Picture.
A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to set the current frame as the index picture.
Expand 001/012
TC 00:01:35:17
TC 00:01:37:11
TC 00:01:38:00
Set Index Picture
TC 00:01:36:14
OK
Cancel
TC 00:01:37:24 TC 00:01:38:08
TC 00:01:36:27
TC 00:01:38:22
TC 00:01:39:06 TC 00:01:38:19
CLIP Tene
TC 00:01:40:02 TC 00:01:40:16
DUR 0:00:00:13
4
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
After pressing the RESET/RETURN button to return to the clip thumbnail screen, check to make sure that the newly selected frame is displayed as the index picture.
Checking clip properties
You can check clip properties such as the title, timecode, duration, date and time of creation, and date and time of the more recent modification.
See page 112 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
Display the Thumbnail Menu in the clip thumbnail screen.
2
Select Clip Properties.
The Clip Properties screen appears.
Clip No.: Clip number/total number of clips
Name: Clip name
1)
Title1: Title 1
Title2: Title 2
1)
AV Format: Recording format
Frame Rate: The frame rate from the time when the clip was shot. For clips shot using Slow & Quick Motion, PB/
Capture, where PB is the playback frame rate and Capture is the shooting frame rate.
119
TC/DUR: Timecode of the first frame/
Recording time
Created: Date and time of creation
Modified: Date and time of most recent modification
Rec Device: Name of device that created clip
(product number)
1) Titles can be displayed in European languages
when the area of use (see page 37) is set to
“NTSC AREA” or “PAL AREA”.
To scroll hidden parts of the string into view
When a B or b mark is displayed for an item, you can press the left or right arrow button to scroll the display by one character for each press.
The up and down arrow buttons scroll the beginning and end of the string into view.
To display the properties of the previous or the next clip
Press the PREV button or the NEXT button.
To return to the clip thumbnail screen
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
To edit clip information
You can edit the name,
1)
title 1, and title 2 of a clip by using a software keyboard.
1) The NAMING FORM item on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu must be set to FREE
.
Notes
• The only characters that can be entered are the alphanumeric characters and symbols that appear on the software keyboard, and characters in the fonts supported by this version of the unit’s firmware.
Japanese kanji cannot be entered.
• Names and titles must be within the specified character length limits.
• Some symbols cannot be used in clip names. The keys for those symbols are disabled when you are editing a clip name.
See page 112 for more information about GUI
screen operations.
1
In the Clip Properties screen, turn the
MENU knob to select the item you want to edit (Name, Title1
1)
, or Title2).
1) Only ASCII characters can be used for Title1.
2
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
An input screen appears for the selected item.
(A keyboard appears that corresponds to the font selected with Disc Menu item Settings
>Select Font if the area of use setting is
NTSC AREA or PAL AREA. A Japanese keyboard appears if the area of use setting is
NTSC(J)AREA.)
3
Edit the string in the edit box.
To enter characters
Use the arrow buttons or turn the MENU knob to select a key, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
Functions of special keys
Key
B , b
Function
Move the cursor one character forward or back.
,
Back Space Deletes the character in front of the cursor.
CapsLock
Move the cursor to Home or
End position.
Turns the Shift key on permanently (until pressed again), and enables input of capital letters and symbols.
F Shift Enables input of capital letters and symbols. Turns off after entry of one character.
4
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
You return to the Clip Properties screen, and the results of the editing are reflected in the clip information.
To enter text using a USB keyboard or USB mouse
You can connect a Windows USB keyboard or a
Windows USB mouse to the USB connector
, and use them together with the software keyboard to enter text.
Connect a Japanese keyboard if the area of use has been set to NTSC(J)AREA.
2)
120
Connect a keyboard that corresponds to the font selected with Disc Menu item Settings >Select
Font if the area of use has been set to NTSC
AREA or PAL AREA.
1) Some USB keyboards or USB mice may not be recognized. In this case, the message “Unknown
USB” appears.
2) Only ASCII characters can be entered from a Japanese keyboard.
To change the display language (font) for clip names, clip list names, and title2 clip titles:
Select one of the following languages (fonts) with the Disc menu item Settings >Select
Font.
• European Alphabet: The keyboard language can be selected with the Disc
Menu item Settings >USB Keyboard
Language (see following section) .
• Korean: The Korean keyboard is selected automatically. You can enter Hangul characters if you have connected a Korean
USB keyboard.
• Simplified Chinese: The keyboard layout is identical to that of the English [United
States] keyboard. Only ASCII characters can be entered.
• Traditional Chinese: The keyboard layout is identical to that of the English [United
States] keyboard. Only ASCII characters can be entered.
To change the keyboard language: In the Disc
Menu, select Settings >Select USB
Keyboard Language and then select the desired keyboard from among the following.
• English [United Kingdom]
• English [United States]
• French [France]
• German [Germany]
• Italian [Italy]
• Polish (Programmers) [Poland]
• Russian [Russia]
• Spanish [Spain]
See “List of Supported USB Keyboards” (page 262)
for the characters that can be entered on the various language keyboards.
Note
The keyboard language cannot be changed in the following cases.
• When the area of use is set to NTSC(J)AREA.
• When the area of use is set to NTSC AREA or PAL
AREA, and the Disc Menu item Settings >Select Font is set to Korean, Simplified Chinese, or Traditional
Chinese.
The keyboard icon on the software keyboard is highlighted when a USB keyboard has been recognized and enabled for use with this unit, and the mouse icon is highlighted and a mouse pointer appears when a USB mouse has been enabled.
Notes
• Use the proper keyboard for the area of use. Some characters may not be entered correctly if you use a keyboard designed for use in another area.
• It is not possible to enter Japanese, even on a Japanese keyboard.
USB keyboard special functions keys
In addition to the special function keys of the software keyboard, you can use the following special function keys on a USB keyboard.
Key
R , r
Esc
Tab
Function
When the cursor is in an edit box:
Move the cursor to the start or end.
When “OK” or “Cancel” has the focus: Moves the focus between
“OK” and “Cancel”.
Deletes the character after the cursor.
Delete
Shift + T ,
Shift + t
Ctrl + C,
X, V, A, Z
Selects the string before or after the cursor.
Ctrl + C:
Ctrl + X:
Copies the selected string.
Cuts the selected string.
Ctrl + V: Pastes a copied or cut string.
Ctrl + A: Selects the entire string.
Ctrl + Z: Undoes the immediately preceding operation.
Enter When the cursor is in an edit box:
Moves the focus to “OK”.
When “OK” or “Cancel” has the focus: Exits the software keyboard.
When the cursor is in an edit box, moves the focus to “Cancel”.
Moves the focus between “OK” and
“Cancel”.
121
USB mouse functions
You can use the mouse to move the cursor on the software keyboard. You can also left click on a key to enter the character for that key.
To change the speed of the mouse pointer: In the Disc Menu, select Settings >Select
Mouse Pointer Speed and then select the desired speed. Adjust according to the selected mouse.
To exit the software keyboard from a USB keyboard
1
With the cursor in an edit box, press the
Enter key to move the focus to “OK”.
2
Do one of the following.
To confirm the edit and then exit the software keyboard: While “OK” is selected, press the Enter key.
To discard the edit and then exit the software keyboard: On the USB keyboard, press the r key or the Tab key to move to “Cancel”, and then press the
Enter key.
To continue editing: Press any key except the Enter key, the Esc key, and the Tab key.
Setting clip flags
You can set three types of clip flags (OK/NG/KP
(KEEP)) during recording or playback. Setting these flags in each clip that you record makes it easy for editors and other colleagues to find and select the clips they need.
See page 112 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail of the clip where you want to set a flag.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select “Set Clip Flag”.
The clip flag setting screen appears.
Thumbnail Menu
Set Clip Flag
OK
Return to Upper Menu
NG
KP (KEEP) none
4
Select the clip flag that you want to set
(OK/NG/KP (KEEP)).
A clip flag icon
appears for clips that have clip flags set.
To clear clip flags
Carry out steps 1 to 3 , selecting a clip that has a flag set, and then select “none” in step 4 .
You can also use switches to set and clear clip flags.
For details, see “Setting clip flags with switches”
Locking (write-protecting) clips
In a clip thumbnail screen, you can lock the selected clips so that they cannot be deleted or altered.
Locking prevents the following operations on clips.
• Deletion
• Renaming by FTP
• Changing the index picture
• Adding and deleting shot marks
• Setting and clearing clip flags
Notes
• Locked clips are deleted along with other clips when a disc is formatted.
• Clips cannot be locked or unlocked when the Write
Inhibit tab of the disc is set to the recording disabled position.
To lock clips
See page 112 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the thumbnails of the clips that you want to lock.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
122
3
Select Lock/Unlock Clip.
4
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
A lock icon
thumbnail of the locked clips.
In step 1 , you can also perform a shortcut operation by pressing the STOP button with the
SHIFT button held down.
To lock all clips
1
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select Lock or Delete All Clips, and then select Lock All Clips.
A message appears asking you to confirm locking all clips.
3
Select OK to lock all clips or Cancel to cancel it, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
To unlock a specific clip
See page 112 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail of the clip that you want to unlock.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Lock/Unlock Clip.
A message appears asking you to confirm the unlocking.
Clip List: E0001 002/013
TC 00:00:00:00
TC 00:00:28:08
C0004
Unlock this Clip?
TC 00:00:35:15
TC 00:00:12:04 TC 00:00:20:13
OK
TC 00:00:53:22
TC 00:00:59:16 TC 00:01:06:18
DATE&TIME 28 JUL 2006 19:55
TC 00:01:13:11
TOTAL DUR
TC 00:01:17:27
00:01:31:16
4
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
In step 1 , you can also perform a shortcut operation by pressing the STOP button with the
SHIFT button held down.
To unlock all clips
1
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select Lock or Delete All Clips, and then select Unlock All Clips.
A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to unlock all clips.
3
Select OK to execute the unlock, or
Cancel to cancel it, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
Deleting clips
You can delete clips while checking their contents.
Notes
• Clips cannot be deleted when the Write Inhibit tab of the disc is set to the recording disabled position.
• Locked clips cannot be deleted.
• If a deletion target clips is referenced by clip lists on the disc, all of those clip lists are deleted as well.
• If a deletion target clip is referenced in the current clip list, only those referencing sub clips are deleted at the same time as the deletion target clip.
See page 112 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail of the clip that you want to delete.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Delete Clip.
A window appears asking you to confirm the deletion. The window displays thumbnails of four frames from the target clip (the first frame, two intermediate frames, and the last frame), along with the name, title 1, date of creation, and duration of the clip.
One of the following messages also appears, depending on whether the clip is referenced in a clip list.
When the clip is not referenced in a clip list: “Delete Clip”
When the clip is referenced in a clip list:
“Delete Clip & Clip List” (All clip lists that reference the target clip are deleted along with the clip.)
123
Scene Selection (Clip
List Editing)
4
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The selected clip is deleted, and you return to the clip thumbnail screen.
In step 1 , you can also perform a shortcut operation by pressing the RESET/RETURN button with the SHIFT button held down.
To delete all clips
1
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select Lock or Delete All Clips, and then select Delete All Clips.
A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete all clips.
3
Select OK to execute the deletion, or
Cancel to cancel it, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
Note
Locked clips cannot be deleted.
What is scene selection?
Scene selection is a function which allows you to select material (clips) from the material recorded on a disc and perform cut editing. You can do this by operating on this unit only.
• Scene selection is a convenient way to perform cut editing in the field and in other offline situations.
• In scene selection you create a clip list (editing data). Since the material itself is not affected, you can repeat this any number of times.
• You can play back the edit list created by scene selection on this unit.
• In scene selection you can add whole clips or add parts of a clip. You can add scenes using chapters, change the playback sequence, and amend or delete In and Out points. All of these operations can be carried out easily on this unit.
• Clip lists (editing data) created with the scene selection function can be used on XPRI and other full-feature nonlinear editing systems.
Clips
Material recorded with this unit is managed in units called clips. A clip contains the material from a recording start point to a recording end point.
Clips have numbers beginning with C, for example C0001.
Recording start point of clip 2
Recording end point of clip 2
Clip 1
(C0001)
Clip 2
(C0002)
Clip 3
(C0003)
Clip 4
(C0004)
You can also assign titles to your clips and use the titles to manage them, instead of the clip numbers.
For more information, see “Assigning user-defined clip titles automatically” (page 89).
124
Clip lists
You can use the scene selection function to select clips from the clips saved on a disc and create a cut edit list called a “clip list”.
Clip lists have numbers beginning with E, for example E0001. Up to 99 clip lists can be saved on a disc.
Sub clips (clips in clip lists)
Clips (or parts of clips) that have been added to a clip list are called “sub clips”. Sub clips are virtual editing data that specify ranges in the original clips. You can use them without modifying the original data.
The following figure illustrates the relation between clips and sub clips.
Clips on disc
Clip 1
(C0001)
Clip 2
(C0002)
Clip 3
(C0003)
Clip 4
(C0004)
Clip list
(E0001) Sub clip 1 Sub clip 2 Sub clip 3
In the above example, the whole of clip 2 has been added as sub clip 1, and the whole of clip 4 has been added as sub clip 2.
Sub clip 3 is part of clip 3. Therefore, when clip list E0001 is played back, clip 4 is played after clip 2, and then the part of clip 3 shown in gray color is played.
Clip list editing (current clip list)
To edit a clip list, you need to load the clip list from the disc into the unit’s internal memory.
The clip list which is currently loaded into the unit memory is called the “current clip list”.
The current clip list is always the target of sub clip creation and editing. Clip list playback also uses the current clip list.
After creating and editing a clip list, you need to save it to disc.
Unit memory
Current clip list can be edited
(adding, deleting, and reordering sub clips) t Clip list playback and thumbnail display
SAVE m M LOAD
Disc
C0001 (Clip 1)
C0002 (Clip 2)
C0003 (Clip 3)
:
:
E0001 (Clip list 1)
E0002 (Clip list 2)
E0003 (Clip list 3)
:
:
E0099 (Clip list 99)
Clip list playback
Clips and clip lists are saved together on a disc.
To play a clip list, insert a disc into the unit, load the clip list that you want to play, and press the
PLAY/PAUSE button.
Clips are played according to the data in the clip list.
Creating and editing clip lists
The following table lists the steps in the creation and editing of clip lists with the scene selection function.
To create a clip list, you always need to carry out the steps inside the heavy lines. Other steps can be carried out as required.
1 Add sub clips: Use the Add Sub Clips command to add the clips you want to use to a clip list. You can add up to
300 sub clips to one clip list.This operation can be carried out in the following thumbnail screens.
• Clip thumbnail screen
• Expand thumbnail screen
• Chapter thumbnail screen
• Clip list thumbnail screen
125
2
3
4
Change the sub clip order: Use the
Move Sub Clips command to change the order of sub clips in a clip list.
Delete sub clips: Use the Delete Sub
Clips command to delete specified sub clips from a clip list.
Trim sub clips: Use the Trim Sub Clip command to adjust the In and Out points of a sub clip. This function can also be used to adjust the overall duration of the clip list.
Set the start timecode: Use the Set
Start Time Code command to set the timecode at the start of a clip list.
Play the clip list: Use the PLAY/
PAUSE button and other playback controls to play the current clip list and check its contents.
Save the clip list: Use the Save Clip List or Save Clip List as… command to save the newly created clip list to the disc.
To reedit clip lists on the disc
Use the Load Clip List command to load the clip lists you want to edit, and perform the steps 2 to
4 in the previous section.
You can also delete clip lists on the disc.
For details, see “Managing clip lists” (page 130).
Note
Clip lists can be created and edited even when the Write
Inhibit tab of the disc is set to recording disabled.
However, if you need to save the clip list, set Write
Inhibit tab to enable recording before you create or edit the clip list.
To add sub clips
You can add sub clips to clip lists from with the clip thumbnail screen or the clip list thumbnail screen. However, you must use the clip list thumbnail screen to edit clip lists.
Adding sub clips from the clip thumbnail screen
The following procedure explains operations in the clip thumbnail screen. You can proceed in the same way in the expand thumbnail screen and the chapter thumbnail screen. Expanded blocks are added as sub clips in the expand thumbnail screen, and chapters are added as sub clips in the chapter thumbnail screen.
See page 112 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
126
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the clip that you want to add as a sub clip
(multiple selections possible).
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Add Sub Clips, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The Add Sub Clip screen appears.
The clip(s) selected in step 1 appear in the upper part of this screen, and the clip list appears in the lower Scene Selection window. The I cursor in the Scene Selection window indicates the location where the currently selected sub clip(s) will be inserted.
Add Sub Clip 002 017/0 3 5
TC 00: 3 0:25:11 TC 00: 3 0:40:1 3 TC 01:01:2 8 :25 TC 00:09:4 3 :14
TC 00:24:24:29
S cene S election
TC 00:24: 3 4:27 TC 00:24:46:22 TC 00:24:56:24
TOTAL
00:1 3 :4 8 :24
To display the total duration after addition of the selected clip
Press the SHIFT button.
4
In the Scene Selection window, move the I cursor to the location where you want to insert the clip. (The existing thumbnails arrange themselves to the left and right of the I cursor.)
5
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
The selected clip is inserted as a subclip and a “+” mark appears on the thumbnail in the
Scene Selection window.
To check the addition results
Move the cursor.
6
Press the RESET/RETURN button.
This returns you to the clip thumbnail screen.
7
Repeat steps 1 to 6 as required to add more clips.
8
Save the clip list (see page 129)
.
In step 1 , you can hold down the SHIFT button when you press the SET/S.SEL button. This is a shortcut that displays the Add Sub Clip screen
immediately. You can also save the clip list immediately in step 5 by executing the Save Clip
List command in the Disc Menu.
Adding sub clips from the clip list thumbnail screen
See page 112 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
2
Select Add Sub Clips, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The Clip List (Add) screen appears.
Clip List (Add) 002 017/035
TC 00:30:25:11 TC 00:30:40:13 TC 01:01:28:25 TC 00:09:43:14
TC 00:24:24:29
Scene Selection
TC 00:24:34:27 TC 00:24:46:22 TC 00:24:56:24
TOTAL
00:13:48:24
3
Select the sub clips that you want to add from the upper part of the screen (the part where 8 thumbnails are displayed, multiple selections possible).
To select from expanded thumbnails
Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to display the expand thumbnail screen.
To select from chapter thumbnails
Press the HOLD/CHAPTER button to display the chapter thumbnail screen.
4
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
The thumbnail selection is confirmed, and an
I cursor appears at the bottom of the Clip List
(Add) screen (in the Scene Selection window). The I cursor indicates the location where the currently selected sub clips will be inserted.
To display the total duration after addition of the selected clips
Press the SHIFT button.
5
In the Scene Selection window, move the I cursor to the location where you want to insert the clip. (The existing thumbnails arrange themselves to the left and right of the I cursor.)
6
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
The sub clips are added at the I cursor position, and you return to the clip list thumbnail screen.
You can check the results of the addition in that screen.
7
Repeat steps 1 to 6 as required to add more clips.
8
Save the clip list (see page 129)
.
In step 1 , you can also perform a shortcut operation by pressing the SET/S.SEL button with the SHIFT button held down.
To reorder sub clips
See page 112 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, select the thumbnails of the sub clips that you want to move (multiple selections possible).
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Move Sub Clips, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The Clip List (Move) screen appears.
Clip List (Move) 006 001/034
TC 00:00:00:00 TC 00:00:21:27 TC 00:04:06:00 TC 00:04:13:14
TC 00:04:35:12 TC 00:04:57:10 TC 00:05:19:08 TC 00:05:41:05
TC 00:06:03:03
DATE&TIME
TC 00:06:25:00
08 AUG 2007 11:50
TC 00:06:46:27
TOTAL DUR
TC 00:07:08:25
00:13:48:24
4
Move the I cursor to the point where you want to move the selected thumbnails.
5
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
The sub clips are moved to the I cursor position.
6
Repeat steps 1 to 5 as required.
127
7
Save the clip list (see page 129)
.
To adjust the In and Out points of sub clips (trim)
Proceed as follows to define the range of a scene by changing the positions of the In and Out points.
See page 112 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, select a thumbnail.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Trim Sub Clip, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The Clip List (Trim) screen appears.
Clip List (Trim) 001/034
TCR 01:17:33:08
CLIP
019/035
Total
DUR
00:13:48:24
00:00:21:27
IN
01:17:33:08
OUT
01:17:55:05
OK
Cancel
Like the clip playback screen, this screen allows you to play and search all clips on the disc.
To display a list of In and Out point operations that you can perform
Press the MENU button.
4
When you find the point that you want to make the start point, select “IN” and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
The timecode of the new In point appears in the timecode display, and the Total (total duration) and DUR (clip duration) displays are updated.
5
When you find the point that you want to make the end point, select “OUT” and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The timecode of the new Out point appears in the timecode display, and the Total (total duration) and DUR (clip duration) displays are updated.
To cue up the In point or Out point
Display the Thumbnail Menu, select Cue up
Inpoint or Cue up Outpoint, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
To cancel the In point or Out point setting
Display the Thumbnail Menu, select Reset
Inpoint or Reset Outpoint, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The In point or Out point setting returns to the previous value.
6
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
7
Repeat steps 1 to 6 as required.
8
Save the clip list (see page 129)
.
To delete sub clips
See page 112 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
Select the clips to delete in the clip list thumbnail screen (multiple selections possible).
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Delete Sub Clips, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
A message appears asking you to confirm the deletion.
4
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
5
Repeat steps 1 to 4 as required.
6
Save the clip list (see page 129)
.
To play the clip list
Note
When this unit is in single clip playback mode
, only the selected sub clip can be played.
See page 112 for more information about GUI screen
operations.
128
To play using GUI screens
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, select the thumbnail of the sub clip where you want to start play.
To start play from the start of the clip list
Select the thumbnail of the first sub clip.
2
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
To play using the clip list playback screen
1
Display the clip list playback screen.
2
Press the PREV button or the NEXT button to display the sub clip that you want to play.
To start play from the first sub clip
Press the SHIFT + PREV buttons to move to the start of the clip list.
3
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
To change the starting timecode of clip lists
The timecode of clip lists is continuous timecode, unrelated to the timecode of the original clips. By default the timecode (LTC) of the start of the clip list is 00:00:00:00, but it can be set to any value.
See page 112 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display the Thumbnail Menu.
2
Select Set Start Time Code, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
The Set Start Time Code screen appears.
Set Start Time Code
TC 2 2 : 3 4 . 5 6 : 1 7
H M I N S E C F R M
Preset TC 00:00:00:00 OK
Cancel
3
Press the left- or right-arrow button to select the digit that you want to change.
4
Turn the MENU knob to change the value of the digit.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required.
To reset the timecode to 00:00:00:00
Select Reset to Zero in the Thumbnail Menu, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
To preset the frequently used timecode
Select Save Preset TC in the Thumbnail
Menu, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The timecode set in steps 3 and 4 is saved as a preset value.
To recall the preset timecode
Select Recall Preset TC in the Thumbnail
Menu, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
6
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
OK is selected.
7
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob again.
8
Save the clip list (see page 129)
.
To save clip lists
To save under a specified name
See page 112 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display the Disc Menu.
2
Select Save Clip List as..., and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
A list of clip lists appears.
Disc Menu
Save Clip List
DVD og BI...
Name & Date/Sorted by Name
08 AUG2007 11:50
E0003
E0004
E0005
E0006
03 AUG2007 17:51
03 AUG2007 17:51
03 AUG2007 17:51
03 AUG2007 17:51
E0007
E0095
E0098
03 AUG2007 17:51
18 MAY2006 10:25
13 JUN2006 13:43
Display Select
To switch the information displayed for clip lists
Press the right-arrow button.
129
With each press, the display changes in the order: “Name & Date” t “Name & Title” t “Name & Short Date” t ...
To sort clip lists
Select one of the following orders by selecting Settings > Sort Clip List By... in the
Disc Menu.
Name(A-Z): Sort in ascending order by clip list name.
Date(Newest First): Sort by date and time of clip list creation, newest first.
3
Select the desired clip list name, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
To save under the same name
The following procedure saves the current clip list under its current name (the name that appears in the clip list thumbnail screen).
See page 112 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display the Disc Menu
2
Select Save Clip List, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The clip list is saved. However, Save Clip
List as... is executed when the name displayed in the clip list thumbnail screen is
“no name”.
Note
If you press the EJECT button before saving a new or edited clip list, a message appears asking if you want to discard your changes and continue. Follow the instructions in the message to continue or cancel the operation.
Managing clip lists
To load clip lists
The following procedure loads a clip list stored on the disc into the unit’s internal memory as the current clip list.
See page 112 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display the Disc Menu.
2
Select Load Clip List, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
A list of clip lists stored on the disc appears.
Disc Menu
Load Clip List
DVD og BI...
Name & Date/Sorted by Name
08 AUG2007 11:50
E0003
E0004
E0005
E0006
03 AUG2007 17:51
03 AUG2007 17:51
03 AUG2007 17:51
03 AUG2007 17:51
E0007
E0095
E0098
03 AUG2007 17:51
18 MAY2006 10:25
13 JUN2006 13:43
Display Select
3
Select the desired clip list, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
The name of the clip list selected here appears in the clip list thumbnail screen.
When you execute the Save Clip List command in the Disc Menu, the clip list will be saved under that name.
To create a new clip list
Select New File and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
To clear clip lists
The following procedure clears the current clip list from the unit’s internal memory.
See page 112 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display the Disc Menu.
2
Select Clear Clip List, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to clear the clip list.
3
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The current clip list returns to the unnamed state “(no name)”.
To delete clip lists
The following procedure deletes a clip list from the disc.
See page 112 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
130
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display the Disc Menu.
2
Select Delete Clip List, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
A list of clip lists appears.
3
Select the clip list that you want to delete, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
A message appears asking you to confirm the deletion.
Delete Clip List
E0001
Delete this Clip List?
OK
Cancel
Disc Operations
Checking disc properties
See page 112 for more information about GUI screen
operations.
1
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select Disc Properties, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The Disc Properties screen appears.
4
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
To sort clip lists
See page 112 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display the Disc Menu.
2
Select Settings, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
3
Select Sort Clip List by..., and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
4
Select one of the following sort methods, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
Name(A-Z): Sort in ascending order by clip list name.
Date(Newest First): Sort by date and time of clip list creation, newest first.
Clip lists will be displayed in the specified order the next time that you carry out an operation such as loading a clip list.
User Disc ID: User disc ID
Title1: Title 1
Title2: Title 2
1)
Total DUR: Total recording time
Remain: Remaining recording time
Rewrite: Number of times rewritten
1) Titles can be displayed in European languages
when the area of use (see page 37) is set to
“NTSC AREA” or “PAL AREA”.
To scroll hidden parts of the string into view
When a B or b mark is displayed for an item, you can press the left or right arrow button to scroll the display by one character for each press.
The up and down arrow buttons scroll the beginning and end of the string into view.
To return to the previous screen
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
To edit disc information
You can edit the user disc ID, title 1
1)
, and title 2 by using a software keyboard.
1) Only ASCII characters can be used for the title 1.
131
See “To edit clip information” (page 120) for
information about operations.
Using planning metadata
Planning metadata is a file that contains metadata about the clips to be shot and recorded.
To use planning metadata, you will need to save a file in advance in the specified location of a media, and insert the media into this unit.
For details, see “To set clip names by using planning metadata” (page 94).
To load planning metadata files
See page 112 for more information about GUI
screen operations.
1
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select “Load Planning Metadata/Select
Drive”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
A media selection screen appears.
Disc Menu
Load Planning Metadata/Select Drive
Return to Upper Menu
Professional Disc
USB Flash Drive
3
Select the media where your planning metadata file is stored, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
A list of the planning metadata files stored on the media appears.
Disc Menu
Load Planning Metadata/
PM_001_sample
PM_002_sample
PM_003_sample
PM_004_sample
Professional Disc
04 AUG 10:39
04 AUG 10:39
04 AUG 10:39
04 AUG 10:39
Name &Date/ Sorted by Name
Notes
• If MEMORY REC on the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION menu is set to ENABL, it is not possible to load planning data from a USB flash drive that is write inhibited. Set MEMORY
REC to DSABL before starting, or enable recording on the USB flash drive and connect it again.
• If the message “USB M. INHI” appears when you connect a USB flash drive, disconnect the drive, enable recording on the USB flash drive, and then connect it again.
• Depending on the type of USB flash drive, data may not appear if you attempt to read planning metadata immediately after connecting the USB flash drive. In this case, connect the USB flash drive again, or exit the menu and try again. The data will then appear correctly.
4
Select the desired planning metadata file, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The selected planning metadata file is loaded into the unit’s memory, and the Planning
Metadata Properties screen appears.
5
Check the information that appears, and press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
By connecting this unit and a computer over a network, you can read planning metadata using a
web browser. For details, see “To use a web browser to load planning metadata” (page 136).
To sort planning metadata
You can sort planning metadata by operating in the same way as in
“To sort clip lists” (page 131)
.
However, in step 3 , select “Sort Planning
Metadata by...”.
The planning metadata will be displayed in the specified order the next time you load planning metadata.
To check planning metadata properties
You can check the properties of the planning metadata that is loaded into this unit’s memory, including the date and time of creation and the clip titles.
See page 112 for more information about GUI
screen operations.
1
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select “Planning Metadata Properties”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The Planning Metadata Properties screen appears.
132
File Name: Planning metadata file name
Assign ID: Assign ID
Created: Date and time of creation
Modified: Date and time of most recent modification
Modified by: Name of person who modified the file
Title1: Title 1
1)
Title2: Title 2
Material Gp: Number of clips recorded with this planning metadata
1) This can be set as the clip name (see page 94) .
To scroll hidden parts of the string into view
When a B or b mark is displayed for an item, you can press the left or right arrow button to scroll the display by one character for each press.
The up and down arrow buttons scroll the beginning and end of the string into view.
To return to the previous screen
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
To change the serial numbers of clip names using planning metadata
You can change the serial numbers that are added to clip names that use planning metadata.
See page 112 for more information about GUI
screen operations.
1
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select Planning Clip Name Suffix
(change the serial number added to clip names created by using planning metadata), and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or MENU knob.
The Planning Clip Name Suffix screen appears.
3
Press the left- or right-arrow button to select a digit to change.
4
Press the up- or down-arrow button, or turn the MENU knob to change the digit.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required.
6
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
“OK” is selected.
7
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
To clear planning metadata
See page 112 for more information about GUI
screen operations.
1
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select “Clear Planning Metadata”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to clear the planning metadata.
3
Select “OK”, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The planning metadata is cleared from this unit’s memory.
To switch the title display in the LCD monitor and viewfinder
When planning metadata is loaded into this unit, you can select the format of the title to display in the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
See page 112 for more information about GUI
screen operations.
1
Display the Disc Menu.
133
2
Select “Settings”, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
3
Select “Planning Clip Name in Clip
Info. Area”, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
See page 28 for more information about the
Clip Info. Area.
4
Select one of the following, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
ASCII Clip Name: Display the ASCII format title
Clip Name: Display the UTF-8 format title
To display clip names in the clip information area in the viewfinder
1
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select “Settings”, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
3
Select “Planning Clip Name Display”
(whether to display the clip name in the viewfinder screen), and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
4
Select “Enable”, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
Clip information is always shown in the warning indicator area of the LCD monitor if the LCD monitor is set to status display.
Checking user-defined essence marks
You can display the names of user-defined Shot
Mark0 to Shot Mark9 essence marks in planning metadata (UTF-8 format, maximum 32 bytes).
1
Display the Planning Metadata
Properties screen
for the planning metadata loaded into this unit.
The , button is enabled when the planning metadata contains user-defined essence
2
Press , , and then turn the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The User Defined Essence Marks screen appears.
Formatting discs
See page 112 for more information about GUI screen
operations.
1
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select Format Disc, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
A message appears asking you to confirm the format.
Format Disc
All Clips, Clip Lists and
Non-AV Data (General Files) will be Deleted.
Format OK?
OK
Cancel
3
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
To cancel the format
Select Cancel, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
To continue by formatting another disc
Exchange the disc, select OK, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
To exit the formatting screen
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob with Exit selected.
To disable the Format Disc command
To prevent inadvertent disc formatting, resulting in the loss of recorded data, you can disable the
Format Disc command.
See page 112 for more information about GUI
screen operations.
134
1
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select “Settings”, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
3
Select “Setting Format Disc”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
4
Select “Disable”, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
Displaying disc and clip properties in a web browser
By connecting this unit and a computer over a network, you can display disc properties and clip properties in a web browser installed on the computer (Web Thumbnail function).
The Clip Properties page also allows you to download high-resolution clip data, proxy AV data, and metadata from this unit and to save that data on your computer. The Planning Metadata page allows you to load planning metadata directly into the memory of this unit.
Recommended browsers
The following browsers are recommended.
• Internet Explorer 8
1)
• Internet Explorer 9
1)
1) This function may not work properly in 32-bit versions of Internet Explorer if you are using a 64-bit version of Microsoft Windows. You should use a 64bit version of Internet Explorer with 64-bit versions of
Windows.
To display the unit’s XDCAM web pages
1
Connect this unit and a computer to a network
2
Start the browser on the computer, and enter “http://IP_address_of_this_unit/” in the address bar of the browser, and then press the Enter key.
For example, if the IP address of this unit is
“192.168.001.010”, enter “http://
192.168.1.10/”.
If the connection succeeds, you will be prompted to enter a user name and a password.
3
Enter your user name and password, and then press the Enter key.
The user name and password are set to the following when the unit is shipped from the factory.
• User name: admin
• Password: Model name (“pdw-850”)
After the user name and password are verified, an XDCAM web page appears.
To display disc and clip properties
1
Insert a disc into this unit, and put this unit into the following state.
• Recording, playback, search and other disc operations: Stopped
• THUMBNAIL button: Off
• Disc access by Lock or Delete All Clips,
Format Disc, and so on in the Disc Menu:
Stopped
• Setting of CACHE/INTVAL REC on the
REC FUNCTION page of the
OPERATION menu: OFF
• FTP connection for file operations:
Disconnected, or logged out
• Recording of video from external devices:
Disabled
• Connections between this unit and a computer by the Live Logging function:
Disconnected
• Setting of LIVE LOGGING on the REC
FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu: Values other than VIEW (OFF or
LIVE)
• MENU ON/OFF switch: OFF
2
Display the XDCAM web pages in the browser of your computer (see the previous section) .
To display disc properties
Click “Disc Properties” in the Disc menu.
The disc properties of this unit appear in the
Disc Properties page.
See “Checking disc properties” (page 131) for
more information about the various properties.
135
To display clip thumbnails
Click “Thumbnails” in the Disc menu.
A page of thumbnails of clips on the disc appears. Each thumbnail page displays up to
12 thumbnails.
Like the thumbnails in the unit’s GUI screens
(see page 106) , the thumbnails display
several information items, including index picture changed marks, S marks, clip flag icons, and lock icons.
When multiple pages exist, you can switch pages by clicking << (back five pages), <
(back one page), > (forward one page), or >>
(forward five pages).
To display clip properties
In the Thumbnails page, select a clip by clicking its thumbnail.
The properties of that clip appear in the Clip
Properties page.
See “Checking clip properties” (page 119) for
more information about the various properties.
To download high-resolution clip data
(HIGH resolution file), proxy AV data
(LOW resolution file), or metadata (Clip
NRT metadata), click “HTTP Download” to the right of the item, click “Save” in the dialog that appears, and specify the save destination.
The specified data is downloaded to the specified location in your computer.
To use a web browser to load planning metadata
1
Insert a disc into this unit, and put this unit into the following state.
• Recording, playback, search and other disc operations: Stopped
• THUMBNAIL button: Off
• Disc access by Lock or Delete All Clips,
Format Disc, and so on in the Disc Menu:
Stopped
• Setting of CACHE/INTVAL REC on the
REC FUNCTION page of the
OPERATION menu: OFF
• FTP connection for file operations:
Disconnected, or logged out
• Recording of video from external devices:
Disabled
• Connections between this unit and a computer by the Live Logging function:
Disconnected
• Setting of LIVE LOGGING on the REC
FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu: Values other than VIEW (OFF or
LIVE)
• MENU ON/OFF switch: OFF
136
2
Display the Planning Metadata page of the XDCAM web pages in the web browser of your computer.
To display the Planning Metadata page,
proceed in the same way as described in “To display the unit’s XDCAM web pages” (page
2 enter “http://
IP_address_of_this_unit/mobile.htm” in the address bar.
3
Click “Browse...” to open the “Choose
File” dialog.
4
Select the planning metadata file
(XML) you saved on your computer, and then click “Open”.
The path of the selected file appears in the
“File to send” field.
5
Click “Execute”.
The planning metadata is loaded into the unit’s memory and stored in the /General/
Sony/Planning directory on the disc.
“OK” appears in the “Status” field when the transfer is complete.
137
Transferring Clips (Direct FTP function)
You can transfer clips (MXF files) between this unit and external devices over a network. This unit has an Direct FTP function, which allows you to connect to any XDCAM device or computer with an FTP server function and transfer files with a few simple operations in the
GUI screen.
The following table lists the types of file transfers that this unit can execute.
Transfer direction
Upload
Transfer target
One or more clips
Multiple clips with clip list
Part of one clip
Download One clip
Function put partial put get
Note
File transfers with this function are limited to clips (highresolution data) and clip list files. To transfer files of other types (proxy AV data, files in the General and User
Data directories, and so on), operate after establishing an
FTP connection
Upload clip (put)
Download clip (get)
PDW-HD1500
Network
Laptop computer
a)
Local host (this unit) a) The following software requirements must be satisfied.
• An FTP server function must be available.
• In the case of Windows, Microsoft Window IIS (Internet Information
Service) Version 7.0 or higher.
• In the case of Macintosh, Mac OS X Version 10.5.6 or higher.
Material server
Remote host
138
Preparations for clip transfers
Check the following points.
• This unit and the target transfer device
(XDCAM device or computer) must be supplied with stable power and must be connected to a network.
• The settings under the NETWORK 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu must be set to values that allow network connections.
• The ETHERNET/USB item on the POWER
SAVE page of the OPERATION menu must be set to ENABL.
• For XDCAM devices that support UPnP
(universal plug and play), the UPnP function must be enabled (the setting may vary).
To enable the UPnP function
The UPnP (universal plug and play) function allows devices to be easily connected to networks. The following XDCAM devices support UPnP.
• PDW-F1600
• PDW-HD1500
• PDW-HR1
• PDW-F800
• PDW-700
• PDW-740
To enable the UPnP function on this unit, set
UPnP on the NETWORK SETTING page of the
MAINTENANCE menu to ENABLE, and then power the unit off and on again.
For the settings on other XDCAM devices, refer to the operation manuals supplied with the devices.
Uploading clips
To upload entire clips
Proceed as follows to upload selected clips or all clips and clip lists on the disc.
See page 112 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the clip to upload (multiple selections possible).
To upload all clips and clip lists on the disc, start from step 2 .
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
139
3
Select Upload Clips via Direct FTP, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
The Select Transfer Type screen of the
Upload Clips via Direct FTP command appears.
4
Select the type of clip transfer.
Selected Clips: Clips selected in step 1 .
All Clips & ClipList: All clips and clip lists on the disc.
To transfer while preserving the UMID of the transfer source clips
Check the “UMID Unchange” option.
Note
If the remote host is a computer, clips are transferred with the UMID unchanged regardless of this setting.
To reconnect to a remote host
The Reconnect button is enabled if the most recent operation successfully established a connection to a remote host.
You can select “Reconnect” and press the
SET/S.SEL button or MENU knob to reconnect to that host. The host is selected automatically and the screen changes directly to the Connecting Status screen (see step 9 in the procedure) .
Note
The Reconnect button is not enabled if the most recent operation failed to connect to a remote host.
5
Select , , and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The Select Remote Host screen appears.
6
Select the remote host (the target device to which you want to transfer the clips).
You can register up to four remote hosts.
Remote Host 1 to 3: Register these in the settings screen.
Remote Host 4(UPnP): A remote host that supports UPnP (universal plug and play) is detected and registered automatically
(see “To enable the UPnP function”
To check remote hosts discovered by the
UPnP function
Select “Hosts Discovered via UPnP”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob. (If the UPnP function of this unit is disabled, a confirmation screen appears prompting you to enable it. Select
“OK” and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. The UPnP function will be enabled when you power the unit off and then on again.)
The Select Host Discovered via UPnP screen appears. (Some time may be required before the search for remote hosts finishes.)
Select the name of a remote host from the list, and press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob. A network settings screen appears (see step 7 ) . If you establish a connection with the selected remote host, the network settings are saved in Remote Host 4.
From the next time that you select “Remote
Host 4(UPnP)”, the remote host that you select here will be connected.
To check the network settings of this unit
Select “Network Config”, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. The following network settings appear.
Item
Host Name
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Setting
Host name
IP address
a)
Subnet mask
Item
DHCP
Setting
Setting that specifies whether to acquire the IP address automatically from a DHCP server
Enabled: Acquire automatically
Disabled: Do not acquire automatically
Address Status Method used to set IP address
Manual Set: Manually
DHCP: DHCP function
AutoIP: Auto IP addressing function
Undefined: Nothing specified
Default Gateway Default gateway a) An IP address determined by a DHCP server appears instantly in this field.
Select OK and press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob to return to the previous screen.
7
Select , , and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
A network settings screen for the remote host appears.
Item Setting
Host Name Host name or IP address. (If this is a host name, a DNS server must be available on the connected network.
Specification of an IP address is recommended.)
Port Port used by the FTP server
(normally “21”).
140
Item Setting
Device Type The type of the remote host
• If the remote host is an
XDCAM device, select the model name or “Other
XDCAM model” (if the model name is not in the list) from the list of model names.
a)
• If the remote host is a computer, select “Others(PC
Server)” from the list of model names.
Description Comment about the remote host. (UTF-8 encoding, up to
127 bytes. This setting has no effect on the connection.)
Path
The setting that you make here appears as the remote host name in the Select Remote
Host screen (see step 5 of the procedure) .
If the remote host is a computer, path to the transfer destination directory. (This is not needed if the remote host is an XDCAM device.)
User Name User name for FTP login. (If the remote host is an XDCAM
Password device, the default is “admin”.)
Password for FTP login. (If the remote host is an XDCAM device, the default is the model name, such as “pdw-850”.) a) If an XDCAM device is selected as the Device
Type, then the User Name and Password are set automatically to the default, and you do not need to make the Port and Path settings. Simply selecting the Host Name (or as appropriate the
Description) is enough to fulfill the requirements for connection.
If the User Name or Password of the device that you want to connect to changes, set them here.
8
Set the various items.
To select an item
Turn the MENU knob to move the cursor, and then push the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
A software keyboard appears so that you can enter a setting.
9
Select “Connect”, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The settings are saved and the Connecting
Status screen appears.
The following table lists the various stages that appear in the connection status screen and describes the corresponding processing.
Item
DNS Name
Resolving ping - echo back
Description
When host was specified by a host name instead of an IP address, the unit is querying a
DNS server for the host’s IP address.
The unit has issued a ping
(communications established) command and is waiting for a response.
Open Remote
Host
The unit is connecting to the remote host over the specified port.
FTP Login
Change
Directory
The unit is logging in to the remote host with specified user name and password.
When a path was specified, the unit is changing to the specified directory.
The status indicated beside each item lights in yellow during processing for that item, and lights in green when the processing finishes.
If an error occurs
The status indicator changes to red.
Correct the condition that caused the error and repeat the operation.
If you cannot connect
Check the following points.
• Make sure that this unit and the remote host are correctly connected to the network.
• If the remote host is an XDCAM device, make sure that it is not displaying a GUI screen.
• If the remote host is an XDCAM device, make sure that a disc is inserted.
141
When the connection is complete (the indicators of all items have turned green), the
Upload Clips via Direct FTP screen appears.
To check the connection on the remote host side
If the remote host is an XDCAM device, check that the “NETWORK!” has appeared in the display or other status display location.
• Set the ETHERNET/USB item on the
POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu to DSABL.
Note
When several files are to be transferred, the entire transfer task is cancelled when the first transfer failure occurs. Subsequent clips are not transferred.
When the transfer of all files has finished, the
Uploading Result Report screen appears.
Select “OK”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. This returns you to the clip thumbnail screen.
The progress bars show the progress of the transfer. If multiple clips are being transferred, a count of the clips that have been successfully transferred appears.
If the remote host is an XDCAM device, the disc usage also appears. (It does not appear if the remote host is a computer).
If a file of the same name already exists at the transfer destination
The file name is changed so that it does not conflict with the file at the destination.
The name of the file on the transfer source
(this unit) appears in the “Original” field, and the name of the file on the transfer destination appears in the “Copy” field.
1)
1) If the clip name is a standard name, it is changed to the unused clip name with the smallest number. (Example: If names C0001 to C0020 are in use, the name “C0021”.)
If the clip name is a user-defined name, a serial number is appended to the clip name. (Example:
If the name is “EveningNews”,
“EveningNews(1)”.)
To cancel the processing
Do one of the following.
• Select “Abort: Immediately”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
• If you are transferring multiple clips, select
“Abort: After this clip”, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
(The transfer of subsequent clips will be cancelled after transfer of the current clip finishes.)
To upload part of a clip
You can select part of a clip in the expand thumbnail screen or the chapter thumbnail screen and upload that part.
Expand thumbnail screen: The clip is divided arbitrarily into parts of equal length, regardless of content. Use this method if you do not need to specify the transfer range precisely.
Chapter thumbnail screen: Use this method if you want to transfer a specific range. (By setting essence marks at the start point and end point of the transfer range, you can specify the range with a precision of one frame.)
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select a clip and press the EXPAND or
CHAPTER button.
The expand thumbnail screen or the chapter thumbnail screen appears.
2
Select the transfer range.
To select multiple thumbnails
While holding the SHIFT key down, turn the
MENU knob, or press the B /IN or b /OUT button.
142
The duration of the transfer range appears in the lower right of the screen.
Note
When the selected range (duration) in the expand thumbnail screen is less than two seconds, it is expanded automatically to two seconds.
3
Execute step 2 to 9 of the previous section “To upload entire clips”.
Downloading clips
Proceed as follows to download clips from a remote host (such as other XDCAM device devices or a material server).
See page 112 for information about thumbnail screen
operations.
1
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select Download Clip via Direct FTP, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The Select Remote Host screen of the
Download Clip via Direct FTP command appears.
• When more 301 or more clips are stored on a remote host, the denominator indicating the clip total at the upper right is shown as “- - -”, and the names of the 301st and following clips are not displayed.
• File names containing other than ASCII characters (kanji and so on) are not displayed.
4
Select a clip to download, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The download starts.
When the download finishes, the
Downloading Result Report screen appears.
Select “OK”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. This returns you to the clip thumbnail screen.
Copying clips directly between
XDCAM devices
In the field or another environment where the devices are not connected to a network, you can copy (upload) clips between XDCAM devices by connecting them directly. The example in the following procedure shows how to copy a clip from this unit to a PDW-HD1500. Insert discs into both units and proceed as follows.
1
Connect this unit and the PDW-
HD1500 by a network cable.
The cable can be either a cross cable or a straight cable.
3
Execute steps 6 to 9 of “To upload entire clips” (page 139).
If the connection succeeds, the Select Clip to
Download screen appears.
This unit
Network cable
(not supplied)
Notes
• If the remote host is a computer, only the MXF files in the specified directory appear.
PDW-HD1500
2
Set up the two units as follows.
143
Settings on this unit
Item
POWER SAVE page of
OPERATION menu
NETWORK
SETTING page of
MAINTENANCE menu
ETHERNET/
USB
DHCP
UPnP
Setting
ENABLE
ENABLE
ENABLE
Settings on the PDW-HD1500
Item
Item M50 in the
MAINTENANCE menu: DHCP
Item M59 in the
MAINTENANCE menu: UPnP
Setting
ENABLE
ENABLE
3
Power both units off and on again, and wait for about three minutes.
4
Check that the IP addresses of the two units have been set as follows by the
Auto-IP function.
IP address of this unit
Item
NETWORK IP
SETTING page of
MAINTENANCE menu
ADDRESS
Setting
169.254.XXX.
XXX
(X: any number)
IP address of the PDW-HD1500
Item
Item M51 in the
MAINTENANCE menu: IP ADDRESS
PRESET
Setting
169.254.XXX.XXX
(X: any number)
5
In the clip list thumbnail screen of this unit, select the clip to copy (upload).
6
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
7
Select Upload Clips via Direct FTP, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
With , selected, the Select Transfer Type screen of the Upload Clips via Direct FTP command appears.
8
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
The Select Remote Host screen appears.
9
Select “Hosts Discovered via UPnP”, and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The detected connection destination device
(the PDW-HD1500) appears in the Select
Host Discovered via UPnP screen.
10
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
Detailed information about the connection destination device (the PDW-HD1500) appears.
11
With “Connect” selected, press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
Transfer of the clip begins as soon as the connection is established.
During transfer of the clip, “NETWORK!” appears in the display of the connection destination device (the PDW-HD1500).
When transfer of the clip completes, an
Uploading Result Report appears on the screen.
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob to return to the clip thumbnail screen.
12
Check the copied clip in the clip thumbnail screen of the connection destination device (the PDW-HD1500).
144
Shortcut List
You can access many functions from the keyboard, without displaying a menu (shortcut operations).
Shortcuts are available for the following functions. The plus sign (+) indicates that one
Function
Clip List Thumbnail (display clip list thumbnail screen)
Expand Thumbnail (display expand thumbnail screen)
Chapter Thumbnail (display chapter thumbnail screen)
Essence Mark Thumbnail (display essence mark thumbnail screen)
Add Sub Clip (add sub clip)
Delete Clip (delete clip)
Lock/Unlock Clip (lock or unlock clip)
Set Inpoint (set In point)
Set Outpoint (set Out point)
Cue up Inpoint (cue up In point)
Cue up Outpoint (cue up Out point)
Reset Inpoint (reset In point)
Reset Outpoint (reset Out point)
Cue up (cue up)
Cue up & Play (cue up and play)
Page Down (switch to next page)
Page Up (switch to previous page)
Go To End (go to the last item)
Go To Top (go to the first item)
Select Multi Clip (select multiple clips)
Exit (exit the current thumbnail screen) a) If Settings >SET Key on Thumbnail in the Disc Menu is set to “Cue up & Play”, then play starts as soon as cueup is ready.
b) If Settings >SET Key on Thumbnail in the Disc Menu is set to “Cue up & Play”, then pressing the SET/
S.SEL button has the same effect.
button is held down while another is pressed, for example “SHIFT + RESET/RETURN”.
Note
The same shortcut may access different functions, depending on the screen that is active when it is executed.
Operation
SUB CLIP/DISC MENU
DISP SEL/EXPAND
HOLD/CHAPTER
SHIFT + THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK
SHIFT + SET/S.SEL
SHIFT + RESET/RETURN
SHIFT + STOP
Left-arrow + SET/S.SEL
Right-arrow + SET/S.SEL
Left-arrow + PREV or left-arrow + NEXT
Right-arrow + PREV or right-arrow + NEXT
Left-arrow + RESET/RETURN
Right-arrow + RESET/RETURN
SET/S.SEL
a)
PLAY/PAUSE
b)
SHIFT + down-arrow or F FWD
SHIFT + up-arrow or F REV
SHIFT + NEXT
SHIFT + PREV
SHIFT + right-arrow or SHIFT + left-arrow
THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK
145
Chapter
6
Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Menu Organization
The following chart shows the organization of menus in this camcorder.
TOP MENU
U S ER [A]
U S ER MENU CU S TOMIZE
ALL
OPERATION [B]
PAINT [C]
MAINTENANCE [D]
FILE [E]
DIAGNO S I S [F]
[A] USER menu
U S ER OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
S UPERIMPO S E
LCD
REC FUNCTION
A SS IGNABLE S W
VF DI S P 1
VF DI S P 2
' ! ' LED
MARKER 1
GAIN S W
VF S ETTING
VF DETAIL
AUTO IRI S
S HOT ID
S HOT DI S P
S ET S TATU S
LEN S FILE
U S ER FILE
[B] OPERATION menu
OPERATION OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
S UPERIMPO S E
LCD
REC FUNCTION
A SS IGNABLE S W
POWER S AVE
VF DI S P 1
VF DI S P 2
VF DI S P 3
VF DI S P 4
' ! ' LED
' ! ' LED S TD
MARKER 1
MARKER 2
FOCU S A SS I S T
GAIN S W
VF S ETTING
VF DETAIL
AUTO IRI S
S HOT ID
S HOT DI S P
S ET S TATU S
WHITE S ETTING
OFF S ET WHT
S HT ENABLE
LEN S FILE
FORMAT
S OURCE S EL
UMID S ET
CLIP TITLE
FILE NAMING
MEMORY REC
GP S S ETUP
146
[C] PAINT menu
PAINT S W S TATU S
WHITE
BLACK/FLARE
GAMMA
BLACK GAMMA
KNEE 1
KNEE 2
DETAIL 1
DETAIL 2
S D DETAIL
S KIN DETAIL
MTX LINEAR
MTX MULTI
V MODULATION
S ATURATION
S ATURATION MODE
NOI S E S UPPRE SS
S CENE FILE
[D] MAINTENANCE menu
MAINTENANCE WHITE S HADING
BLACK S HADING
LEVEL ADJU S T
BATTERY 1
BATTERY 2
AUDIO-1
AUDIO-2
AUDIO3
WRR S ETTING
TIMECODE
E SS ENCE MARK
CAM CONFIG 1
CAM CONFIG 2
CAM CONFIG 3
PRE S ET WHITE
DCC ADJU S T
AUTO IRI S 2
GENLOCK
ND COMP
AUTO S HADING
APR
NETWORK 1
NETWORK 2
WP S
Wi-Fi
UP CONVERTER
S HUTTER S ELECT
META OUT
HEAD S ET S ELECT
[E] FILE menu
FILE U S ER FILE
U S ER FILE 2
ALL FILE
S CENE FILE
REFERENCE
U S ER GAMMA
LEN S FILE 1
LEN S FILE 2
LEN S FILE 3
U S B MEMORY
[F] DIAGNOSIS menu
DIAGNO S I S HOUR S METER
TIME/DATE
ROM VER S ION 1
ROM VER S ION 2
ROM VER S ION 3
DEV S TATU S
CA S TATU S
TOP menu and top-level menus
The TOP menu appears when, with no menu displayed, you hold down the MENU knob and set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON. The TOP menu contains only top-level menus.
<TOP MENU>
USER
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE
ALL
OPERATION
PAINT
MAINTENANCE
FILE
DIAGNOSIS
When you select a top-level menu, the most recently shown page of that menu appears. The
CONTENTS page appears when the menu is selected for the first time.
For details about how to use menus, see page 192.
USER menu
This menu allows you to add any desired page from the OPERATION, PAINT,
MAINTENANCE, FILE, and DIAGNOSIS menus to suit your needs. By gathering frequently used pages on the USER menu beforehand, you can call up them quickly whenever you need them.
This menu is normally displayed when the
MENU ON/OFF switch is set to ON.
147
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu
This menu allows you to add pages to or delete pages from the USER menu to suit your needs.
ALL menu
This menu allows you to handle all items in the
OPERATION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE, FILE, and DIAGNOSIS menus as if they were in one menu.
OPERATION menu
This menu contains items for changing settings according to conditions related to the subject when the camcorder is being operated.
PAINT menu
This menu contains items for making detailed image adjustments while using a waveform monitor to monitor the waveforms output by the camera. Support of a video engineer is usually required to use this menu. Although you can also use an external remote control unit to set the items on this menu, this menu is effective when using the camcorder by itself outdoors.
MAINTENANCE menu
This menu contains items for making settings for audio, timecode, essence marks, and battery.
FILE menu
This menu is for saving the adjusted data in the camcorder memory or on a USB flash drive. The following files can be saved.
User files
User files save the setting items and setting data of customized USER menus. You can save up to
100 user files on a USB flash drive. Once you save a user file on a USB flash drive, you can easily set the USER menu to your preference by loading the file.
For details on user files, see “Saving and Recalling
ALL files
ALL files saves the setting data of all of the menus. You can save up to 100 ALL files on a
USB flash drive.
Once a camcorder is set up according to your preferences and you save an ALL file on a USB flash drive, you can easily set other camcorders to those settings by loading the data from the USB flash drive.
Note
Device specific data (output levels and shading that requires adjustment for the specific device) is not saved.
Scene files
In the scene file, the setting values of PAINT menu items set to shoot a particular scene are saved. You can save up to five scene files in the camcorder memory and up to 100 scene files on a
USB flash drive. For example, first adjust the settings to shoot a rehearsal of a particular scene and then save them as a scene file. Then load that file before the actual shooting so that you can quickly recreate setup conditions of the rehearsal.
Reference files
Reference files save the reference values that are set when STANDARD is executed in the SCENE
FILE page of the PAINT menu. You can save one reference file in the internal memory of the unit and one on a USB flash drive.
Lens files
Lens files save the setting data used to compensate for the characteristics of lenses, such as flare, white shading, and auto iris gain. You can save up to 32 lens files in the internal memory of the unit and up to 100 lens files on a USB flash drive.
DIAGNOSIS menu
This menu shows the digital hours meter, the
ROM version, and information about the internal device status of the camcorder.
148
Menu List
Tips
• The bold-faced numbers designate the pages that have been registered in the USER menu at the factory.
• The bold-faced settings are the factory default settings.
• The initial value of items with a setting range of –99 to 99 is 0.
• When the setup value in the Settings column is surrounded by parentheses ( ), the value is a relative value. The setting range shown on the menu screen may differ from what is shown in the manual.
OPERATION menu
No.
Page
01 OUTPUT 1
Item
SDI OUT 1 SELECT
Settings
OFF /HDSDI/SDSDI
SDI OUT 2 SELECT OFF /HDSDI/SDSDI/
VF
SDI OUT 2 SUPER OFF /ON
TEST OUT SELECT
TEST OUT SUPER
VBS
OFF
/Y/R/G/B
/ON
Description
Selects the output signal from the
SDI OUT 1 connector.
Selects the output signal from the
SDI OUT 2 connector.
Sets the superimposed information output from the SDI
OUT 2 connector.
Note
Text information is always displayed, regardless of this setting, when SDI OUT 2 SELECT is set to
VF.
Selects the output signal from the
TEST OUT connector.
Note
When R, G, or B is selected, turning the power of the unit off and on changes the setting to Y.
Sets the superimposed information output from the
TEST OUT connector.
Note
Regardless of this setting, text data is output from this connector when the setting of TEST OUT SELECT is Y,
R, G, or B. During the display of text data, you can hide the text data by switching this item from ON to OFF.
(It is also hidden in the viewfinder.)
149
No.
Page
02 OUTPUT 2
Item Settings
DOWN CON MODE
(Does not appear when the FORMAT page item
SYSTEM LINE is set to
CROP /SQEZE
1080 and the SYSTEM
FREQUENCY item is set to 23.9P)
WIDE ID THROU /AUTO
03
04
SUPER
IMPOSE
LCD
SUPER(VFDISP)
SUPER(MENU)
SUPER(TC)
SUPER(MARKER)
SUPER(ZEBRA)
LCD COLOR
LCD
MARKER&ZEBRA
OFF/ ON
OFF/ ON
OFF /ON
OFF
OFF
/ON
/ON
(–99 to 99)
OFF/ ON
Description
Sets the conversion mode for down-converted output.
Specifies whether to add wide picture information to the SD output signal.
THROU: Output the video signals without adding wide picture information.
AUTO: When the DOWN CON
MODE item is set to
SQEZE, add wide picture information to the output video signals.
When the SDI OUT 2 SUPER item or the TEST OUT SUPER item on the OUTPUT 1 page is set to ON, turn the output of text
(superimposed) information from the SDI OUT 2 or TEST OUT connector on or off for each item.
Turns the marker display on or off in the output from the following connectors.
• SDI OUT 2 connector (when SDI
OUT 2 SELECT on the OUTPUT
1 page is set to HDSDI/SDSDI, and SDI OUT 2 SUPER is set to
ON)
• TEST OUT connector (when
TEST OUT SUPER on the
OUTPUT 1 page is set to ON)
Turns the output zebra display from the following connectors on or off.
• SDI OUT 2 connector (when SDI
OUT 2 SELECT is set to HDSDI or SDSDI, and SDI OUT 2
SUPER is set to ON on the
OUTPUT 1 page)
• TEST OUT connector (when
TEST OUT SUPER is set to ON on the OUTPUT 1 page)
Adjusts the LCD color.
Turns the marker and zebra display in the LCD monitor on or off.
150
No.
Page
05 REC
FUNCTION
Item
SLOW & QUICK
FRAME RATE
Settings
OFF /ON
1080/23.98P: 1 to 48
1080/25P: 1 to 50
1080/29.97P: 1 to 60
Description
For details, see “Shooting with
Slow & Quick Motion” (page 86).
CACHE/INTVAL REC OFF /CACHE/A. INT/
CACHE REC TIME
M. INT
0-2S /2-4S/4-6S/6-8S/8-
10S/18-20S/28-30S
TAKE TOTAL TIME 5MIN /10MIN/15MIN/
20MIN/30MIN/40MIN/
50MIN/1H/2H/3H/4H/
5H/7H/10H/15H/20H/
30H/40H/50H/70H/
100H
REC TIME
PRE-LIGHTING
5SEC /10SEC/15SEC/
20SEC/30SEC/40SEC/
50SEC/1MIN to 85MIN
OFF /2SEC/5SEC/
10SEC
NUMBER OF FRAME When SYSTEM LINE is set to 720 and REC
FORMAT is set to
HD422 50, HD420
HQ, or HD420 SP:
2 /6/12
When either SYSTEM
LINE or REC
FORMAT is set to another setting: 1 /3/
6
For details, see “Starting a shoot with a few seconds of pre-stored picture data (Picture Cache
function)” (page 81) and “Timelapse video (Interval Rec function)” (page 82).
TRIGGER INTERVAL M /1SEC to 10SEC/
15SEC/20SEC/30SEC/
40SEC/50SEC/1MIN to
10MIN/15MIN/20MIN/
30MIN/40MIN/50MIN/
1H/2H/3H/4H/6H/12H/
24H
DISC EXCHG CACHE OFF /ON
For details, see “Exchanging discs while recording (Disc
CLIP CONT REC OFF /ON
For details, see “Recording with the Clip Continuous Rec function” (page 88).
LIVE LOGGING OFF /LIVE/VIEW
For details, see “Using the Live
151
No.
Page
06 ASSIGNABLE
SW
Item
ASSIGN SW <1>
ASSIGN SW <2>
ASSIGN SW <3>
ASSIGN SW <4>
07
08
09
Settings
POWER SAVE ETHERNET/USB
REC AUDIO OUT
TEST OUT SAVE
Wi-Fi
VF DISP 1
VF DISP 2
ASSIGN SW <5>
ASSIGN SW <RET>
ZOOM SPEED
RETURN VIDEO
VF DISP
VF DISP MODE
DISP EXTENDER
DISP FILTER
DISP WHITE
DISP GAIN
DISP SHUTTER
DISP AUDIO
0 to
OFF
20 to 99
/ON
DSABL /ENABL
EE /SAVE
OFF/ ON
DSABL /ENABL
OFF/ ON
1/2/ 3
OFF/ ON
OFF/ ON
OFF/
OFF/
OFF/
OFF/
ON
ON
ON
ON
DISP DISC
DISP IRIS
OFF/ ON
OFF/ ON
DISP ZOOM OFF/ ON
DISP COLOR TEMP OFF /ON
10 VF DISP 3
DISP BATT REMAIN INT /VOLT/AUTO
DISP DC IN OFF /ON
DISP 16:9/4:3 ID OFF /ON
DISP WRR RF LVL OFF /ON
DISP REC FORMAT OFF /ON
DISP CLIP NO(PB) OFF/ ON
DISP TIMECODE
DISP ALAC
OFF
OFF
/ON
/ON
DISP CLIP NAME
DISP SCENE FILE
DISP CONT REC
LOW LIGHT
PLAN /AUTO
OFF /ON
OFF/ ON
OFF /ON
LOW LIGHT LEVEL (–99 to 99)
VF BATT WARNING 10% /20%
ABSOLUTE VALUE OFF /ON
Description
For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches”
For details, see “Setting power saving functions” (page 211).
For details, see “Selecting the display items” (page 200).
152
No.
11
12
13
14
Page
VF DISP 4
‘!’ LED
Item Settings
DISP GPS OFF /ON
WIRELESS STATUS OFF/ ON
EXT MEDIA REMAIN OFF/ ON
SENDING CLIPINFO OFF/ ON
NW CLIENT MODE OFF/ ON
STREAMING STATUS OFF/ ON
GAIN <!>
SHUTTER <!>
OFF/
OFF/
ON
ON
WHITE PRESET <!> OFF/ ON
CC 5600K <!> OFF/ 5600K
ATW RUN <!>
EXTENDER <!>
OFF/
OFF/
ON
ON
Description
For details, see “Selecting the display items” (page 200).
MARKER 1
FILTER ND <!>
FILTER CC <!>
OVERRIDE <!>
‘!’ LED STD GAIN <!>
SHUTTER <!>
OFF /ON
OFF /ON
OFF/ ON
0dB /LOW/MID/HIGH The setting of SHUTTER <!>
OFF /ECS/ 1/100 / 1/125
/ 1/250 / 1/500 / 1/1000 /
1/2000 /SLS
P/A/B/PA/PB/ AB varies depending on the resolution and system frequency.
See page 58 for information about
the settings.
WHITE BAL <!>
CC 5600K <!>
ATW RUN <!>
EXTENDER <!>
FILTER ND <!>
FILTER CC <!>
OVERRIDE <!>
MARKER
CENTER
CENTER MARK
SAFTY ZONE
SAFTY AREA
ASPECT
OFF /ON
OFF /ON
OFF /ON
1 /2/3/4
A/ B
OFF
OFF
/C/D
OFF/
/ON
ON
/ON
1/2/ 3 /4
OFF /ON
80%/ 90% /92.5%/95%
OFF /ON
ASPECT SELECT 15:9/14:9/13:9/ 4:3 /1.85/
2.35
ASPECT MASK OFF/ ON
ASPECT MASK LVL 0 to 12 to 15
100% MARKER OFF /ON
For details, see “Setting the marker display” (page 202).
153
No.
15
16
17
18
Page
MARKER 2
FOCUS
ASSIST
GAIN SW
Item Settings
USER BOX OFF /ON
USER BOX WIDTH 3 to 240 to 479
USER BOX HEIGHT 3 to 135 to 269
USER BOX H POS –240 to 0 to 239
USER BOX V POS
CENTER H POS
–135 to 0 to 134
–480 to 0 to 479
CENTER V POS –270 to 0 to 269
ASPECT SAFE ZONE OFF /ON
ASPECT SAFE AREA 80%/ 90% /92.5%/95%
FOCUS ASSIST IND OFF /ON
FOCUS IND POS BOTTM /LEFT/TOP/
RIGHT
FOCUS AREA MARK OFF /ON
GAIN LOW –6dB/–3dB/ 0dB /3dB/
6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
GAIN MID
GAIN HIGH
GAIN TURBO
–6dB/–3dB/0dB/3dB/
6dB /9dB/12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
–6dB/–3dB/0dB/3dB/
6dB/9dB/ 12dB /18dB/
24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
–6dB/–3dB/0dB/3dB/
6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/36dB/ 42dB
TURBO SW IND OFF /ON
SHOCKLESS GAIN OFF /ON
VF SETTING ZEBRA
ZEBRA SELECT
OFF
1
/ON
/2/BOTH
ZEBRA1 DET LVL
ZEBRA1 APT LVL
20% to 70% to 107%
1% to 10% to 20%
ZEBRA2 DET LVL 52% to 100% to 109%
VF DETAIL LEVEL (–99 to 99)
VF ASPECT (SD)
(When the REC
FORMAT item is set to
IMX50, IMX40,
IMX30, or DVCAM)
AUTO /16:9
VF MARKER LEVEL –99 to 0 to 52
Description
For details, see
“Setting the marker display” (page 202) .
For details, see “Using the Focus
For details, see “Setting gain values for the GAIN selector positions” (page 207).
For details, see “Setting the viewfinder” (page 203).
154
No.
19
20
21
22
23
Page
VF DETAIL
AUTO IRIS
Item Settings
VF DETAIL OFF/ ON
VF DETAIL LEVEL (–99 to 99)
CRISP
FREQUENCY
(–99 to 99)
9M/14M/ 18M
FAT MODE
FLICKER
COLOR DETAIL
COLOR SEL
PEAK COLOR
CHROMA LEVEL
IRIS OVERRIDE
IRIS SPEED
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
0%/
OFF
/ON
/ON
/ON
BLUE /RED/YELL
/ON
25%
/ON
/50%/100%
(–99 to 99)
SHOT ID
CLIP HIGH LIGHT
IRIS WINDOW
OFF /ON
1 /2/3/4/5/6/VAR
IRIS WINDOW IND OFF /ON
IRIS VAR WIDTH 20 to 240 to 479
IRIS VAR HEIGHT
IRIS VAR H POS
IRIS VAR V POS
ID-1
ID-2
ID-3
ID-4
SHOT DATE
20 to 135
–240 to
–135 to
0
0 characters
to 269
to 239
to 134
Blank /up to 12
Blank /up to 12 characters
Blank /up to 12 characters
Blank /up to 12 characters
OFF /ON SHOT DISP
SHOT TIME OFF /ON
SHOT MODEL NAME OFF /ON
SHOT SERIAL NO
SHOT ID SEL
OFF /ON
OFF /ID-1/ID-2/ID-3/
ID-4
SHOT 16:9 CHARA OFF /ON
SHOT BLINK CHARA OFF /ON
SET STATUS STATUS ABNORMAL OFF/ ON
STATUS SYSTEM OFF/ ON
STATUS FUNCTION OFF/ ON
STATUS AUDIO
STATUS GPS
OFF/
OFF/
ON
ON
Description
For details, see
“Setting the viewfinder” (page 203) .
For details, see “Changing the
For details, see “Setting the shot
For details, see “Recording shot data superimposed on the color bars” (page 204).
For details, see “Displaying the status confirmation screens”
155
No.
24
25
Page
WHITE
SETTING
Item Settings
WHITE SWITCH <B> MEM /ATW
SHOCKLESS WHITE
ATW HOLD
MEMORY
OFF/
OFF
1 /2/3
/ON
Description
Specifies the operating mode when the WHITE BAL switch is set to the B side.
MEM: Auto white balance
ATW: Auto tracing white balance
Specifies the transition time when the WHITE BAL switch is changed to a new setting (1 is fastest)
Selects whether ATW (auto tracing white balance) settings are saved in the memory (A or B) selected by the WHITE BAL switch, in addition to the dedicated ATW memory.
OFF: Not saved
ON: Saved
ATW SPEED
AWB FIXED AREA
FILTER WHT MEM
1/2/3/
OFF
OFF/
4 /5
/ON
ON
For details, see “To save white balance settings obtained by
Switches the transition speed of auto tracing white balance (ATW)
(1 is fastest)
Executes AWB (auto white balance) at the center of the screen.
Specifies whether to allocate a white balance memory slot for each position number of the
FILTER selector.
OFFSET WHT OFFSET WHITE <A> OFF /ON
WARM-COOL <A> Displays reference color temperature
For details, see “Specifying an offset for the auto white balance setting” (page 216).
WARM-COOL BAL
<A>
(–99 to 99)
OFFSET WHITE <B> OFF /ON
WARM-COOL <B> Displays reference color temperature
WARM-COOL BAL
<B>
(–99 to 99)
156
No.
Page
26 SHT ENABLE
Item
SHUTTER ECS
SHUTTER SLS
SHUTTER 1/32
SHUTTER 1/33
SHUTTER 1/40
SHUTTER 1/48
SHUTTER 1/50
SHUTTER 1/60
SHUTTER 1/96
SHUTTER 1/100
SHUTTER 1/120
SHUTTER 1/125
27
28
LENS FILE
FORMAT
Settings
OFF/ ON
OFF /ON
OFF/ ON
OFF/ ON
OFF/ ON
OFF/ ON
OFF/ ON
OFF/ ON
OFF/ ON
OFF/ ON
OFF/ ON
OFF/ ON
SHUTTER 1/250
SHUTTER 1/500
SHUTTER 1/1000
SHUTTER 1/2000
OFF/ ON
OFF/ ON
OFF/ ON
OFF/ ON
LENS FILE SELECT 1 to 32
F.ID
Display only
L.ID
L.MF
Display only
Display only
SYSTEM LINE
SYSTEM
FREQUENCY
REC FORMAT
1080 /720
59.9i/29.9P/50i/25P/
23.9P/59.9P/50P
HD422 50 /HD420 HQ/
HD420 SP/IMX50/
IMX40/IMX30/
DVCAM
ASPECT RATIO (SD)
(When the REC
FORMAT item is set to
IMX50, IMX40,
IMX30, or DVCAM)
16:9 /4:3
AU DATA LEN (IMX)
(When the REC
FORMAT item is set to
IMX50, IMX40, or
IMX30)
16bit /24bit
COUNTRY NTSC(J)AREA/NTSC
AREA/PAL AREA
Description
The items which can be set differ depending on the setting of the
SYSTEM FREQUENCY item on the FORMAT page. For details,
When the recording format is
1080/23.98P, more shutter speeds can be selected and the SHT
ENABLE 2 page appears to display them.
For details, see “Selecting the lens file” (page 216).
The selectable SYSTEM
FREQUENCY settings differ depending on the setting of
SYSTEM LINE. For details, see
“Setting the Recording Format”
The selectable settings differ depending on the setting of REC
FORMAT. For details, see
“Setting the Recording Format”
For details, see “Setting the Area of Use” (page 37).
157
No.
Page
29 SOURCE SEL
Item
FRONT MIC SELECT
(When stereo microphone is connected)
Settings
MONO/ STREO
30 UMID SET
Description
Input mode selection for front microphone.
REC VIDEO SOURCE CAM /EXT
EXT VIDEO SOURCE VBS/SDSDI/ HDSDI
WIDE MODE(EXT) AUTO /16:9
For details, see “Recording video from external devices” (page 96).
When the input signal is SD, select the method that determines whether the signal is treated as a wide signal.
AUTO: When wide picture information is detected in the input signal, treat the signal as a wide signal and set the up-converter operating mode to squeeze mode. Record wide picture information when recording SD. When wide picture information is not detected, set the upconverter operating mode to edge crop mode and do not record wide picture information.
16:9: Always treat the signal as a wide signal and set the upconverter operating mode to squeeze mode. Record wide picture information when recording SD.
SETUP REMOVE
(When the COUNTRY item is set to
“NTSC(J)AREA” or
“NTSC AREA”)
COUNTRY CODE
ORGANIZATION
0.0%/ 7.5% Selects whether to modify the setup level of input video signals.
7.5%: Remove the setup. (Select when signals with 7.5% setup are input.)
0.0%: Do not remove the setup.
(Select when signals without setup are input.)
Blank /up to 4 characters
Blank /up to 4 characters
USER CODE
TIME ZONE
Blank /up to 4 characters
00 to 3F
158
No.
31
32
33
34
Page
CLIP TITLE
GPS SETUP
Item Settings
TITLE DSABL /ENABL
SELECT PREFIX
(When the TITLE item is set to “ENABL”)
EXEC
CLEAR NUMERIC
(When the TITLE item is set to “ENABL”)
EXEC
LOAD PREFIX DATA
(When the TITLE item is set to “ENABL”)
EXEC
PREFIX
(When the TITLE item is set to “ENABL”)
TITLE /up to 10 characters
NUMERIC
(When the TITLE item is set to “ENABL”)
00001 to 99999
FILE NAMING NAMING FORM
AUTO NAMING
(When the NAMING
FORM item is set to
“FREE”)
MEMORY
REC
MEMORY REC
COPY ALL CLIPS
C****/
COPY CURRENT CLP EXEC
FREE
C****/TITLE/ PLAN
DSABL /ENABL
EXEC
ABORT COPY EXEC
DEL ALL MEM CLP EXEC
FORMAT MEMORY EXEC
GPS OFF /ON
TIME ZONE
GPS DATUM
Description
For details, see “Assigning userdefined clip titles automatically”
For details, see “Assigning userdefined names to clips and clip lists” (page 92).
For details, see “Recording proxy data” (page 98).
For details, see “Obtaining GPS location information” (page 101).
159
PAINT menu
No.
Page
01
02
SW STATUS
WHITE
Item
GAMMA
BLACK GAMMA
MATRIX
KNEE
WHITE CLIP
DETAIL
APERTURE
FLARE
TEST SAW
COLOR TEMP <A>
C TEMP BAL <A>
R GAIN <A>
B GAIN <A>
COLOR TEMP <B>
C TEMP BAL <B>
R GAIN <B>
B GAIN <B>
Settings
OFF/
OFF
ON
/ON
Description
Turns the gamma correction on or off.
Turns the black gamma correction on or off.
OFF
OFF/
OFF/
OFF/
OFF/
/ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Turns the linear matrix correction and user-set matrix correction functions on or off.
Turns the knee correction on or off.
Turns the white clipping correction on or off.
Turns the detail signal on or off.
Turns the aperture function on or off.
Turns the flare function on or off.
Selects the test signal.
OFF/ ON
OFF /ON
Displays reference color temperature.
Sets the color temperature of
WHITE A.
(–99 to 99) Adjusts the value more precisely when the color temperature adjustment through COLOR
TEMP is not satisfactory.
(–99 to 99) Only the value of R GAIN is changed.
(–99 to 99) Only the value of B GAIN is changed.
Displays reference color temperature.
Sets the color temperature of
WHITE B.
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the value more precisely when the color temperature adjustment through COLOR
TEMP is not satisfactory.
Only the value of R GAIN is changed.
Only the value of B GAIN is changed.
160
No.
03
Page
BLACK/
FLARE
04 GAMMA
Item
MASTER BLACK
R BLACK
B BLACK
MASTER FLARE
Settings
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
R FLARE
G FLARE
B FLARE
FLARE
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
OFF/ ON
TEST OUT SELECT VBS /Y/R/G/B
GAMMA
STEP GAMMA
OFF/ ON
0.35 to 0.45
to 0.90
MASTER GAMMA (–99 to 99)
R GAMMA (–99 to 99)
G GAMMA
B GAMMA
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
TEST OUT SELECT VBS /Y/R/G/B
GAMMA TABLE STD /HG/USER
GAM TABLE (STD)
GAM TABLE (HG)
GAM TABLE (USER)
1 to
1 to
1
5
4
to 5
to 6
Description
Adjusts the master black level.
Adjusts the R black level.
Adjusts the B black level.
Adjusts the flare level of the master.
Adjusts the R flare level.
Adjusts the G flare level.
Adjusts the B flare level.
Turns the flare correction circuit on or off.
Selects the output signal of TEST
OUT connector.
Turns the gamma correction function on or off.
Sets the gamma correction curve by steps.
Sets the master gamma correction curve.
Sets the R gamma correction curve.
Sets the G gamma correction curve.
Sets the B gamma correction curve.
Selects the output signal of TEST
OUT connector.
Selects the gamma type.
STD: Standard gamma
HG: Hyper gamma
USER: User gamma
Selects the standard gamma type.
1: Corresponds to SD camcorder
2: x 4.5 gain
3: x 3.5 gain
4: Corresponds to SMPTE-240M
5: Corresponds to ITU-R709
6: x 5.0 gain
Selects the hyper gamma type.
1: Compress 325% video input to100% video output.
2: Compress 460% video input to100% video output.
3: Compress 325% video input to109% video output.
4: Compress 460% video input to109% video output.
Selects the user gamma type.
161
No.
05
06
07
Page
BLACK
GAMMA
KNEE 1
KNEE 2
08 DETAIL 1
Item Settings Description
BLACK GAMMA OFF/ ON Turns the black gamma correction on or off.
BLACK GAM RANGE LOW/L.MID/ H.MID
Sets the range affected by black gamma.
BLACK GAM LEVEL (–99 to 99)
TEST OUT SELECT VBS /Y/R/G/B
KNEE OFF/ ON
Adjusts the master black gamma.
Selects the output signal of TEST
OUT connector.
Turns the knee correction circuit on or off.
Sets the knee point level.
KNEE POINT (M)
KNEE SLOPE (M)
50.0% to 95.0% to
109.0%
(–99 to 99)
KNEE SATURATION OFF/ ON
Set the knee slope level.
KNEE SAT LEVEL
WHITE CLIP
(–99 to 99)
OFF/ ON
Turns the knee saturation function on or off.
Sets the knee saturation level.
Turns the white clipping function on or off.
Adjusts the white clipping level.
WHITE CLIP LEVEL NTSC: 95.0% to
108.0% to 109.0%
PAL: 95.0% to 108.0% to 109.0%
KNEE SATURATION OFF/ ON
KNEE POINT (R)
KNEE SLOPE (R)
KNEE POINT (G)
–45.0% to
14.0%
(–99 to 99)
0.0% to
–45.0% to 0.0% to
14.0%
Turns the Knee Saturation function on and off.
When KNEE SATURATION is set to OFF, set the RGB knee point levels and knee slope levels individually.
KNEE SLOPE (G)
KNEE POINT (B)
KNEE SLOPE (B)
DETAIL
(–99 to 99)
–45.0% to 0.0% to
14.0%
(–99 to 99)
OFF/ ON
APERTURE
DETAIL LEVEL
APERTURE LEVEL
DTL H/V RATIO
CRISPENING
LEVEL DEPEND
OFF/
OFF/
ON
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
ON
LEVEL DEPEND LVL (–99 to 99)
DETAIL FREQUENCY (–99 to 99)
Sets the detail correction function on or off.
Turns the aperture correction function on or off.
Sets the general level of the detail signal.
Sets the aperture correction level.
Sets the level of the V detail signal.
Sets the crispening level.
Turns the level depend function on or off.
Sets the level of the level depend.
Sets the frequency of the H detail signal.
162
No.
Page
09 DETAIL 2
Item
KNEE APERTURE
KNEE APT LVL
DETAIL LIMIT
Settings
OFF /ON
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
DTL WHT LMT
DTL BLK LMT
DTL V-BLK LMT
V DTL CREATION
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
NAM/G/
H/V CONTROL MODE H/V / V
R+G /Y
10 SD DETAIL SD DETAIL OFF/ ON
SD DETAIL LEVEL (–99 to 99)
SD CRISPENING (–99 to 99)
SD DTL WHT LIMIT (–99 to 99)
SD DTL BLK LIMIT (–99 to 99)
SD LEVEL DEPEND OFF/ ON
SD LV DEPEND LVL (–99 to 99)
SD DTL FREQUENCY (–99 to 99)
SD DTL H/V RATIO (–99 to 99)
SD CROSS COLOR
(When NTSC(J)AREA or NTSC AREA is selected on the
FORMAT page)
(–99 to 99)
Description
Turns the knee aperture function on or off.
Sets the knee aperture level.
Sets the both detail black and white limiters.
Sets the detail white limiter.
Sets the detail black limiter.
Sets the V detail black limiter.
Selects the source signal of the V
DTL signal.
Selects the operation mode of
DTL H/V RATIO on the
DETAIL 1 page.
H/V: H and V increase and decrease in inverse proportion
V: V DTL only enabled
Turns the SD detail correction on or off.
Sets the general level of the SD detail signal.
Sets the SD crispening level.
Sets the SD detail white limiter.
Sets the SD detail black limiter.
Turns the SD level depend function on or off.
Sets the level of the SD level depend.
Sets the frequency of the SD H detail signal.
Sets the level of the SD V detail signal.
Sets the SD cross color reduction level.
163
No.
Page
11
Item
SKIN DETAIL SKIN DETAIL ALL
SKIN DETECT
SKIN AREA IND
SKIN DETAIL LVL
SKIN DTL SAT
Settings
SKIN DTL SELECT 1 /2/3
SKIN DETAIL OFF/ ON
Description
OFF/ ON
Moves to color detection page.
Executes the color detail function.
OFF /ON
Turns on or off all of channels 1,
2 and 3 for the color detail function.
Turns on and off the function that displays a zebra pattern where color was detected.
When this is ON, a zebra pattern is output from the following connectors.
• SDI OUT 2 connector (when all of the following are true: SDI
OUT 2 SELECT on the OUTPUT
1 page is set to HDSDI, SDI OUT
2 SUPER is set to ON, and either
SUPER(MENU) or
SUPER(ZEBRA) on the SUPER
IMPOSE page is set to ON)
• TEST OUT connector (when both of the following are true: TEST
OUT SUPER on the OUTPUT 1 page is set to ON, and
SUPER(MENU) or
SUPER(ZEBRA) on the SUPER
IMPOSE page is set to ON)
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
Selects the skin detail channel.
Sets CH 1/2/3, selected avobe, on/off.
Sets the level of the color detail signal.
Adjusts the saturation level of the hue possessed by the color detail function.
SKIN DTL HUE
SKIN DTL WIDTH
0 to 359
0 to 39 to 359
Adjusts the center phase of the hue possessed by the color detail function.
Adjusts the width of the hue possessed by the color detail function.
164
No.
Page
12
Item
MTX LINEAR MATRIX
MATRIX(USER)
Settings
OFF /ON
OFF /ON
MATRIX(PRESET) OFF/ ON
MATRIX(PRST) SEL 1/ 2 /3/4/5/6
MATRIX(USER) R-G (–99 to 99)
MATRIX(USER) R-B (–99 to 99)
MATRIX(USER) G-R (–99 to 99)
MATRIX(USER) G-B (–99 to 99)
MATRIX(USER) B-R (–99 to 99)
MATRIX(USER) B-G (–99 to 99)
Description
Turns the linear matrix correction and user-set matrix correction functions on or off.
Turns the user-set matrix correction function on or off.
Turns the preset matrix correction function on or off.
Selects the preset matrix correction function.
1: SMPTE 240M equivalent
2: ITU-709 equivalent
3: SMPTE WIDE equivalent
4: NTSC equivalent
5: EBU equivalent
6: ITU-601 equivalent
Sets the arbitrary R-G user-set matrix coefficients.
Sets the arbitrary R-B user-set matrix coefficients.
Sets the arbitrary G-R user-set matrix coefficients.
Sets the arbitrary G-B user-set matrix coefficients.
Sets the arbitrary B-R user-set matrix coefficients.
Sets the arbitrary B-G user-set matrix coefficients.
165
No.
Page
13 MTX MULTI
Item
MATRIX
ADAPTIVE MATRIX
MATRIX (MULTI)
Settings
OFF
OFF/
ADAPTIVE MAX LVL 0 to
OFF
/ON
3
ON
to 7
/ON
Description
Turns the linear matrix correction and multi matrix correction functions on or off.
Turns the adaptive matrix correction function (brightness tracking) on or off.
Sets the correction level of the adaptive matrix correction function.
Turns the multi matrix correction function on or off.
MATRIX AREA IND OFF /ON Turns the zebra indication on or off in the area corresponding to the currently selected setting.
MATRIX COLOR DET Moves to color detection page.
Detects color.
14
15
MTX(MULTI)PRESET EXEC Return MTX(MULTI)HUE and
MTX(MULTI)SAT values to preset values for each of the 16 axes.
MTX (MULTI) AXIS B /B+/MG–/MG/MG+/
R/R+/YL–/YL/YL+/G–/
G/G+/CY/CY+/B–
MTX (MULTI) HUE (–99 to 99)
MTX (MULTI) SAT (–99 to 99)
Sets 16 hue axes as the targets of the multi matrix correction function.
Sets hue correction values for each of the 16 axis modes.
Sets saturation correction values for each of the 16 axis modes.
V MODULATION V MOD OFF/ ON
MASTER VMOD
R VMOD
G VMOD
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
Turns the V modulation function on or off.
Adjusts the master V modulation level.
Adjusts the R V modulation level.
Adjusts the G V modulation level.
B VMOD
TEST OUT SELECT
SATURATION LOW KEY SAT
L KEY SAT LEVEL
(–99 to 99)
VBS
OFF
/Y/R/G/B
/ON
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the B V modulation level.
Selects the output signal of the
TEST OUT connector.
Turns the low key saturation function on or off.
Sets the saturation level of the low luminance part.
L KEY SAT RANGE LOW/L.MID/ H.MID
Sets the luminance level at which the low key saturation function becomes effective.
166
No.
16
Page
SATURATION
MODE
Item Settings
SATURATION MODE KNEE /L KEY
KNEE SATURATION
BLACK GAMMA
LOW KEY SAT
17
18
NOISE
SUPPRESS
NOISE SUPPRESS OFF/ ON
NOISE SUP LEVEL OFF/ LOW /HIGH
SCENE FILE 1
2
3
4
5
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
–
SCENE RECALL
SCENE STORE
F.ID
OFF
OFF
/ON
OFF /ON
/ON
EXEC
EXEC
Blank /up to 16 characters
Description
Switches the saturation function mode.
High-intensity processing
(KNEE SAT) or low-intensity processing (BLACK GAMMA/
LOWKEY AST) can be selected.
Turns the knee saturation on/off when SATURATION MODE is set to KNEE.
Turns black gamma correction on/off when SATURATION
MODE is set to L.KEY.
Turns the LOW KEY
SATURATION function on/off when SATURATION MODE is set to L.KEY.
Turn on and off the noise suppression function.
Selects the level of the noise suppression function.
Recalls the scene file saved in the memory of the camcorder.
Clears all current detail-adjusted settings and switch settings and returns the settings to the standard settings saved in the reference file.
Recalls the scene file from the memory of the camcorder or the
USB flash drive.
Stores the scene file in the memory of the camcorder or the
USB flash drive.
Sets the File ID.
167
MAINTENANCE menu
No.
Page
01 WHITE
SHADING
02
03
BLACK
SHADING
LEVEL
ADJUST
Item
WHT SHAD CH
SEL
TEST OUT
SELECT
R/G/B WHT H
SAW
R/G/B WHT H
PARA
R/G/B WHT V
SAW
R/G/B WHT V
PARA
WHITE SAW/
PARA
BLK SHAD CH
SEL
TEST OUT
SELECT
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
OFF/
R
ON
/G/B/TEST
Turns white shading Saw and Parabola compensation on and off.
Selects the channel adjusted by this menu. If
“TEST” is selected, the setting is the same as the setting of TEST OUT SELECT.
VBS /Y/R/G/B Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT connector.
R/G/B BLK H SAW (–99 to 99)
R/G/B BLK H
PARA
R/G/B BLK V SAW (–99 to 99)
R/G/B BLK V
PARA
BLACK SAW/
PARA
Settings
R /G/B/TEST
VBS /Y/R/G/B Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
OFF/ ON
Description
Selects the channel adjusted by this menu. If
TEST is selected, the setting is linked to the setting of TEST OUT SELECT.
connector.
H Saw white shading compensation.
H Parabola white shading compensation.
V Saw white shading compensation.
V Parabola white shading compensation.
H Saw black shading compensation.
H Parabola black shading compensation.
V Saw black shading compensation.
V Parabola black shading compensation.
Turns black shading Saw and Parabola compensation on and off.
MASTER BLACK (–99 to 99)
MASTER
GAIN(TMP)
–6dB/–3dB/ 0dB
3dB/6dB/9dB/
12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/
36dB/42dB
/
Master black level adjustment.
Temporarily adjusts the master gain value.
VBS VIDEO
LEVEL
(–99 to 99) Adjusts the composite signal video level.
HD-Y LEVEL
TEST OUT
SELECT
(–99 to 99) Adjusts the Y level of the HD component signal.
VBS /Y/R/G/B Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT connector.
168
No.
Page
04 BATTERY 1
Note
Item Settings
Info BEFORE END 5% /10%/
15%...95%/
100%
For your safety, and to ensure proper operation of the camcorder,
Sony recommends the use of the following battery packs:
BP-L80S and
BP-FL75.
Info END
Sony BEFORE END
Sony END
0% /1%/2%/3%/
4%/5%
11.5V
(in 0.1V steps)
11.0V
to 17.0V
to 11.5V
(in 0.1V steps)
Other BEFORE
END
Other END
END
BATTERY
c)
DC IN BEFORE
DC IN END
DETECTED
Description
Used when a BP-GL65A/GL95A/FLX75
Battery Pack is used. Sets the remaining power (% value) of the battery at which the
BEFORE END warning should be issued.
Used when a BP-GL65A/GL95A/FLX75
Battery Pack is used. Sets the remaining power (% value) of the battery at which the
END warning should be issued.
Used when a BP-L60S/L80S Battery Pack is used. Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued.
a)
11.5V to
11.0V
11.8V
to 17.0V (in
0.1V steps)
to 14.0V
(in 0.1 V steps)
11.5V to 11.8V
to 17.0V (in 0.1
V steps)
Used when a BP-L60S/L80S Battery Pack is used. Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the END warning should be issued. b)
Used when a battery pack other than a Sony battery pack is used. Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued.
Used when a battery pack other than a Sony battery pack is used. Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the END warning should be issued.
Used when an external power source is connected to the DC IN connector. Sets the voltage level of the connected external power source at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued.
11.0V
to 14.0V
(in 0.1 V steps)
Used when an external power source is connected to the DC IN connector. Sets the voltage level of the connected external power source at which the END warning should be issued.
Info/Sony/Other/
DC IN
Displays the type of automatically detected battery.
169
No.
Page
05 BATTERY 2
Item
TYPE DETECTION
SEGMENT NO.6
SEGMENT NO.4
SEGMENT NO.3
SEGMENT NO.2
SEGMENT NO.1
Settings
AUTO
11.0V
/OTHER
SEGMENT NO.7
11.0V to 17.0V
(in 0.1 V steps)
11.0V to
11.0V to to 17.0V (in 0.1
V steps)
11.0V to to 17.0V (in 0.1
V steps)
11.0V to
V steps)
16.0V
14.0V
13.0V
12.0V
to 17.0V
(in 0.1 V steps) to 17.0V (in 0.1
V steps)
SEGMENT NO.5
11.0V to 15.0V
to 17.0V (in 0.1
V steps) to 17.0V (in 0.1
Description
AUTO: Automatically detects the type of the battery.
OTHER: Always judges the battery to be of the “OTHER” c)
type regardless of the actual battery type.
When the battery type judgment is “OTHER”, sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment
No.7 should turn off.
When the battery type judgment is “OTHER”, sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment
No. 6 should turn off.
When the battery type judgment is “OTHER”, sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment
No. 5 should turn off.
When the battery type judgment is “OTHER”, sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment
No. 4 should turn off.
When the battery type judgment is “OTHER”, sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment
No. 3 should turn off.
When the battery type judgment is “OTHER”, sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment
No. 2 should turn off.
When the battery type judgment is “OTHER”, sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment
No. 1 should turn off.
Battery status indicator segments
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(“E”
d)
and “F” are always on.)
170
No.
Page
06 AUDIO-1
07 AUDIO-2
Item Settings Description
FRONT MIC
SELECT
AUDIO CH3/4
MODE
REAR XLR AUTO
MONO/
CH1/2/
OFF
STREO
SW
/ON
FRONT MIC REF –60dB/ –50dB /
REAR MIC REF
MIN ALARM VOL
–40dB
–60dB
–40dB
OFF
/–50dB/
/SET
Input mode selection for front microphone.
Selects the sources to be recorded to channels
CH-3/4.
CH1/2 : Same sources as CH-1/2.
SW: Signals selected by the AUDIO IN CH-
3/CH-4 switches.
Turns the XLR connection automatic detection on or off.
Sets the reference level of the front microphone.
Sets the reference level when the AUDIO IN
CH1 connector is set to MIC.
Volume of the monitor speaker alarm tone when it is turned all the way down.
OFF: Almost inaudible.
SET: Faintly audible.
SP ATT LEVEL OFF /3dB/6dB/
9dB
HEADPHONE OUT MONO /STREO Selects whether to make the rear earphone monaural or stereo.
16bit /24bit
Lowers the volume of the monitor speaker.
Has no effect on earphone volume.
AU DATA LEN
(IMX)
AU REF LEVEL
For details, see “Setting the Recording
Sets the output level of the 1 kHz test signal.
–20dB /–18dB/
–16dB/–12dB/
EBUL
AU REF OUT 0dB /+4dB/
–3dB/EBUL
Sets the output reference level.
AU CH12 AGC
MODE
AU CH34 AGC
MODE
AU AGC SPEC
MONO /STREO Selects whether to perform automatic input level adjustment of analog audio signals to be recorded on channels 1 and 2 independently for each channel, or in stereo mode.
MONO /STREO/
OFF
Selects whether to perform automatic input level adjustment of analog audio signals to be recorded on channels 3 and 4 independently for each channel, or in stereo mode, or not at all (OFF).
–6dB /–9dB/
–12dB/–15dB/
–17dB
AGC saturation level setting.
AU LIMITER
MODE
OFF /–6dB/
–9dB/–12dB/
–15dB/–17dB
AU OUT LIMITER OFF/ ON
For manual audio input level adjustment, selects the limiter saturation level for loud input signals.
Turns the audio output limiter on or off.
171
No.
Page
08 AUDIO-3
Item Settings Description
AU SG (1KHz) ON/ OFF /AUTO Sets whether to output a 1 kHz test tone during the Color Bar mode or not.
ON: A 1 kHz test tone is output during the
Color Bar mode.
OFF: A 1 kHz test tone is not output during the Color Bar mode.
AUTO: A 1 kHz test tone is output only when the AUDIO SELECT CH-1 switch on the inside panel is in the AUTO position.
MIC CH1 LEVEL SIDE1/ FRONT /
F+S1
When recording the front microphone sound on CH 1, selects which control is to be used for the level adjustment.
SIDE 1: LEVEL control (left side)
FRONT: MIC LEVEL control
F+S1: LEVEL control (left side) or the MIC
LEVEL control (The two controls are linked to each other.)
MIC CH2 LEVEL SIDE2/ FRONT /
F+S2
When recording the front microphone sound on CH 2, selects which control is to be used for the level adjustment.
SIDE 2: LEVEL control (right side)
FRONT: MIC LEVEL control
F+S2: LEVEL control (right side) or the MIC
LEVEL control (The two controls are linked to each other.)
REAR1/WRR
LEVEL
SIDE1 /FRONT/
F+S1
REAR2/WRR
LEVEL
SIDE2
F+S2
/FRONT/
Selects any of these controls to adjust the audio level of the equipment that is connected to the wireless microphone and whatever is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 connector on the rear panel.
SIDE 1: LEVEL control (left side)
FRONT: MIC LEVEL control
F+S1: LEVEL control (left side) or the MIC
LEVEL control (The two controls are linked to each other.)
Selects any of these controls to adjust the audio level of the equipment that is connected to the wireless microphone and whatever is connected to the AUDIO IN CH2 connector on the rear panel.
SIDE 2: LEVEL control (right side)
FRONT: MIC LEVEL control
F+S2: LEVEL control (right side) or the MIC
LEVEL control (The two controls are linked to each other.)
AUDIO CH3
LEVEL
e)
FIX /FRONT Selects the audio level recorded on channel 3.
FIX: Fixed
FRONT: Level as adjusted by the MIC
LEVEL control on the front panel of the camcorder
172
No.
Page
08 AUDIO-3
Item
AUDIO CH4
LEVEL
e)
Settings
FIX /FRONT
Description
Selects the audio level recorded on channel 4.
FIX: Fixed
FRONT: Level as adjusted by the MIC
LEVEL control on the front panel of the camcorder
173
No.
Page
09 WRR
SETTING
Item
WRR VALID CH
SEL
f)
WRR CH SELECT
WRR DELAY
COMP
TX*
f)
(*: channel number)
(*: channel number)
(*: channel number)
TX* ATT LEVEL
(*: channel number)
TX* LCF FREQ
(*: channel number)
f)
f)
TX* AUDIO PEAK
f)
TX* INPUT LEVEL
f)
f)
f)
Settings
ALL
TX1
OFF/
–
---
–
–
/CH1
/TX2
ON
/PEAK
MIC/LINE
TX* SYSTEM
DELAY
(*: channel number) f)
AUTO /
0.0ms~8.0ms
Description
Selects whether to enable channels 1 and 2 of the wireless receiver, or channel 1 only.
ALL: Enable both channel 1 and 2.
CH1: Enable channel 1 only. Select this setting to use the wireless receiver as a monaural receiver.
Specifies the target channel for other items in this menu.
TX1: Channel 1
TX2: Channel 2
Enables or disables the delay compensation function for wireless audio input.
OFF: Disables the function.
ON: Enables the function (the audio in all EE output is delayed by about 8 ms).
Displays the name of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT.
The channel number and name shown here are recorded inside the <Description> tag in the clip metadata file C*M01.XML (where * is
0001 to 9999).
Displays whether the AF level of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT is over the peak.
Displays whether the input level of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT is set to MIC or LINE.
Sets the ATT level of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT (the permissible setting range may vary depending on the transmitter device).
Sets the Low Cut Filter frequency of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT
(the permissible setting range may vary depending on the transmitter device).
Sets the amount of audio delay for the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT.
AUTO: Automatically adjusts the amount of delay so that the delay in the audio received from the wireless receiver is zero.
0.0ms~8.0ms: Sets the amount of anticipated wireless system delay, for cases in several wireless systems are being used over a device such as an audio mixer.
174
No.
Page
10 TIMECODE
Item
TC OUT
DF/NDF
(When SYSTEM
FREQUENCY is set to 59.94i, 29.97P, or
59.94P)
Settings Description
AUTO /GENE Selects the timecode signal output.
AUTO: Outputs the timecode generator output during recording and outputs the timecode reader output during playback.
GENE: Outputs the timecode generator output during recording and playback.
DF /NDF
EXT-LK DF/NDF
(When SYSTEM
FREQUENCY is set to 59.94i, 29.97P, or
59.94P)
INT /EXT
Sets DF or NDF mode.
DF: Drop frame mode
NDF: Non-drop frame mode
Selects either internal setting or external setting for DF/NDF.
INT: Internal
EXT: External
EXT-LK UBIT
LTC UBIT
INT /EXT
FIX /TIME
Sets whether the LTC UBIT setup value locks to an INT or an EXT source when the timecode is locked to an external source.
INT: Internal lock
EXT: External lock
Sets the data to be recorded in U-BIT of LTC.
FIX: Records the data that is set by the user.
TIME: Records the present time.
VITC UBIT (SD)
WATCH AUTO
ADJ
FIX /TIME
OFF/ ON
Sets the data to be recorded in U-BIT of
VITC.
FIX: Records the data that is set by the user.
TIME: Records the present time.
Matches the time of the internal clock with the time data of the user bits of an external timecode. Turns the automatic time correction function of the internal clock on or off.
UBIT GROUP ID 000 /101 Selects the U-BIT GROUP ID.
VITC INS LINE 1 NTSC: 12H to
16H to 19H
PAL: 9H to 19H to 22H
Selects the line into which VITC is to be inserted.
VITC INS LINE 2 NTSC: 12H to
18H to 19H
PAL: 9H to 21H to 22H
175
No.
Page
11 ESSENCE
MARK
Item Settings
RET SHOT MARK
1
OFF/ ON
RET SHOT MARK
2
OFF/ ON
Description
For details, see “Recording essence marks”
INDEX PIC POS 0SEC to 10SEC
(in 1 sec steps)
For details, see “Setting the thumbnail image at recording time” (page 81).
FIND MODE R.ST
/CLIP Specify the frame to be cued up when the
PREV or NEXT button is pressed.
R.ST: The frame where a Rec Start essence mark is set
CLIP: The first frame of the clip
176
No.
Page
12 CAM
CONFIG 1
Item
REC TALLY
BLINK
REC START BEEP
Settings
OFF/
OFF
ON
/ON
Description
Turns the tally illumination control on or off when the battery is almost exhausted or the disc is almost full.
Turns the REC START/STOP alarm sound on or off.
SDI REC
CONTROL
OFF /RM/PARA Specifies the function for enabling synchronized recording with the unit.
RM: A REC trigger signal is output to the recorder connected to the SDI OUT connector.
PARA: Controls synchronized recording with the unit.
HDSDI REMOTE I/F CHARA /
G-TLY/R-TLY
Selects whether to use the function that enables recording control from this unit of an external device connected to the CA (camera adaptor) or one of the SDI OUT 1/2 connectors (HDSDI output) of this unit. g)
Also selects the indication that shows whether the external device is recording.
CHARA: Use the function, and indicate by the controlling external device indicator in the viewfinder
G-TLY: Use the function, and indicate by the
TALLY indicator in the viewfinder.
R-TLY : Use the function, and indicate by the
REC (recording, red tally) indicator in the viewfinder.
Note
MATCH CLIP
NAME
OFF /ON
When R-TLY is selected, the TALLY indicator lights even when the unit is not recording.
Specifies whether to superimpose clip name information on the HDSDI output on the
SDIOUT 1/2 connectors. A clip with the same name as on the camera is created on supported devices.
PROAV DISPLAY DSABL /ENABL Specifies whether to display the PROAV directory when this unit is accessed via an
FTP connection.
DSABL: Do not display.
ENABL: Display.
MIXED
RECORDING
DSABL /ENABL
For details, see “Mixed recording of clips in different formats on the same disc” (page 52).
SINGLE CLIP
MODE
PB POSITION
OFF /ON
KEEP /TOP
For details, see “Clip playback modes”
When you switch between the clip playback screen and the clip list playback screen, specifies the clip or sub clip playback start position.
KEEP: Play from the position where playback stopped.
TOP: Play from the first frame of the first clip or sub clip.
177
No.
Page
13 CAM
CONFIG 2
Item
TEST SAW
SELECT
COLOR BAR
SELECT
USER & ALL
ONLY
RM COMMON
MEMORY
Settings
SAW /REC
ARIB
OFF
/100%/
75%/SMPTE
/ON
Description
Selects the test signal.
Selects the HD color bar type.
Show only USER menu in the top menu.
RM REC START
SHT DISP MODE
RM F NO DISPLAY
FAN CONTROL
OFF
RM /CAM/
PARA
SEC
/ON
/DEG
CTRL /RET
AUTO /R.MIN/
MIN
Selects whether or not to share settings for when a remote control unit is connected and when the unit is used alone.
When an RM remote control unit is connected, selects which recording start/stop buttons are enabled.
RM: remote control unit
CAM: camcorder
PARA: both
Selects shutter speed display (seconds or degrees).
Switches the iris F value display type on remote control units such as the MSU-900.
CTRL: Display based on control value from camera
RET: Display based on position value from lens
Specifies the control method for the cooling fan. (This setting is retained even when the unit is powered off.)
AUTO: Control the rotation of the cooling fan automatically.
R.MIN: Rotate the cooling fan at low speed during recording only (and stop the rotation when this unit is used in an environment so cool that temperatures inside the unit do not rise).
MIN: Rotate the cooling fan at low speed
(and stop the rotation when this unit is used in an environment so cool that temperatures inside the unit do not rise).
Note
Regardless of this setting, the cooling fan rotates at high speed if temperatures inside the unit rise to a temperature near the alarm level.
178
No.
Page
14 CAM
CONFIG 3
15 PRESET
WHITE
Item
ALAC
Settings
OFF/ AUTO
Description
Specifies whether to activate the aberration correction function.
OFF: Do not activate.
AUTO: Activate aberration correction when a lens that supports aberration correction is mounted.
Note
COLOR TEMP <P> Display reference color temperature.
C TEMP BAL <P> (–99 to 99)
For some aberration correction lenses, the aberration correction function may not activate
(“ALAC” does not appear in the viewfinder) immediately after this unit is powered on, even when this item is set to “AUTO”. If this occurs, turn the zoom and focus rings of the lens all the way to one side, and then check to make sure that
“ALAC” has appeared in the viewfinder.
Contact your dealer or a Sony service representative for more information about lenses that support aberration correction.
Wi-Fi/ETHER RM OFF /RM/ALL Selects remote control of the camera using a
Wi-Fi or Ethernet connection.
OFF: Remote control disabled.
RM: Remote control operation of the camera is supported via an CBK-WA100, but main-line output (broadcast) is not supported.
ALL: Remote control of the camera and main-line output (broadcast) is supported.
Sets the white balance preset value.
R GAIN <P>
G GAIN <P>
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
AWB ENABLE <P> OFF /ON
Finer setting when the desired color could not be obtained with the COLOR TEMP <P> color temperature setting.
Sets the R gain preset value.
Sets the G gain preset value.
When the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST, turns the function that enables execution of
AWB (auto white balance) on and off.
179
No.
16
17
Page Item
DCC ADJUST DCC FUNCTION
SEL
Settings
DCC /FIX
Description
Enables or disables automatic knee point adjustment when the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to CAM, DCC: ON.
DCC: Automatically adjust the knee point according to the luminance of the subject.
FIX: Set the knee point to a fixed value.
Sets the dynamic range when the OUTPUT/
DCC switch is set to CAM, DCC: ON.
DCC D RANGE
DCC POINT
DCC GAIN
400%/450%/
500%/550%/
600%
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the DCC minimum knee point.
Adjusts the gain to DCC detected value.
DCC DELAY TIME (–99 to 99)
DCC PEAK FILTER (–99 to 99)
AUTO IRIS 2 IRIS WINDOW
IRIS WINDOW
IND
Adjusts the DCC reaction speed.
Adjusts the response sensitivity to the peak of the DCC detected value.
1 /2/3/4/5/6/VAR Selects the auto iris detection window.
VAR: variable
OFF /ON Turns on and off the function which displays a frame marker for the auto iris detection window.
IRIS LEVEL
IRIS APL RATIO
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the level of the auto iris target value.
Adjusts the mix ratio of auto iris detection peak value and average value.
IRIS VAR WIDTH 20 to 240 to 479 Adjusts the width of detection frame when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR.
IRIS VAR HEIGHT 20 to 135 to 269 Adjusts the height of detection frame when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR.
IRIS VAR H POS –240 to 0 to 239 Adjusts the horizontal position of detection frame when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR.
IRIS VAR V POS –135 to 0 to 134 Adjusts the vertical position of detection frame when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR.
IRIS SPEED (–99 to 99)
CLIP HIGH LIGHT OFF /ON
Adjusts the auto iris speed.
Turns on and off the function which, during auto iris adjustment, ignores very bright areas by dulling the reaction to high luminescence.
180
No.
Page
18
19
20
21
GENLOCK
ND COMP
AUTO
SHADING
APR
Item
GENLOCK
Settings
OFF/ ON
GL HD H PHASE (–99 to 99)
Description
Turns genlock on and off.
Sets the HD output H phase for genlock operation.
Sets the SD output H phase for genlock operation.
GL SD H PHASE
(Does not appear when the FORMAT page item SYSTEM
LINE is set to 1080 and the SYSTEM
FREQUENCY item is set to 23.9P)
(–99 to 99)
REFERENCE
ND OFFSET
ADJUST
INTERNAL/
GENLOCK/
SDI IN
OFF /ON
Displays the type of reference signal used by this unit.
Turns on and off the mode which sets ND
(neutral density) filter color compensation values.
Clears ND filter color compensation values.
CLEAR ND
OFFSET
AUTO BLK
SHADING
EXEC
RESET BLK SHD EXEC
TEST OUT
SELECT
VBS /Y/R/G/B
Clear black shading compensation values.
Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT connector.
MASTER
GAIN(TMP)
–6dB/–3dB/ 0dB / Temporarily sets the master gain value.
3dB/6dB/9dB/
12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/
36dB/42dB
APR
APR(SLS)
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
Executes the auto black shading correction function.
If executed when in SLS (slow-speed shutter) mode, this performs only fine compensation on edge portions of the screen.
Suppresses white flecks by executing the automatic pixel noise reduction function.
Suppresses white flecks in SLS (Slow Speed
Shutter) mode by executing the automatic pixel noise reduction function.
h)
APR PRESET
APR ON ABB
EXEC
OFF /ON
Note
The execution time for this function is about
30 minutes. More time may be required when temperatures inside the unit are low.
Deletes white flecks data that was added by execution of the APR and automatic black balance adjustment functions.
OFF: Do not execute APR on ABB.
ON: Execute APR on ABB.
181
No.
Page
22 NETWORK 1
Item Settings
NETWORK SETUP EXEC
Note
This menu is not used when using the CBK-
WA100
Wireless
Adaptor.
SECURITY
DHCP
IP ADDRESS
DEF.GATEWAY
Display only
Display only
Display only
SUBNET MASK Display only
Display only
NETWORK
SETTING
LINK SPEED
DUPLEX
DNS1
UPnP
SECURITY
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
LEVEL1
LEVEL2
/
Note
This menu is not used when using the CBK-
WA100
Wireless
Adaptor.
DHCP ENABLE/
DISABLE
Description
Displays the NETWORK SETTING page, so that you can make network settings.
Network security level
Enables or disables automatic acquisition of an IP address from a DHCP server
IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway
Link speed
Communications method
DNS server 1
Enable or disable UPnP.
LEVEL1: Do not encrypt user name and password for HTTP communications.
Clips are transferred using FTP.
LEVEL2: Encrypt user name and password for HTTP communications. Clips are transferred using FTPS.
Direct FTP transfer, live logging function, and thumbnail display on webpages are not supported.
Selects whether to enable automatic acquisition of the IP address from a DHCP server.
Notes
IP ADDRESS
• IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and
DNS server 1 and 2 cannot be set when DHCP is set to “ENABLE”.
• To check automatically acquired settings, close the menu and open it again.
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
192.168.1.10
Set the IP address of this unit.
SUBNET MASK xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
255.255.255.0
Sets the subnet mask.
DEF.GATEWAY
LINK SPEED
DUPLEX
DNS1 xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
0.0.0.0
Set the address of the default gateway.
AUTO /10Mbps/
100Mbps
Sets the communications speed.
AUTO /FULL/
HALF
Sets the duplex mode.
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
0.0.0.0
Set the address of DNS server 1.
DNS2
UPnP xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
0.0.0.0
Set the address of DNS server 2.
DISABLE /
ENABLE
Select whether to enable the UPnP (universal plug and play) function.
DISABLE: Disable the UPnP function.
ENABLE: Enable the UPnP function.
182
No.
Page
23
24
NETWORK 2 NET CFG RESET
WPS
Item
MAC
Wi-Fi
WPS MODE
PIN
WPS START
WPS STATUS
Settings
EXEC
Display only
UPDATE
EXEC
Display only
Description
Reset network settings to the factory defaults.
MAC address of this unit
DSABL /ENABL
For details, see “To specify a connection
ONE PUSH /
destination by WPS operations” (page 215).
PIN CODE
183
No.
Page
25 Wi-Fi
Note
This menu is not used when using the CBK-
WA100
Wireless
Adaptor.
Item
Wi-Fi SETUP
Wi-Fi STATUS
Settings
EXEC
[-----]/
[ xxxxx
CONNECT
]/
(display only)
WIRELESS MODE ----/802.11b/
802.11g/802.11n
(display only)
Description
Displays the Wi-Fi SETTING page so that you can make wireless LAN settings.
Communication/connection status xxxxx : Displays the signal strength by the number of
CONNECT: sequence
SSID (unknown)/up to
32 characters
Network name
(display only)
NETWORK TYPE ----/INFRA/
ADHOC
(display only)
Connection mode x ’s.
Executing the connection
IEEE 802.11 standard
CH
AUTH
--/1 to 14
(display only. 13
Wireless channel and 14 are for automatically detected channels only.)
----/OPEN/
SHARED/WPA/
WPA2 (display only)
Network authentication
Wi-Fi
SETTING
ENCRYPTION
SCAN
NETWORKS
----/DISABLE/
WEP/TKIP/AES
Data encryption
(display only)
EXEC
Note
SSID Blank /up to 32 characters
This menu is not used when using the CBK-
WA100
Wireless
Adaptor.
NETWORK TYPE
CH
AUTH
INFRA/
ADHOC
1 to 11
OPEN
WPA2
/
SHARED/WPA/
For details, see “Setting up a wireless LAN”
ENCRYPTION DISABLE /
WEP/TKIP/AES
WEP KEY INDEX 1 /2/3/4
INPUT SELECT ASCII5 /
ASCII13/
HEX10/HEX26
KEY Blank /up to 26 characters
184
No.
Page
26 UP
CONVERTER
Item Settings Description
UP CON PROCESS FIELD/ ADPT Selects the conversion source picture when
SD is upconverted to HD.
FIELD: Use the field picture.
ADPT: Optimize the ratio of conversion from the frame or field picture.
UC DETAIL
LEVEL
(–99 to 99)
UC CRISPENING (–8 to 7)
UC DETAIL LIMIT (–99 to 99)
Adjusts the sharpness of edge enhancement by the upconverter.
Sets the amplitude width at which the upconverter does not emphasize lowamplitude signals.
Sets the maximum level of edge enhancement by the upconverter.
27 SHUTTER
SELECT
UC LV DEPEND
LVL
UC DTL
FREQUENCY
UC DTL H/V
RATIO
(–8 to 7)
3.2M/4.5M/
5.0M
/4.0M
(–3 to 4)
SHUTTER SELECT SECOND /
DEGREE
Sets the luminance of edge enhancement by the upconverter.
Sets the center frequency and frequency properties of edge enhancement by the upconverter.
3.2M: 3.2 ± 1.1 MHz
4.5M: 4.5 ± 1.4 MHz
5.0M: 5.0 ± 0.7 MHz
4.0M: 4.0 ± 2.0 MHz
Sets the horizontal/vertical ratio of edge enhancement by the upconverter.
Selects the shutter speed display unit.
SECOND: Second units
DEGREE: Degree units (shutter opening angle)
DEL
(only when
SHUTTER SELECT is set to “DEGREE”)
–
See page 60 for more information about
degree unit settings.
ADD
(only when
SHUTTER SELECT is set to “DEGREE”)
360.0 to 180.0
to Registers a shutter degree setting in an empty
4.5 (upper limit of shutter angle degrees) number from 1 to 6 (this item is disabled if no number is empty).
Deletes the setting assigned to a number from
1 to 6 (numbers with no settings assigned cannot be selected).
1 to 6
(only when
SHUTTER SELECT is set to “DEGREE”)
Display only Displays the shutter opening angle assigned to number 1 to 6, and the corresponding speed in second units, as calculated on the basis of the selected frame rate.This differs as follows, depending on the setting of SYSTEM
FREQUENCY.
59.94i, 29.97P: 1: 216.0, 2: 180.0, 3: 90.0, 4:
45.0, 5: 22.5, 6: 11.2
50i, 25P: 1: 180.0, 2: 150.0, 3: 90.0, 4: 45.0,
5: 22.5, 6: 11.2
23.98P
: 1: 180.0, 2: 172.8, 3: 144.0, 4: 45.0,
5: 22.5, 6: 11.2
185
No.
Page
28
29
META OUT
Item
META DATA ITEM
OUT
Settings
OFF/ ON
Description
Sets whether to put recorded VANC packet information in DATA ITEM in MXF files when transferring files via FTP.
OFF: Do not include VANC packet information.
ON: Include VANC packet information.
Sets the type of the INTERCOM microphone.
HEADSET
SELECT
(CA-FB70,
CA-TX70
Camera
Adaptors only)
INTER MIC SEL
INTER MIC
LEVEL
DYNAMIC
CARBON/
MANUAL
–20dB
/
–60dB/–40dB/ Sets the level of the INTERCOM microphone
(–60dB is seleted when MIC SEL is set to
DYNAMIC, and –20dB is seleted when MIC
SEL is set to CARBON).
INTER MIC GAIN –6dB/ 0dB /+6dB Sets the gain of the INTERCOM microphone.
INTER MIC
POWER
OFF/ON Turns the power supply for the INTERCOM microphone on/off (OFF is seleted when MIC
SEL is set to DYNAMIC, and ON is seleted when MIC SEL is set to CARBON).
INTER MIC
UNBAL
OFF /ON Turns unbalanced input for the INTERCOM microphone on/off (ON is selected when MIC
SEL is set to CARBON).
INTER SIDE TONE 50 to 99 Sets the level of the INTERCOM sidetone.
a) The setting of this item is overridden by the setting of
Other BEFORE END when TYPE DETECTION in the BATTERY 2 page is set to “OTHER”.
b) The setting of this item is overridden by the setting of
Other END when TYPE DETECTION in the
BATTERY 2 page is set to “OTHER”.
c) When TYPE DETECTION in the BATTERY 2 page is set to “AUTO”, any batteries other than Sony BPseries batteries and Anton Bauer intelligent battery systems are classified as “Others”.
d) Flashes once per second when the battery status is
“BEFORE END”, and flashes 4 times per second when the battery status is “END”.
e) A setting for this item is required when AU CH34
AGC MODE in the AUDIO-2 page is set to OFF.
f) A setting for this item is required when the
DWR-S02DN Digital Wireless Receiver is installed.
g) SDI OUT 1 SELECT or SDI OUT 2 SELECT in the
OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu must be set to HDSDI.
h) Pixel noise is reduced to some extent by automatic black balance adjustment
, but the detection capabilities of that function are limited. For the most effective correction, execute the APR function.
If “No More White Pixel” appears after the APR function is executed, then there are no more detectable white flecks.
FILE menu
No.
Page
01 USER FILE
Item
USER FILE LOAD
USER FILE SAVE
F.ID
USER PRESET
Settings
EXEC
EXEC
Blank /up to 16 characters
EXEC
Description
Recalling User Files” (page 219).
For details, see “Resetting USER menu settings to the standard settings” (page 199).
186
No.
02
Page Item
LOAD OUT OF USER
BEFORE FILE PAGE
USER LOAD WHITE
Settings
USER FILE 2 STORE USR PRESET EXEC
CLEAR USR PRESET EXEC
CUSTOMIZE RESET EXEC
LOAD CUSTOM
DATA
OFF /ON
OFF /ON
03 ALL FILE ALL FILE LOAD
ALL FILE SAVE
EXEC
EXEC
F.ID
Blank /up to 16 characters
ALL PRESET EXEC
STORE ALL PRESET EXEC
CLEAR ALL PRESET EXEC
3SEC CLR PRESET OFF /ON
NETWORK DATA
OFF
OFF
OFF
/ON
/ON
/ON
Description
Save settings for items on pages registered in the USER menu as the standard settings.
Clear the standard setting of pages registered in the USER menu.
Return the pages registered in the
USER menu to the factory default state.
Selects whether to load page and item customization data when
USER FILE LOAD on the USER
FILE page is executed.
Selects whether to load USER
FILE data for items other than the current USER menu items when
USER FILE LOAD on the USER
FILE page is executed.
Selects whether to load data for items on the pages beyond USER
FILE in the USER menu when
USER FILE LOAD on the USER
FILE page is executed.
Selects whether to load white balance data when USER FILE
LOAD on the USER FILE page is executed.
Load ALL file.
Save ALL file.
Name ALL file.
Return all items to preset values.
Save the current settings of all items as preset values.
Clear the preset values of all items.
Turns the following function on and off: When the CANCEL/
PRST/ESCAPE switch is held on the CANCEL/PRST side for three seconds, clear the preset values of each item.
Selects whether or not to read in the network-related data.
187
No.
Page
04 SCENE FILE
Item
1
2
3
4
05
Settings
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
STANDARD
5
STANDARD
SCENE RECALL
SCENE STORE
STANDARD
–
EXEC
EXEC
F.ID
STANDARD
REFERENCE REFERENCE STORE EXEC
REFERENCE CLEAR EXEC
REFERENCE LOAD EXEC
REFERENCE SAVE EXEC
F.ID
Blank /up to 16 characters
SCENE WHITE DATA OFF /ON
06 USER
GAMMA
USER GAMMA
LOAD
USER GAMMA
RESET
F.ID
DATE
EXEC
EXEC
—
—
Description
Loading Scene Files” (page 222).
Save reference file saved on the
USB flash drive in internal memory.
Clear reference file.
Load reference file.
Save reference file on the USB flash drive.
Enter reference file name.
Selects whether to load white balance data when SCENE
RECALL or STANDARD on the
SCENE FILE page is executed.
Loads user-created gamma table data (a user gamma file) from a
USB flash drive into internal memory.
Clears a user gamma file from internal memory.
Displays the name of the user gamma file in internal memory.
Displays the date and time of creation of a user gamma file on a
USB flash drive.
188
No.
Page
07 LENS FILE 1
Item
LENS FILE RECALL
Settings
EXEC
LENS FILE STORE EXEC
F.ID
No Offset /up to 16 characters
SOURCE MEMORY1
LENS NO OFFSET
LENS AUTO
RECALL
EXEC
OFF /ON/S.No
08
L.ID
L.MF
LENS FILE 2
LENS M VMOD
a) (–99 to 99)
LENS CENTER H
a) –480 to 0 to 479
LENS CENTER V
a) –270 to 0 to 269
TEST OUT SELECT VBS /Y/R/G/B
LENS R FLARE
a)
LENS G FLARE
a)
LENS B FLARE
a)
LENS W-R OFST
a)
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
(–99 to 99)
LENS W-B OFST
a)
—
—
(–99 to 99)
Description
Load lens file.
Save lens file.
Sets the name of the last selected lens file.
Displays the number of last loaded lens file.
Clear lens file.
Specifies whether to automatically load the lens file of a lens that supports serial communications.
OFF: Do not use the lens file function.
ON: Load the lens file corresponding to the lens model name, and reflect the contents of the file.
S.No: If the lens can communicate its serial number, load the lens file corresponding to the lens model name and serial number, and reflect the contents of the file. If the lens serial number cannot be communicated, load the lens file corresponding to the lens model name (same as the ON setting).
Display the name of the connected lens that supports serial communications.
Display the manufacturer of the connected lens that supports serial communications.
Adjusts the lens file V SAW shading compensation.
Compensates the horizontal position of lens file center marker.
Compensates the vertical position of lens file center marker.
Selects the signal output of the
TEST OUT connector.
Adjusts the lens file flare (R).
Adjusts the lens file flare (G).
Adjusts the lens file flare (B).
Adjusts the white balance (R) compensation value of the lens file.
Adjusts the white balance (B) compensation value of the lens file.
189
No.
09
10
Page Item Settings
LENS FILE 3 SHADING CH SEL R /G/B/TEST
Description
Selects the channel adjusted by this menu. If TEST is selected, the setting is linked to the setting of
TEST OUT SELECT.
TEST OUT SELECT
LENS R/G/B H SAW
a)
VBS /Y/R/G/B
(–99 to 99)
Selects the signal output of the
TEST OUT connector.
Adjusts the H Saw white shading compensation.
Adjusts the H Parabola white shading compensation.
LENS R/G/B H
PARA a)
(–99 to 99)
LENS R/G/B V SAW a) (–99 to 99)
LENS R/G/B V
PARA a)
(–99 to 99)
USB MEMORY USB IN > JUMP TO OFF /USER/ALL/
SCENE/LENS/REFER/
USER1
Adjusts the V Saw white shading compensation.
Adjusts the V Parabola white shading compensation.
For details, see “Jumping to a
a) “EX” is displayed when the extender is on, and “08” is displayed when the shrinker is on.
DIAGNOSIS menu
No.
01
02
Page
HOURS
METER
TIME/DATE
Item
OPERATION
LASER
OPERATION (rst)
SPINDLE (rst)
LOADING (rst)
SEEK (rst)
ADJUST
GPS ADJUST
HOUR
MIN
SEC
YEAR
MONTH
DAY
Description
Displays the total time that this unit has been powered on, in units of hours.
Displays the total number of output parameters to the optical heads.
Displays the total time that this unit has been powered on, in units of hours (reset possible).
Displays the total time that the spindle has been rotating, in units of hours (reset possible).
Displays the number of times that discs have been loaded
(reset possible).
Displays the total seek time by the optical heads, in units of hours (reset possible).
For details, see “Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock”
190
No.
Page
03 ROM VERSION
1
Item
PACKAGE: X.XX
SY1: X.XX
SY2K: X.XX
SY2U: X.XX
04
05
06
07
07
DRV: X.XX
AT: X.XX
FP: X.XX
ROM VERSION
2
LVIS: X.XX
TSYS: X.XX
TMBP: X.XX
CHRN: X.XX
BRDG: X.XX
PIER: X.XX
CAVA: X.XX
ROM VERSION
3
DSP0: X.XX
PRXA: X.XX
Description
Displays ROM version.
GPS: X.XX
DEV STATUS I/O: FP, CN, DCP, VF Displays the status of each internal device of this unit.
D/A: DCP1, DCP2
EEPROM: CN, DCP,
DR
FRAM: AT
FAN: MB
LSI: DCP1, DCP2,
TG
SCI: SY, RM
CA STATUS
(CA-FB70
CA: CA-FB70
SERIAL:
Camera Adaptor only)
XXXXXXXX
VER: VX.XXXXXX
APR/30/2014
COMMENTXXXXX
XXXX
OPTICAL LEVEL
CCU t CAM:
NOSIGNAL
CAM t CCU:
NOSIGNAL
CA STATUS
(CA-TX70
CA: CA-TX70
SERIAL:
Camera Adaptor only)
XXXXXXXX
VER: VX.XXXXXX
APR/30/2014
COMMENTXXXXX
XXXX
Displays the version information and signal level of the camera adaptor.
Displays the version information of the camera adaptor.
191
Menu Operations
Displaying menus
1
5 4 3 2
1 Viewfinder
2 LCD monitor
3 DISP SEL/EXPAND button
4 MENU ON/OFF switch
5 POWER switch
To use the MENU ON/OFF switch, open the cover of the menu operating section.
When the camcorder is powered on, set the
MENU ON/OFF switch to ON to display the menu on the viewfinder screen and the LCD monitor.
If this is the first time the menu has been used after the camcorder has been powered on, the
USER menu is displayed. If the menu has been used before, the last accessed page appears.
When the menu is not displayed on the LCD monitor
Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button below the
LCD monitor to select the CHAR display.
To clear the menu display from the screen
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF. (When the cover of the menu operating section is closed, this switch is automatically set to OFF.)
When the DISPLAY of the DISPLAY/ASPECT switch on the viewfinder is set to on, the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears on the viewfinder screen.
For details, see “Selecting the display items”
To display the TOP menu
With no menu displayed on the screen, hold down the MENU knob and set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.
Depending on the internal switch settings, display of the TOP menu may be disabled. For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
Basic menu operations
By pressing and turning the MENU knob, you can set various menu items. In the remainder of this section, the LCD monitor is generally shown as an example of the menu display, but a similar display also appears on the viewfinder screen.
To select the setting items and values on the menu
Turn the MENU knob to select in the cases explained below.
192
To scroll pages
?001 OUTPUT1 TOP
SDI OUT1 SELECT: OFF
SDI OUT2 SELECT: OFF
SDI OUT2 SUPER : OFF
TEST OUT SELECT: VBS
TEST OUT SUPER : OFF
?005 REC FUNCTION TOP
SLOW & QUICK : ON
FRAME RATE : 30P
CACHE/INTVAL REC: OFF
DISC EXCHG CACHE: OFF
CLIP CONT REC : OFF
LIVE LOGGING : OFF
When ? blinks, turn the MENU knob to switch pages.
To select a menu or setting item
001 OUTPUT1 TOP
SDI OUT1 SELECT: OFF
SDI OUT2 SELECT: OFF
SDI OUT2 SUPER : OFF
TEST OUT SELECT: VBS
TEST OUT SUPER : OFF
001 OUTPUT1 TOP
SDI OUT1 SELECT: OFF
SDI OUT2 SELECT: OFF
SDI OUT2 SUPER : OFF
TEST OUT SELECT: VBS
TEST OUT SUPER : OFF
When b appears, turn the MENU knob to move b up and down.
To change a setting value
001 OUTPUT1 TOP
SDI OUT1 SELECT: OFF
SDI OUT2 SELECT: OFF
SDI OUT2 SUPER : OFF
001 OUTPUT1 TOP
SDI OUT1 SELECT: OFF
SDI OUT2 SELECT: OFF
SDI OUT2 SUPER : OFF
When ? blinks, turn the MENU knob to change the setting (ON/OFF, value, etc.).
To confirm the selection of a menu, a setting item, or a setting value
Each time you press the MENU knob, the menu display switches in the following sequence.
193
Example: When using the OPERATION menu
TOP menu
<TOP MENU>
USER
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE
ALL
OPERATION
PAINT
MAINTENANCE
FILE
DIAGNOSIS
ADVANCED
If the menu has not been used
CONTENTS page
?000 CONTENTS
01.OUTPUT 1
02.OUTPUT 2
03.SUPERIMPOSE
04.LCD
05.REC FUNCTION
06.ASSIGNABLE SW
07.POWER SAVE
08.VF DISP 1
09.VF DISP 2
10.VF DISP 3
If the menu has been used before
Menu selection mode
?001 OUTPUT1 TOP
SDI OUT1 SELECT: OFF
SDI OUT2 SELECT: OFF
SDI OUT2 SUPER : OFF
TEST OUT SELECT: VBS
TEST OUT SUPER : OFF
TOP
Menu selection page
000 CONTENTS
01.OUTPUT 1
02.OUTPUT 2
03.SUPERIMPOSE
04.LCD
05.REC FUNCTION
06.ASSIGNABLE SW
07.POWER SAVE
08.VF DISP 1
09.VF DISP 2
10.VF DISP 3
TOP
Setting item selection mode
001 OUTPUT1 TOP
SDI OUT1 SELECT: OFF
SDI OUT2 SELECT: OFF
SDI OUT2 SUPER : OFF
TEST OUT SELECT: VBS
TEST OUT SUPER : OFF
Setting value selection mode
001 OUTPUT1 TOP
SDI OUT1 SELECT:? OFF
SDI OUT2 SELECT: OFF
SDI OUT2 SUPER : OFF
TEST OUT SELECT: VBS
TEST OUT SUPER : OFF
Note
If the TOP menu has not been displayed since the camcorder is powered on, “TOP” does not appear at the upper right on the above screen, and you cannot go to the
TOP menu. In this case, follow the procedure in “To display the TOP menu” (page 192) .
194
To display the TOP menu when another menu is displayed
Move b to “TOP” displayed at the top right of each page of the menu, and press the MENU knob. Or flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch repeatedly to ESCAPE until the TOP menu is displayed.
Using the USER menu (example menu operation)
This section explains menu operations using the
USER menu as an example. The operations are the same for the ALL, OPERATION, PAINT,
MAINTENANCE, and DIAGNOSIS menus.
For details about how to operate the USER MENU
CUSTOMIZE menu, see “Editing the USER menu”
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.
Normally, the USER menu appears.
If it does not, turn the MENU knob to move b to USER in the TOP menu, and press the
MENU knob.
If the USER menu has been used before, the last accessed page appears. In this case, go to step 2 .
If this is the first time the USER menu has been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the
USER menu appears. In this case, follow the procedure below.
1 Press the MENU knob. Then turn the
MENU knob to move b to the desired page number.
TOP ?U00 CONTENTS
01.OUTPUT 1
02.OUTPUT 2
03.SUPERIMPOSE
04.LCD
05.REC FUNCTION
06.ASSIGNABLE SW
07.VF DISP 1
08.VF DISP 2
09.'!' LED
10.MARKER 1
This indicates that the menu screen can be scrolled.
2 Press the MENU knob again.
The page selected in 1 is displayed.
Go to step 3 .
When you set items on the ALL,
OPERATION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE,
FILE, and DIAGNOSIS menus, move b to the menu that contains the desired item in the
TOP menu, and then press the MENU knob.
2
Turn the MENU knob until the desired page appears.
?005 REC FUNCTION TOP
SLOW & QUICK : ON
FRAME RATE : 30P
CACHE/INTVAL REC: OFF
DISC EXCHG CACHE: OFF
CLIP CONT REC : OFF
LIVE LOGGING : OFF
3
Press the MENU knob.
b and z appear.
005 REC FUNCTION TOP
SLOW & QUICK : ON
FRAME RATE : 30P
CACHE/INTVAL REC: OFF
DISC EXCHG CACHE: OFF
CLIP CONT REC : OFF
LIVE LOGGING : OFF
4
Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item, and then press the MENU knob.
b changes to z , and z changes to ?.
5
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting.
Depending on the direction of turning the knob, the setting value increases, decreases, switches between ON and OFF, and so on.
To interrupt changing the settings
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.
By setting the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON again, the values that were displayed when you interrupted the setting operations will reappear so you can continue making settings.
6
Press the MENU knob.
z changes to b , and ? changes to z . The selection is confirmed.
7
To continue setting other items on the same page, repeat steps from 4 to 6.
195
8
To end the menu operation, set the
MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.
The menu disappears from the screen, and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen.
To cancel a change or return to the standard settings
Note
Depending on the setting item, in some cases only the function to return to the standard setting is valid.
1
Before pressing the MENU knob in step
6 of the above procedure, flick the
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch to the
CANCEL/PRST position.
The message “CANCEL DATA OK?” appears.
2
Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL/PRST position again.
The message “CANCEL DATA” appears to indicate that the change has been cancelled.
3
To return to the standard settings after pressing the MENU knob in step 6 of the above procedure, flick the CANCEL/
PRST/ESCAPE switch to the
CANCEL/PRST position.
The message “PRESET DATA OK?” appears on the screen.
4
Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL/PRST position again.
This returns to the standard settings.
To move to another page
?U05 REC FUNCTION TOP
SLOW & QUICK : ON
FRAME RATE : 30P
CACHE/INTVAL REC: OFF
DISC EXCHG CACHE: OFF
CLIP CONT REC : OFF
LIVE LOGGING : OFF
When ? appears in front of the page number
Turn the MENU knob to switch pages.
196
When nothing appears in front of the page number
Turn the MENU knob to move b to the page number, and press the MENU knob. Then turn the
MENU knob to switch pages.
Editing the USER menu
The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to configure a USER menu that consists only of pages and items that you need by adding, deleting or replacing the pages.
To add a new page
The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to add a new page to the USER menu.
While the EDIT page contains factory-preset items, the EDIT USER 1 to EDIT USER 19 pages are all blank in their initial state. You can register up to 10 items, including blank lines, on each of these pages.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the TOP menu (see page 192)
.
2
Select USER MENU CUSTOMIZE, and press the MENU knob.
If this is the first time the USER MENU
CUSTOMIZE menu has been displayed, the
CONTENTS page of the menu appears.
?E00 CONTENTS
01.EDIT PAGE
02.EDIT USER 1
03.EDIT USER 2
04.EDIT USER 3
05.EDIT USER 4
06.EDIT USER 5
07.EDIT USER 6
08.EDIT USER 7
09.EDIT USER 8
10.EDIT USER 9
TOP
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, press the MENU knob. Then select one of EDIT USER 1 to EDIT USER 19, and press the MENU knob.
If a different page other than the
CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the
MENU knob until the desired page appears, then press the MENU knob.
Example: when the EDIT USER 9 page is selected
E10 EDIT USER 9 TOP
4
Press the MENU knob. Then select the line where you want to add an item, and press the MENU knob.
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
EDIT FUNCTION
INSERT
MOVE
DELETE
BLANK
ESC
5
Select INSERT, and press the MENU knob.
The following menu appears.
?P00 CONTENTS
01.OUTPUT 1
02.OUTPUT 2
03.SUPERIMPOSE
04.LCD
05.REC FUNCTION
06.ASSIGNABLE SW
08.VF DISP 1
09.VF DISP 2
10.VF DISP 3
6
Add the items as follows.
TOP
1 Press the MENU knob, scroll the page until the desired item appears, and then press the MENU knob again.
2 Press the MENU knob again, select the desired item, and then press the MENU knob.
The EDIT USER 9 page appears again, displaying the newly added item.
7
Repeat steps 4 to 6 to add the remaining items.
You can add up to ten items on one page.
To delete items from a page by using the
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch
1
Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a new page” (page 196)
.
2
Press the MENU knob. Then select the item that you want to delete.
3
Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL/PRST position.
The message “DELETE ITEM OK?” appears.
4
Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL/PRST position again.
To delete items from a page by using the menu
1
Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a new page” (page 196)
.
2
Press the MENU knob. Then select the item that you want to delete, and press the MENU knob.
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
3
Select DELETE, and press the MENU knob.
The previously displayed page appears again, and the message “DELETE OK? YES b NO” appears.
4
Select YES, and press the MENU knob.
To replace items on a page
1
Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a new page” (page 196)
.
2
Press the MENU knob. Then select the item that you want to replace, and press the MENU knob.
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
3
Select MOVE, and press the MENU knob.
The previously displayed page appears again.
4
Select the position to which you want to move the item, and press the MENU knob.
197
The item selected in step 2 moves to the position that you selected in step 4 .
To insert a blank line
1
Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a new page” (page 196) .
2
Press the MENU knob. Then select the item that you want to replace, and press the MENU knob.
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
3
Select BLANK, and press the MENU knob.
The previously displayed page appears again, and a blank line is inserted above the specified item.
Note
You cannot insert a blank line on a page where 10 items have already been registered.
To add/delete/replace pages
You can add a new page to the USER menu, delete a page from the USER menu, or replace pages, using the EDIT PAGE of the USER
MENU CUSTOMIZE menu.
To add a page
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the TOP menu
2
Select USER MENU CUSTOMIZE, and press the MENU knob.
If this is the first time the USER MENU
CUSTOMIZE menu has been displayed, the
CONTENTS page appears.
If the menu has been used before, the last accessed page appears.
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, press the MENU knob. Then select
EDIT PAGE, and press the MENU knob.
If a different page is displayed, turn the
MENU knob until the EDIT PAGE screen appears.
?E01 EDIT PAGE
01.OUTPUT 1
02.OUTPUT 2
03.SUPERIMPOSE
04.LCD
05.REC FUNCTION
06.ASSIGNABLE SW
07.VF DISP 1
08.VF DISP 2
09.'!' LED
10.MARKER 1
TOP
4
Press the MENU knob. Then select the position where you want to add the page, and press the MENU knob.
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
5
Select INSERT, and press the MENU knob.
The CONTENTS page appears.
6
Select the desired page, and press the
MENU knob.
The number and name of the page selected in step 6 is added above the item selected in step 4 .
To cancel adding a page
Before pressing the MENU knob in step 6 , select ESC at the top right of the screen, and press the MENU knob.
The EDIT PAGE screen appears again.
To delete a page by using the CANCEL/PRST/
ESCAPE switch
1
Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a page”
.
2
Press the MENU knob. Then select the page that you want to delete.
3
Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL/PRST position.
The message “DELETE PAGE OK?” appears.
4
Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL/PRST position again.
To delete a page by using the menu
1
Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a page”
.
198
2
Press the MENU knob. Then select the page that you want to delete, and press the MENU knob.
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
3
Select DELETE, and press the MENU knob.
The previously displayed page appears again, and the message “DELETE OK? YES b NO” appears at the upper right.
4
Select YES, and press the MENU knob.
To replace pages
1
Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a page”
2
Press the MENU knob. Then select the page that you want to move, and press the MENU knob.
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
3
Select MOVE, and press the MENU knob.
The previous screen appears again.
4
Select the position to which you want to move the page, and press the MENU knob.
The page selected in step 2 is moved to the position.
To rename pages
The names of pages (USER 1 to USER 19) created with EDIT USER 1 to EDIT USER 19 can be changed. (The maximum name length is
15 characters.)
Note
The ASSIGN ITEM SEL page cannot be renamed.
1
Display the EDIT PAGE NAME1 or
EDIT PAGE NAME2 of the USER
MENU CUSTOMIZE menu.
EDIT PAGE NAME1: To rename USER1 to USER10
EDIT PAGE NAME2: To rename USER11 to USER19
E22 EDIT PAGE NAME1
USER1 : USER 1
USER2 : USER 2
USER3 : USER 3
USER4 : USER 4
USER5 : USER 5
USER6 : USER 6
USER7 : USER 7
USER8 : USER 8
USER9 : USER 9
USER10: USER 10
TOP
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select the page that you want to rename
(USER 1 to USER 19), and press the
MENU knob.
A character table appears.
E22 EDIT PAGE NAME1 TOP
USER1 :?
USER2 : USER 2
USER3 : USER 3
USER4 : USER 4
USER5 : USER 5
!#$%&'()*+,-./012345678
9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
QRSTUVWXYZ[©]abcdefghijk lmnopqrstuvwxyz~
INS DEL RET ESC END
3
Follow steps 3 and 4 described in
“Setting the shot ID” (page 205) to enter
characters.
4
When you have finished entering the name, turn the MENU knob to move x to END, and press the MENU knob.
The entered name is now displayed.
E22 EDIT PAGE NAME1
USER1 : SPECIAL ITEM
USER2 : USER 2
USER3 : USER 3
USER4 : USER 4
USER6 : USER 6
USER7 : USER 7
USER8 : USER 8
USER9 : USER 9
USER10: USER 10
TOP
Resetting USER menu settings to the standard settings
You can return all settings in the USER menu to standard settings.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
199
1
Display the USER FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
?F01 USER FILE TOP
USER FILE LOAD : EXEC
USER FILE SAVE : EXEC
F.ID : ssssssssssssssss
USER PRESET : EXEC
2
Press the MENU knob, then select
USER PRESET, and press the MENU knob.
The message “PRESET OK? YES b NO” appears.
F01 USER FILE TOP
PRESET OK? YES NO
USER FILE LOAD : EXEC
USER FILE SAVE : EXEC
F.ID : ssssssssssssssss
USER PRESET : EXEC
3
Select YES, and press the MENU knob.
The message “COMPLETE” appears, and the settings for all items in the USER menu are reset to the standard settings.
Setting the Status
Display on the
Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor
This section explains the menu settings for the display of the viewfinder screen. These settings are also used for the display of the LCD monitor in the same way.
Selecting the display items
To select the items to be displayed on the viewfinder screen (with the viewfinder
DISPLAY of the DISPLAY/ASPECT switch set to on) and the LCD monitor, use the
VF DISP 1, VF DISP 2, and VF DISP 3 pages of the OPERATION menu.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the VF DISP 1, VF DISP 2, or
VF DISP 3 page of the OPERATION menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select the desired setting item, and press the MENU knob.
On the VF DISP 1, VF DISP 2, and VF DISP
3 pages, you can select any of the following items to turn its display on or off.
VF DISP 1 page
Item
VF DISP
Description
Turning on or off the
VF DISPLAY
MODE viewfinder display a)
Selecting the display mode b)
DISP EXTENDER Extender indicator
DISP FILTER
DISP WHITE
Types of the ND filter
White balance memory indicator
Gain indicator DISP GAIN
DISP SHUTTER Shutter speed and ECS mode indicator
DISP AUDIO Audio level indicator
200
Item
DISP DISC
DISP IRIS
Description
Remaining disc capacity indicator
Iris opening indicator a) The viewfinder display can be also turned on or off by using the DISPLAY of the DISPLAY/
ASPECT switch on the viewfinder.
b) For detailed information on the display mode, see
“Change confirmation/adjustment progress messages” (page 202)
.
VF DISP 2 page
Item
DISP ZOOM
DISP COLOR
TEMP
DISP BATT
REMAIN a)
DISP DC IN
DISP WRR RF
LVL
DISP REC
FORMAT
DISP CLIP
NO(PB)
Description
Zoom position indicator
Displays the color temperature.
Displays the battery voltage/remaining capacity of an internal battery pack or an external battery connected to the DC IN connector.
Displayed when the power is supplied from an external battery connected to the
DC IN connector.
Displays the reception level of the wireless microphone.
Displays the recording format.
During playback, displays the clip number and total number of clips.
Displays the timecode.
DISP
TIMECODE
DISP ALAC Aberration correction function display a) When an Anton Bauer battery system or a
BP-GL65A/GL95A/FLX75 battery pack is installed, the remaining battery power is shown as a percentage value (%) according to the setting of this item.
INT: When one of the above batteries is installed, the remaining power is shown as a percentage value (%) when there is a change in the value or when the power is low.
AUTO: The remaining power is shown as a percentage value (%) when one of the above batteries is installed. Otherwise the voltage
(VOLT) is displayed continuously.
VOLT: The voltage (VOLT) is displayed continuously.
VF DISP 3 page
Item
DISP CLIP
NAME
Description
Selects the type of clip name to display.
a)
DISP SCENE
FILE
DISP CONT
REC
Turns on or off the display of the number of the currently loaded scene file.
Turns on or off the Clip
Continuous Rec display.
LOW LIGHT Turns on and off the on-screen warning that the average level of the video has dropped
LOW LIGHT
LEVEL
VF BATT
WARNING beneath a set level.
Sets the LOW LIGHT threshold value.
Specifies the remaining battery capacity level that starts the flashing warning in the viewfinder.
ABSOLUTE
VALUE
Turns on and off the mode that displays numeric menu settings as absolute values.
b) a) Displayed clip names are also linked to the settings of “Display Title” and “Planning Clip
Name in Clip Info. Area” in the Disc Menu.
b) This makes it possible to display settings that include reference settings, stored with STORE
ALL PRESET or other functions, as absolute values.
VF DISP 4 page
Item Description
DISP GPS
WIRELESS
STATUS
EXT MEDIA
REMAIN
SENDING
CLIPINFO
NW CLIENT
GPS reception status display
CBK-WA100 wireless reception status
CBK-WA100 SD card remaining media display
Clip transfer to CBK-WA100 progress display
CBK-WA100 network client
MODE mode status display
STREAMING CBK-WA100 streaming status
STATUS display
3
Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting (ON, OFF, or value), and press the MENU knob.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items.
201
Change confirmation/adjustment progress messages
You can limit or suppress the messages that give details of setting changes and adjustment progress and results by setting a display mode.
The conditions under which messages are displayed and their correspondence with the display mode are as follows:
Y: Message is displayed.
N: Message is not displayed.
Message display condition
Message Display mode setting
1 2 3
N N Y When the filter selection has been changed
When the gain setting has been changed
When the setting of the WHITE BAL switch has been changed
When the
OUTPUT/DCC switch has been set to DCC ON or OFF
When the shutter speed and mode setting has been changed a)
When the black or white balance has been adjusted
FILTER: n (where n = 1, 2, 3, 4)
GAIN: n (where n
= –6dB, –3dB, 0dB,
3dB, 6dB, 9dB,
12dB, 18dB, 24dB,
N N Y
30dB, 36dB, 42dB)
WHITE: n (where n
= A CH, B CH,
PRESET) or ATW:
RUN
DCC: ON (or OFF) N Y Y
:SHUTTER:
1/100 (or 1/125,
1/250, 1/500,
1/1000, 1/2000,
ECS)
E.g. AWB : OK
N N Y
N Y Y
N Y Y a) This is also displayed for about 3 seconds when the
SHUTTER selector is set to ON.
Changing the display mode
1
Display the VF DISP 1 page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
202
2
Select VF DISP MODE, and press the
MENU knob.
3
Select the desired display mode, and press the MENU knob.
Setting the marker display
Switch the display of the center and safety zone markers on or off, and select whether the area indicated by the safety zone marker is 80%, 90%,
92.5%, or 95% of the screen area.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the MARKER 1 or MARKER 2 page of the OPERATION menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select the desired item, and press the
MENU knob.
You can set the following items on the
MARKER 1 and MARKER 2 pages.
MARKER 1 page
Item Description
MARKER To hide all markers, set to
CENTER
“OFF”.
To display the center marker,
CENTER
MARK
SAFETY
ZONE set to “ON”.
Selects the display mode of the center marker.
To display the safety zone, set
SAFETY
AREA
ASPECT to “ON”.
Selects the safety zone range
(80%, 90%, 92.5% or 95%).
To display the aspect marker,
ASPECT
SELECT
ASPECT
MASK set to “ON”.
Selects the aspect mode (15:9/
14:9/13:9/4:3/1.85/2.35).
To make the areas out of the selected aspect marker dimmer, set to “ON”.
ASPECT
MASK LVL
100%
MARKER
a)
To set the mask level, when the
ASPECT MASK is set to
“ON”.
To display the effective pixel area, set to “ON”.
a) 100% MARKER is disabled when the focus assist indicator is displayed.
Note
The four items ASPECT, ASPECT SELECT,
ASPECT MASK, and ASPECT MASK LVL are ignored when the recording format is IMX50/40/30 or DVCAM and the aspect ratio is 4:3.
MARKER 2 page
Item
USER BOX
a)
USER BOX
WIDTH
USER BOX
HEIGHT
USER BOX
H POS
USER BOX
V POS
CENTER H
POS
CENTER V
POS
ASPECT
SAFE ZONE
ASPECT
SAFE AREA
Description
Turns the display of the box cursor on and off.
Sets the width of the box cursor (distance from center to left or right edge).
Sets the height of the box cursor (distance from center to top or bottom edge).
Sets the horizontal position of the center of the box cursor.
Sets the vertical position of the center of the box cursor.
Sets the horizontal position of the center marker.
Sets the vertical position of the center marker.
Turns the display of the aspect safety zone on and off.
Selects the range of the aspect safety zone (80%/90%/92.5%/
95%).
a) USER BOX is disabled by setting FOCUS
AREA MARK to “ON” on the FOCUS ASSIST page of the OPERATION menu.
3
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press the MENU knob.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items.
Setting the viewfinder
You can make settings for viewfinder screen display functions.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the VF SETTING page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select the desired item, and press the
MENU knob.
You can set the following items on the VF
SETTING page.
Item
ZEBRA
ZEBRA
SELECT
ZEBRA1
DET LVL
ZEBRA1
APT LVL
ZEBRA2
DET LVL
Description
Turns the zebra display on or off.
a)
Selects ZEBRA 1, ZEBRA 2 or
BOTH.
Adjusts the level of the zebra 1
(20% to 70% to 107%) display.
Adjusts the aperture level of the zebra 1 display. (1% to 10% to
20%)
Adjusts the level of the zebra 2
(52% to 100% to 109%) display.
VF DETAIL
LEVEL
Adjusts the sharpness of the viewfinder (–99 to 99).
VF ASPECT
(SD)
VF
MARKER
LEVEL
Specifies whether to set the viewfinder screen and LCD monitor aspect ratio automatically or to set it to 16:9 when the IMX50/40/30 or
DVCAM recording format is selected.
When “16:9” is selected, then the screen is always displayed as a 16:9 screen (before being cut out to 4:3), even when
ASPECT RATIO (SD) is set to
“4:3”.
Adjusts the VF marker display level (–99 to 0 to 52).
You can set the following items on the VF
DETAIL page.
Item Description
VF DETAIL Sets VF detail ON/OFF.
VF DETAIL
LEVEL
Adjusts the level of the VF detail function (–99 to 99).
CRISP Adjusts the crispness level.
FREQUENCY Selects the center frequency of the detail signal.
FAT MODE Sets FAT (thickens detail edges) mode.
FLICKER Sets the flicker function.
Sets the color detail function.
COLOR
DETAIL
COLOR
SEL
Selects the color of the color detail.
203
Item
PEAK
COLOR
CHROMA
LEVEL
Description
Sets the color of the peak color detail.
Selects the chroma level of the image.
a) If you are using a viewfinder which is not equipped with a ZEBRA switch, use this item to turn the display on and off. If you are using a viewfinder with a ZEBRA switch, you can turn the display on and off either with the ZEBRA switch or with this menu operation.
3
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press the MENU knob.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items.
Recording shot data superimposed on the color bars
You can select which shot data is recorded superimposed on the color bars. You can also select which of the shot IDs (1 to 4) set in the
SHOT DATA page is recorded superimposed on the picture.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the SHOT DISP page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select the desired item, and press the
MENU knob.
You can set the following items on the SHOT
DISP page.
Item
SHOT DATE
SHOT TIME
SHOT MODEL
NAME
Description
Selects whether or not the shot data is superimposed
(ON or OFF).
Selects whether or not shot time is superimposed (ON or OFF).
Selects whether or not the model name is superimposed (ON or OFF).
Item Description
SHOT SERIAL
NO
Selects whether or not the serial number is superimposed (ON or OFF).
SHOT ID SEL Selects whether or not the shot ID set on the SHOT ID page is superimposed.
a)
SHOT 16:9
CHARA
SHOT BLINK
CHARA
Turns the following function on and off: When displaying aspect ratio 4:3 video, record superimposed “16:9” in the locations where 16:9 video is cut.
Selects whether or not the blinking * is superimposed
(ON or OFF).
a) To carry out superimposed recording, select the
SHOT ID number (1 to 4). Not to carry out superimposed recording, select “OFF”.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select ON/
OFF or the SHOT ID number, and press the MENU knob.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items.
To carry out superimposed recording
To actually record the items selected for superimposed recording on the SHOT DISP page, set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to BARS, DCC
OFF.
The items selected for superimposed recording appear on the screen and are recorded superimposed on the color bars.
Example display: when SHOT DATA is set to
ON
08/03/15
204
Setting the shot ID
You can set a shot ID of up to 12 alphanumeric characters, spaces, and symbols.
When the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to BARS,
DCC OFF, this shot ID is output with the color bar signal. You can set four shot IDs (ID-1 to
ID-4).
Note
When the menu is displayed, the shot ID is not displayed even if the color bar signal is output.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the SHOT ID page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
020 SHOT ID
ID-1 :
ID-2 : ssssssssssss ssssssssssss
ID-3 :
ID-4 : ssssssssssss
TOP
2
Select one of ID-1 to ID-4, and press the
MENU knob.
A x mark appears over the first character position in the string, and characters can now be input.
020 SHOT ID
ID-1 :?
ID-2 : x ssssssssssss
ID-3 :
ID-4 : ssssssssssss
TOP
!#$%&'()*+,-./012345678
9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk lmnopqrstuvwxyz~
INS DEL RET ESC END
3
Enter or change the shot ID.
When you are entering the whole shot ID, go to 2 .
1 Turn the MENU knob to move the x mark to the character which you want to change, then press the MENU knob.
020 SHOT ID
ID-1 :?
ID-2 :
ID-3 :
ID-4 : x ssssssssssss ssssssssssss
TOP
!#$%&'()*+,-./012345678
9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk lmnopqrstuvwxyz~
INS DEL RET ESC END
2 Turn the MENU knob until the x mark moves to the character position that you want to select, then press the
MENU knob.
Example: “+” character
020 SHOT ID
ID-1 :?+
ID-2 : ssssssssssss
ID-3 :
ID-4 : ssssssssssss
TOP
!#$%&'()* + ,-./012345678
9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk lmnopqrstuvwxyz~
INS DEL RET ESC END
4
Repeat step 3 for each of the remaining characters.
5
When the input is complete, turn the
MENU knob to move the x mark over
END, then press the MENU knob.
This ends the input, and returns to the original SHOT ID page.
To insert a space
In step 3 above, move the x mark over INS, and press the MENU knob.
To cancel inserting a space, move the x mark over RET, then press the MENU knob.
To delete a character
In step 3
of “Setting the shot ID” (page 205) ,
move the x mark over DEL, and press the
MENU knob.
This deletes the character under the x mark in the shot ID row.
To cancel deleting the character, move the x mark over RET, and press the MENU knob.
205
To cancel changing shot ID
Before executing step 5
, move the b mark over ESC, then press the MENU knob or flick the CANCEL/
PRST/ESCAPE switch to ESCAPE.
Displaying the status confirmation screens
You can confirm the settings or status of the camcorder on the LCDs by displaying the following four screen.
ABNORMAL <!> screen
This window allows you to confirm why the !
(warning) indicator lights in the viewfinder.
You can use the ‘!’ LED page of the
OPERATION menu to set whether or not the !
(warning) indicator lights.
SYSTEM screen
This screen displays information such as the system frequency, the recording format, whether output from the TEST OUT connector is on or off, and the type of output signal.
FUNCTION screen
This screen displays the functions assigned to the
ASSIGN switches, ZEBRA ON/OFF, the detection level, and other information.
AUDIO STATUS screen
This screen allows you to confirm the following items related to audio.
• Audio bit rate
• Setting condition of DF/NDF
• Type of front microphone
• Type of input signal to audio channels 1 to 4
• Input level of audio channels 1 to 4
GPS INFORMATION screen
This screen displays the following items related to GPS.
• Latitude
• Longitude
• Altitude
• Position date and time (CALC)
• Real time
• Time zone
You can use the SET STATUS page of the
OPERATION menu to set whether or not the status confirmation screens are displayed.
To display the status confirmation screens
You can use the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch as the STATUS ON/SEL/OFF switch when the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to OFF
(when the cover of the menu operating section is closed, OFF is automatically selected).
To disable display of the status confirmation screens
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the SET STATUS page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select the desired item, and press the
MENU knob.
You can set the following items on the SET
STATUS page.
Item
STATUS
ABNORMAL
Description
Selects whether or not the
ABNORMAL window is displayed (ON or OFF).
Displays (ON) or hides
(OFF) the SYSTEM menu.
STATUS
SYSTEM
STATUS
FUNCTION
Selects whether or not the
FUNCTION window is displayed (ON or OFF).
STATUS
AUDIO
Selects whether or not the
STATUS AUDIO window is displayed (ON or OFF).
STATUS GPS Selects whether or not the
STATUS GPS window is displayed (ON or OFF).
3
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press the MENU knob.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items.
206
Adjustments and
Settings from Menus
Setting gain values for the GAIN selector positions
You can set the gain values for the L, M, and H positions of the GAIN selector, which switches the gain of the video amplifier.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the GAIN SW page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select the item for the switch position, then press the MENU knob.
You can set the following items on the GAIN
SW page.
Item
GAIN
LOW
Description
Sets the gain value corresponding to the L position of the GAIN selector.
GAIN MID Sets the gain value corresponding to the M position
GAIN
HIGH of the GAIN selector.
Sets the gain value corresponding to the H position of the GAIN selector.
GAIN
TURBO
Sets the gain value corresponding to TURBO GAIN function.
TURBO
SW IND
OFF: After pressing the button assigned with the TURBO
GAIN function, the gain value changes when the
GAIN selector is operated.
ON: When the button assigned with the TURBO GAIN function is set to TURBO
GAIN, the gain value does not change when the GAIN selector is operated unless the button is pressed again.
Item
SHOCK-
LESS
GAIN
Description
Turns shockless gain on or off.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select the gain value, and press MENU knob.
Any of –6, –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36 or
42 dB can be set for each of the L, M, H, and
TURBO positions, in any sequence.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items.
Selecting the output signals
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the OUTPUT 1 page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select the desired item, and press the
MENU knob.
You can set the following items on the
OUTPUT 1 page.
Item
SDI OUT 1
SELECT
SDI OUT 2
SELECT
SDI OUT 2
SUPER
Setting
Selects the signal output from the SDI OUT1 connector.
OFF: Do not output video.
HD-SDI: Output HD-SDI.
SD-SDI: Output SD-SDI
Selects the signal output from the SDI OUT2 connector.
OFF: Do not output video.
HD-SDI: Output HD-SDI.
SD-SDI: Output SD-SDI
VF: Outputs the same video as in the viewfinder.
Selects whether to superimpose
(ON) or not superimpose (OFF) text information on the signal output from the SDI OUT2 connector.
Note
Disabled when SDI OUT 2
SELECT is set to VF.
207
Item
TEST OUT
SELECT
TEST OUT
SUPER
Setting
Selects the output signal from the TEST OUT connector.
VBS: Output composite video signal. When you select
VBS, connect to the
VIDEO IN connector of your monitor.
Y: Output HD-Y signal.
R/G/B: Output HD RGB signal.
Selects whether to superimpose
(ON) or not superimpose (OFF) text information on the signal output from the TEST OUT connector.
3
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press the MENU knob.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items.
Settings on decks in order to receive SDI ANC
(ancillary data) (PDW-HD1500)
To record camera metadata (including GPS data) superimposed on the HD-SDI signal, together with the audio/video signal, set the VANC RX
PARAMETER values in the Maintenance menu to the following values.
Line: 11
DID: 0x43
SDID: 0x05
Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches
You can assign the desired function to any of the
ASSIGN switches.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
You can assign functions by using the following items.
Item
ASSIGN SW
<1>
ASSIGN SW
<2>
ASSIGN SW
<3>
ASSIGN SW
<4>
ASSIGN SW
<5>
Description
Assigns the function to
ASSIGN 1 (push-type) switch.
Assigns the function to
ASSIGN 2 (slide-type) switch.
Assigns the function to
ASSIGN 3 (push-type) switch.
Assigns the function to
ASSIGN 4 (push-type) switch.
Assigns the function to
ASSIGN 5 (push-type) switch.
Assigns the function to RET button on the lens.
ASSIGN SW
<RET>
2
Select the desired switch or button, and press the MENU knob.
A selection screen for the selected switch or button appears. You can use these screens to assign one of the following functions.
Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 1/
3/4/5 (push-type) switch or RET button on the lens
Function
OFF
Description
Assigns no function.
FRONT MIC Assigns the function that switches between stereo and monaural when a stereo
PICTURE
CACHE microphone is connected.
Assigns execution of recording in picture cache mode.
SUPER
(VFDISP&
MENU)
Assigns a mixing switch function that selects mixing or no mixing of superimposed viewfinder and menu text data into the video signals output from the
SDI OUT 2 or TEST OUT connector, when SDI OUT 2
SUPER or TEST OUT
SUPER on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu are set to ON.
MARKER Assigns the function that displays or hides all markers.
a)
208
Function
RETAKE
ATW
RETURN
VIDEO
HD-Y c)
RETURN
VIDEO
HDSDI b) c) e)
Description
Assigns the function that deletes the last recorded clip.
Assigns the function that turns auto tracing white balance ON and OFF.
Assigns the function that displays in the viewfinder the HD-Y (1080i) signal input to the GENLOCK IN connector.
d)
Assigns the function that displays the HDSDI signal input on the SDI IN connector in the viewfinder d)
LENS RET Assigns the functions executed by the RET button on the lens (recording review and so on).
REC SWITCH Assigns the function that
TURBO
SWITCH
ZEBRA starts and stops recording.
Assigns the turbo gain function.
Assigns the zebra pattern display function.
FREEZE MIX Assigns the function that mixes a still picture
(monochrome) and camera video (color) (effective for framing shots).
CC 5600K
ZOOM TELE/
WIDE f)
ZOOM WIDE/
TELE f)
Assigns the function that applies an electrical 5600 K filter.
For use with a lens that supports serial communications, assign the
ZOOM TELE setting to
ASSIGN 3, and the WIDE setting to ASSIGN 4.
For use with a lens that supports serial communications, assign the
ZOOM WIDE setting to
ASSIGN 3, and the TELE setting to ASSIGN 4.
SHOT MARK1 Assigns the function that records a SHOT MARK 1 essence mark.
SHOT MARK2 Assigns the function that records a SHOT MARK 2 essence mark.
209
Function
CLIP FLAG
OK
CLIP FLAG
NG
CLIP FLAG
KEEP
DIGITAL
EXTENDER g)
CLIP CONT
REC
UA01 to
UA10 h)
VF COLOR
DETAIL
PLAY & SDI
REC S/S
Description
Assign the functions that set or clear OK, NG, and KEEP flags during recording or playback.
Assigns the function that electronically magnifies the central part of the picture.
(All video output is magnified, including recorded video.) x2, x3, x4, and x2x3x4 are available for selection.
Assigns the function that turns the Clip Continuous
Rec function on and off.
Assigns the items assigned in the ASSIGN SEL menu.
Assigns the VF color detail function.
Assigns the REC trigger signal output function, during playback, to the recorder connected to the
SDI OUT connector.
a) Even when the MARKER item is set to OFF on the MARKER page of the USER menu, the
ASSIGN 1/3/4 switches allow you to display or not to display all markers.
b) This function cannot be assigned to the RET button on the lens.
c) RETURN1 to 4 are displayed when an optional
CA-FB70/CA-TX70 Camera Adaptor is connected.
d) Even if the RETURN VIDEO item is set to OFF on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the
OPERATION menu, you can use this switch to display the image of the return video signal on the viewfinder.
e) Does not function when the system frequency of the unit is set to 23.98P.
f) Only the Assign 3 SEL and Assign 4 SEL screens appear.
g) Video momentarily becomes black and audio is momentarily muted when the digital extender is switched on and off.
h) This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the
Assign menu.
Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 2
(slide-type) switch
Function Content
OFF Assigns no function.
FRONT MIC Assigns the function that switches between stereo and monaural when a stereo microphone is connected.
PICTURE
CACHE
Assigns execution of recording in picture cache mode.
SUPER
(VFDISP&M
ENU)
MARKER
Assigns a mixing switch function that selects mixing or no mixing of superimposed viewfinder and menu text data into the video signals output from the SDI OUT 2 or TEST
OUT connector, when SDI
OUT 2 SUPER or TEST OUT
SUPER on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu are set to ON.
Assigns the function that displays or hides all markers.
a)
REC VIDEO
SOURCE
Switches the recording target video between the video shot by the camera and the video input from an external device
(VBS or SD-SDI/HD-SDI).
Assigns the zebra pattern ZEBRA display function.
FREEZE MIX Assigns the function that mixes a still picture
(monochrome) and camera video (color) (effective for framing shots).
DIGITAL
EXTENDER b)
CLIP CONT
REC
Assigns the function that electronically magnifies the central part of the picture. (All video output is magnified, including recorded video.) x2, x3, and x4 are available for selection.
Assigns the function that turns the Clip Continuous Rec function on and off.
UA01 to
UA10 c)
VF COLOR
DETAIL
Assigns the items assigned in the ASSIGN SEL menu.
Assigns the VF color detail function.
a) Even when the MARKER item is set to OFF on the MARKER page of the USER menu, the
ASSIGN 2 switch allows you to display or not to display all markers.
b) Video momentarily becomes black and audio is momentarily muted when the digital extender is switched on and off.
c) This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the
Assign menu.
Note
For functions that are assigned to the ASSIGN 2
(slide-type) switch, you cannot change those settings using other menus. The function assigned to the ASSIGN 2 switch takes precedence over the menu setting.
3
Select the desired function, and press the MENU knob.
The function is assigned, and the
ASSIGNABLE SW page appears again.
To add functions that can be assigned to the ASSIGN switches
When shipped from the factory, UA01 to UA10 user-assignable items in the ASSIGN switch function list are blank.
You can register up to ten functions in these items.
1
Display the EDIT ASSIGN SEL page of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details about using the menus, see “Menu
E21 EDIT ASSIGN SEL TOP
210
2
Move the b cursor to the item to set using the MENU knob, and press the
MENU knob.
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
EDIT FUNCTION
MOVE
DELETE
BLANK
ESC
3
Select INSERT, and press the MENU knob.
TOP ?P00 CONTENTS
01.OUTPUT 1
02.OUTPUT 2
04.LCD
05.REC FUNCTION
06.ASSIGNABLE SW
07.POWER SAVE
08.VF DISP 1
09.VF DISP 2
10.VF DISP 3
4
Add an item as follows.
1 Press the MENU knob, scroll the page until the desired page appears, and then press the MENU knob.
2 Press the MENU knob again, select the desired item, and then press the MENU knob.
The EDIT ASSIGN SEL page appears again, displaying the added item.
5
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to add the remaining items.
You can register up to ten items.
Operation of the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4 switches when
UA01 to UA10 are assigned
When an on/off switchable function (or menu item) is assigned to one of the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4 switches, each time the switch is pressed toggles the function on or off.
When another type of menu item is assigned, pressing the switch displays the item and its setting value on the viewfinder screen.
You can then change the setting by pressing and turning the MENU knob.
The viewfinder screen display disappears approximately three seconds after the last operation.
211
Setting power saving functions
You can limit the function of some output connectors to save power consumption.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the POWER SAVE page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select the desired item, and press the
MENU knob.
You can set the following items on the
POWER SAVE page.
Item
ETHERNET/
USB
REC AUDIO
OUT
TEST OUT
SAVE
Wi-Fi
Description
Enables or disables the network connector and USB connector.
Puts the AUDIO OUT connectors in EE or SAVE mode.
Switches the TEST OUT connector power saving function on and off.
ON: No signals are output if a cable is not connected.
OFF: Signals are always output, regardless of whether a cable is connected.
Enables or disables the wireless LAN function.
a) The unit must be powered off and on again to enable changes to this setting.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting, and press the MENU knob.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items.
Setting up a wireless LAN
You can install the optional CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi
Adaptor in this unit, and set up a wireless LAN as explained in this section.
When you connect this unit to a computer over a network, you can make the settings explained here from a Web menu. For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with the optional CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi
Adaptor.
You can also use a LAN connection between a computer and the camcorder using an optional
CBK-WA100 Wireless Adaptor.
For details about attachment and operation, refer to the CBK-WA100 operation manual.
Notes
• For information about connecting to a wireless LAN, refer to the operation manual supplied with the optional CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi Adaptor.
• Even when the optional CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi Adaptor is installed in this unit, the message “NO Wi-Fi
ADAPTER!” may appear if you attempt to set up a wireless LAN immediately after powering the unit on.
If this occurs, wait for a while and try again.
• If the message “IEEE802.1X IS ENABLED!” appears when you change the settings, execute NET CFG
RESET on the NETWORK 2 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu and then try again.
• The proxy data recording function is disabled automatically whenever you enable the wireless LAN connection function.
If using the CBK-WA100, the following menu settings are not required.
Before starting, set ETHERNET/USB and Wi-Fi on the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu to “ENABL”.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the Wi-Fi page of the
MAINTENANCE menu, and then press the MENU knob.
See “Basic menu operations” (page 192) for
more information about menu operations.
M25 Wi-Fi TOP
Wi-Fi SETUP : EXEC
Wi-Fi STATUS : [-----]
WIRELESS MODE: 802.11b
SSID: (unknown)
CH : 1
AUTH : OPEN
ENCRYPTION : DISABLE
2
Select “Wi-Fi SETUP” and then press the MENU knob.
The screen changes to the Wi-Fi SETTING page.
Wi-Fi SETTING ESC
SCAN NETWORKS: EXEC
SSID: 00:11:22:33:44:55
NETWORK TYPE : ADHOC
CH : 1
AUTH : OPEN
ENCRYPTION : DISABLE
SET
3
Specify the connection destination (see the next section for how to specify it) .
To specify a connection destination by automatic detection
1
On the Wi-Fi SETTING page, select
“SCAN NETWORKS” and then press the MENU knob.
The screen changes to the NETWORKS page, and automatic detection of the connection destination starts.
Several minutes may be required for network detection.
P00 NETWORKS SCAN
01.SSID:
ESC
TYPE: ADHOC LVL : 4
MODE: 802.11b/g/n
02.SSID:
TYPE: INFRA LVL : 3
MODE: 802.11b/g/n
212
This page displays the following network items.
Item
SSID
TYPE
Description
Network name
Network connection mode
INFRA: Infrastructure mode
ADHOC: Ad hoc mode
LVL Signal strength
0 (minimum) to 4 (maximum)
MODE IEEE 802.11 standard
2
Select the desired access point or computer from the detected items, and then press the MENU knob.
You return to the Wi-Fi SETTING page.
Check the various setting items.
To return to the Wi-Fi SETTING page
If you do not want to specify a connection destination on this page, or if no connection destination was detected, select “ESC” and then press the MENU knob to return to the
Wi-Fi SETTING page.
To use the Wi-Fi remote control
When using a Wi-Fi connection, you can access the Wi-Fi remote control built into the camcorder from a Wi-Fi connected device, such as a smartphone or tablet.
You can control the camcorder remotely using the
Wi-Fi remote control. You can start/stop recording, and adjust the iris, zoom, and other settings using the remote control. This function is useful when the camcorder is mounted in a remote location, such as on a crane.
Notes
• Some serial lenses cannot be controlled using the Wi-
Fi remote control. When a lens that cannot be operated using the Wi-Fi remote control is attached, the iris and zoom settings are displayed as “0” on the Wi-Fi remote control, even when you try to adjust the values from the Wi-Fi remote control.
• When a lens that can be controlled using the Wi-Fi remote control is attached to the camcorder, the zoom cannot be adjusted if the zoom servo function is disabled on the lens.
• When a remote control device is connected to the
REMOTE connector of the camcorder and the white balance memory on the camcorder is set to other than
“A (memory A),” turning the Wi-Fi remote control on/ off may change the color.
• When a remote control device is connected to the
REMOTE connector of the camcorder, that device has
213 priority and the camcorder cannot be controlled using the Wi-Fi remote control.
To display the Wi-Fi remote control on the camcorder
1
Set Wi-Fi to “ENABL” on the POWER
SAVE page of the OPERATION menu.
2
Set Wi-Fi/ETHER RM to “RM” on the
CAM CONFIG 3 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu.
To configure the remote device
Configure the following on the smartphone, tablet, or other device.
1
Connect the camcorder and the device using Wi-Fi.
2
Launch a browser on the device, and access “http://<IP address of camcorder
(MAINTENANCE >Network Setting
>IP Address value)/rm.html.”
For example, enter “http://192.168.1.10/ rm.html” if the IP address is 192.168.1.10.
When the connection is successful, the Wi-Fi
Remote screen appears on the device.
Thereafter, operate the camcorder using the screen displayed on the device.
You can disable operation of the REC button by dragging the Lock bar to the right.
Notes
• To display the page for a smartphone, change
“rm.html” to “rms.html” in the URL. To display the page for a tablet, change “rm.html” to “rmt.html” in the URL. When “rm.html” is entered, the page automatically switches for display on the corresponding device. However, the appropriate page may not be displayed, depending on the device.
• The Wi-Fi Remote screen may not match the settings on the camcorder under the following circumstances.
If this occurs, reload the browser window.
- If the camcorder is restarted while connected
- If the camcorder is operated directly while connected
- If the device has been reconnected
- If the browser Forward/Back buttons have been used
• The Wi-Fi Remote control may not function if the wireless signal strength becomes weak.
• The smartphone or table device used may not support ad-hoc mode, depending on the device. For details, refer to the operating instructions provided with the smartphone or tablet device.
• If using the Wi-Fi remote control via the CBK-WA100
Wireless Adaptor, turn the camcorder on first and then turn on the CBK-WA100.
Compatible devices
The supported devices, OS, and browsers that can be used to operate the Wi-Fi remote control are shown in the following table.
Device
PC
OS
Windows 7
Browser
Internet Explorer 8 or 9
Safari 5.1.6
Mac OS
Tablet
10.7.4
Smartphone Android 2.3.3 Standard browser iOS 5.1.1
Safari
Android 4.0.3 Standard browser iOS 5.1.1
Safari
To specify a connection destination manually
Specify the following items on the Wi-Fi
SETTING page.
Item name Setting
SSID (network name) Up to 32 alphanumeric characters or symbols
NETWORK TYPE
(connection mode)
INFRA: Infrastructure mode
ADHOC: Ad hoc mode
CH (wireless channel) 1 to 11 (can be specified only in ad hoc mode)
AUTH (network authentication)
OPEN: Open system authentication
SHARED: Shared key authentication
WPA: WPA (Wi-Fi
Protected Access) authentication
WPA2: WPA2 (Wi-Fi
Protected Access 2) authentication
ENCRYPTION (data encryption)
DISABLE: Disable
WEP: WEP (Wired
Equivalent Privacy) method
TKIP: TKIP (Temporal
Key Integrity Protocol) method
AES: AES (Advanced
Encryption Standard) method
Note
Some limitations apply to combinations of the
“NETWORK TYPE”, “AUTH”, and “ENCRYPTION” settings.
To enter an SSID
Select SSID, press the MENU knob to display the
Wi-Fi>SSID page, and then press the MENU knob again.
When you press the MENU knob once more, an x appears over the first character in the input string, and the unit enters character input mode.
Wi-Fi>SSID
SSID:?
RET
!#$%&"()+.-,0123456789:
=@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV
WXYZ[]^_abcdefghijklmnop qrstuvwxyz{}~
INS DEL RET ESC END
See steps 3 and 4
in “Setting the shot ID” (page 205)
for information about how to enter characters.
To set ENCRYPTION options
Depending on the setting of ENCRYPTION, you must set the following options.
When ENCRYPTION is WEP:
Item name Setting
WEP KEY INDEX 1 to 4
INPUT SELECT
(network key format and length)
ASCII5: 5 characters ASCII format
ASCII13: 13 characters
ASCII format
HEX10: 10 hexadecimal digits
HEX26: 26 hexadecimal digits
KEY (network key) ASCII characters or hexadecimal number (format specified with INPUT
SELECT)
When ENCRYPTION is TKIP or AES:
Item name Setting
INPUT SELECT
(network key format and length)
ASCII8-63: 63 characters
ASCII 8-bit format
HEX64: 64 hexadecimal digits
214
Item name Setting
KEY (network key) ASCII characters or hexadecimal number (format specified with INPUT
SELECT)
See steps 3 and 4
in “Setting the shot ID” (page 205)
for information about how to enter the key.
To specify a connection destination by
WPS operations
In infrastructure mode only, you can use WPS
(Wi-Fi Protected Setup) to specify a connection destination (access point) semi-automatically.
Notes
• WPS does not support the following.
- Ad hoc mode
- IEEE 802.1x
• The access point must support WPS.
• In addition to the settings made here, you must also make network settings on the NETWORK page of the
MAINTENANCE menu.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the WPS page of the
MAINTENANCE menu and then press the MENU knob.
See “Basic menu operations” (page 192) for
more information about menu operations.
2
Select “ENABLE” and then press the
MENU knob.
The screen changes to the operation screen.
M24 WPS TOP
Wi-Fi : ENABL
WPS MODE : ONE PUSH
WPS START : EXEC
WPS STATUS : -----
3
Set WPS MODE to one of the following.
ONE PUSH: Connect using the one push method
PIN CODE: Connect using the PIN code entry method.
When you select “PIN CODE”
A PIN item appears. Execute “UPDATE” in that item to display a PIN code for this unit.
4
Select “WPS START” and then press the MENU knob.
WPS setup starts. During execution, the progress and results appear after WPS
STATUS.
SCANNING: Scanning for an access point
OK: Detection successful
NG: Detection failed
When execution finishes, the screen changes to the ACCESS PNT page.
5
Select the desired connection destination from the detected access points, and then press the MENU knob.
Setting the color temperature manually
You can manually adjust the value of the white balance by setting the color temperature.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the WHITE page of the PAINT menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select the desired item, and press the
MENU knob.
You can set the following items on the
WHITE page.
Item
COLOR
TEMP <A>
Description
Sets the color temperature for the desired value. Adjust the value while looking at the real image because error tends to be bigger for adjustment of high color temperature.
C TEMP
BAL <A>
Adjusts the value more precisely when the color temperature adjustment through COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory.
R GAIN <A> Changes only the value of R
GAIN.
215
Item Description
B GAIN <A> Changes only the value of B
GAIN.
The above table shows the adjustment of the white balance of channel A. Items followed by <B> are used to adjust the white balance of channel B.
3
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press the MENU knob.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items.
Specifying an offset for the auto white balance setting
By setting an offset for the value of auto white balance, you can make the picture warmer or colder.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the OFFSET WHT page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select the desired item, and press the
MENU knob.
You can set the following items in the
OFFSET WHT page.
Item
OFFSET
WHITE <A>
WARM-
COOL <A>
WARM-
COOL BAL
<A>
Description
When this item is set to ON, the offset adjusted on this page is added to the white balance for channel A.
When OFFSET WHITE <A> is “ON”, sets the offset for the white balance of channel A, using the color temperature.
Adjust the value while looking at the real image because error tends to be bigger for adjustment of high color temperature.
Adjusts the value more precisely if the adjustment by
WARM-COOL <A> is not satisfactory.
216
Item
OFFSET
WHITE <B>
WARM-
COOL <B>
WARM-
COOL BAL
<B>
Description
When this item is set to ON, the offset adjusted on this page is added to the white balance for channel B.
When OFFSET WHITE <B> is “ON”, sets the offset for the white balance of channel B, using the color temperature.
Adjust the value while looking at the real image because error tends to be bigger for adjustment of high color temperature.
Adjusts the value more precisely if the adjustment by
WARM-COOL <B> is not satisfactory.
3
Set the WHITE BAL switch to the channel (A or B) that you want to set.
Note
If the WHITE BAL switch is not set to A or B, the adjusted value is not reflected in the video output even though you carry out the following operation.
4
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press the MENU knob.
If you want to set the other channel, go back to step 2 .
Selecting the lens file
The LENS FILE page of the USER menu allows you to change the lens file according to the lens in use.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the LENS FILE page of the
USER menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
The LENS FILE page shows the name (F.ID) of the currently selected lens file.
The lens name (L.ID) and manufacturer
(L.MF) appear when a lens that supports serial communications is mounted.
U17 LENS FILE TOP
LENS FILE SELECT: 1
F.ID:No Offset
<LENS INFORMATION>
L.ID: J16ax8B4 IRSD
L.MF: Canon
2
Select LENS FILE SELECT, and press the MENU knob.
3
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press the MENU knob.
Setting the UMID data
What is a UMID?
The UMID (Unique Material Identifier) is a unique identifier for audio-visual material defined by the SMPTE 330M-2004 standard.
The UMID may be used either as the 32-byte
Basic UMID or as the Extended UMID, which includes an additional 32 bytes of Source Pack to make a total 64 bytes.
For details, refer to SMPTE 330M.
Globally unique ID is automatically recorded in clip units.
The Extended UMID is metadata that provides additional information such as location, time/ date, company and so on.
Using the Extended UMID
You have to enter a country code, organization code and user code. Set the country code referring to the ISO 3166 table, and set the organization code and user code independently.
For details, see “About UMID ownership information” (page 217).
Functions of UMID data
The UMID data enables the followings:
• Add a globally unique ID to every clip of audiovisual material. The unique ID is used to detect the material source and to link it with the original source material.
• Distinguishing between original material and copied material. 00 is added to the Instance
Number for original material.
• Recording based on the UTC. The UTC is used when recording the UMID. This enables uniform control of source material recorded all over the world based on the universal timecode.
• Calculating the date difference among source materials. The source material is recorded based on the MJD (Modified Julian Date), which enables easy calculation of date difference among source materials.
To set UMID ownership information
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the UMID SET page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Set the following item.
Item Contents
COUNTRY CODE Country code
ORGANIZATION
USER CODE
TIME ZONE
Organization code
User code
Time difference from
UTC
For details on how to enter characters, see
“Setting the shot ID” (page 205).
3
Press the MENU knob.
About UMID ownership information
COUNTRY CODE
Enter an abbreviated alphanumeric string (4-byte alphanumeric strings) according to the values defined in ISO 3166-1.
There are about 240 country codes.
Find your own country code on the following home page.
Refer to ISO 3166-1: http://www.iso.org/iso/country-codes/ iso_3166_code_lists.htm
When the country code is less than 4 bytes, the active part of the code will occupy the first part of the 4-bytes and the remainder must be filled with the space character (20h).
217
Example: In the case of Japan
For Japan, if the country code is JP, it is 2 bytes, if JPN, it is 3 bytes.
Thus, enter the following:
JP_ _ or
JPN _ where _ represents a space.
ORGANIZATION (organization code)
Enter an abbreviated 4-byte alphanumeric string for the organization code.
Notes
• Organization codes must be acquired by applying to the SMPTE registration office.
When no organization code has been acquired, it is forbidden to enter an arbitrary string. As a rule, the code “00” must be entered. Freelance operators who do not belong to an origination should enter “~”.
• There are no problems in recording or playing back audio-video signals, if ORGANIZATION is not set.
USER CODE
Enter the 4-byte alphanumeric strings for user identification.
The user code is registered with each organization locally. It is usually not centrally registered.
When the user code is less than 4 bytes, enter the user code from the beginning of the 4 bytes and enter the space character (20h) in the remaining strings.
The methods used depend on the organization.
Note
User code cannot be entered when no organization code has been entered.
TIME ZONE
Set the time difference from UTC.
Notes
• The UTC is calculated based on the local time, using the time zone. If the time zone is not set, the UTC is not recorded correctly.
• When you change the time zone, adjust the internal clock to local time and turn the power of the camcorder off and then the power on again.
218
Chapter
7
Saving and Loading User Setting Data
Saving and Recalling
User Files
The camcorder is equipped with a USB connector, which enables you to save the settings in the USER menu as a user file onto a USB flash drive. You can load these files from the USB flash drive for immediate recall of a particular setting configuration.
In addition to user files, you can save scene files, reference files, lens files and ALL files on a USB flash drive.
When a menu is displayed, connecting a USB flash drive displays the appropriate file-related menu page automatically.
Saving user menu data on a USB flash drive
You can save USER menu settings held in the camcorder as user files on a USB flash drive.
You can save up to 100 user files on a USB flash drive.
Connect the USB flash drive, then proceed as follows.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the USER FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
?F01 USER FILE TOP
USER FILE LOAD : EXEC
USER FILE SAVE : EXEC
F.ID : ssssssssssssssss
USER PRESET : EXEC
To set a file ID for the data to be saved
Set the file ID before going to step 2 .
For details on setting the file ID, see “To set the file ID” (page 220).
2
Select USER FILE SAVE, and press the
MENU knob.
The USER SAVE page appears.
Up to 20 pages, from P00 to P19, can be used to save user files on the USB flash drive.
Each page can hold up to five files.
3
Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file number appears, and press the MENU knob.
4
Select the desired file number, and press the MENU knob.
The message “SAVE OK? YES b NO” appears.
If a file number is followed by “NEW FILE”, this means that the file is empty. If data is stored in the file, the file number is followed by the file name.
5
To carry out the save, select YES and press the MENU knob.
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b pointing to NO.
When the saving is completed, the message
“COMPLETE” appears.
If no USB flash drive is connected
The message “NO USB MEMORY” will appear. Connect a USB flash drive and carry out the operation once again.
If you select a file number where data has already been saved
The message “OVERWRITE OK? YES b
NO” appears.
• To stop overwriting, press the MENU knob leaving b pointing to NO.
• To overwrite, select YES and press the
MENU knob.
You can select the information displayed on each USER SAVE or USER LOAD page.
219
For details, see “To select the file information items to be displayed” (page 221).
About the USER menu settings to be saved on a
USB flash drive
Settings for items on all pages of the USER menu are saved on the USB flash drive as a user file.
Note
The following items cannot be saved.
• LOAD CUSTOM DATA, LOAD OUT OF USER,
BEFORE FILE PAGE, and USER LOAD WHITE on the USER FILE 2 page
• SCENE WHITE DATA on the REFERENCE page
• SLOW&QUICK, FRAME RATE on the REC
FUNCTION page
• LENS FILE SELECT on the LENS FILE page
• SYSTEM LINE, SYSTEM FREQUENCY, and
COUNTRY on the FORMAT page
• NUMERIC on the CLIP TITLE page
• SKIN AREA IND and SKIN DTL SELECT on the
SKIN DETAIL page
• MATRIX AREA IND and MTX(MULTI) AXIS on the MTX MULTI page
If data cannot be saved
If one of the following error messages appears during or after the save operation, then the data was not saved.
Error message Cause
NO USB
MEMORY
(flashing)
USB
MEMORY
INHIBIT!
(flashing)
USB
MEMORY
ERROR
(flashing)
No USB flash drive is connected.
The LOCK switch on the
USB flash drive is set to the write protect position.
A USB flash drive error occurred.
Action
Connect or reconnect the
USB flash drive.
Set the LOCK switch to the write enable position.
Reconnect to confirm the error, and consult a Sony service representative.
To set the file ID
You can set an file ID before you save your data as a user file. This will help you identify the user file quickly. The file ID that has been set is saved together with the data.
Note
Set the file ID before saving data on the USB flash drive.
Otherwise, the file ID is not saved with the other data.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the USER FILE page of the
FILE menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select F. ID, and press the MENU knob.
A character table appears.
F01 USER FILE
USER FILE LOAD : EXEC
USER FILE SAVE : EXEC
F.ID :?
x
TOP
i#$%&'()*+,-./012345678
9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk lmnopqrstuvwxyz~
INS DEL RET ESC END
3
Follow steps 3 and 4 described in
“Setting the shot ID” (page 205) to enter
characters.
4
When you have finished entering the file ID, turn the MENU knob to move x to END, and press the MENU knob.
The entered file ID is now displayed.
F01 USER FILE TOP
USER FILE LOAD : EXEC
USER FILE SAVE : EXEC
F.ID : ID-001
USER PRESET : EXEC
File ID that has been set appears.
When you carry out a user file save operation
(see page 219) , the set file ID is saved on the
USB flash drive together with the data.
220
To select the file information items to be displayed
You can select the user file information items to be displayed on the USER FILE SAVE page and
USER FILE LOAD page (P00 to P19), that are used to save and load data to and from a USB flash drive.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display a USER FILE LOAD page or
USER FILE SAVE page of the USER
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select DISPLAY MODE, and press the
MENU knob.
3
Select the desired type of file information, and press the MENU knob.
Display type Description
ALL File ID (10 characters) and date (year/month/day)
F.ID
DATE
MODEL
File ID (16 characters)
Date saved (year/month/day/ hours/minutes/seconds)
Information on the model
Loading saved data from a USB flash drive
Note
The data loaded from the USB flash drive overwrites the data saved in the camcorder.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the USER FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select USER FILE LOAD, and press the MENU knob.
The USER LOAD page appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file number appears, then press the MENU knob.
4
Select the desired file number, and press the MENU knob.
The message “LOAD OK? YES b NO” appears.
5
To carry out the load, select YES and press the MENU knob.
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b pointing to NO.
The access indicator lights.
When the load is completed, the message
“COMPLETE” appears and the access indicator goes off.
If data cannot be loaded
If one of the following error messages appears during or after the load operation, then the data was not loaded.
Error message
NO USB
MEMORY
(flashing)
USB
MEMORY
ERROR
(flashing)
FILE
ERROR
(flashing)
Cause
No USB flash drive is connected.
A USB flash drive error occurred.
The USB flash drive contains data that cannot be loaded into this camcorder.
Action
Connect or reconnect the
USB flash drive.
Reconnect to confirm the error, and consult a Sony service representative.
Data saved on a
USB flash drive using a camcorder whose model is not the same as this camcorder cannot be loaded into this camcorder.
Returning the user file settings to the standard settings
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the USER FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
221
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select USER PRESET, and press the
MENU knob.
Saving and Loading
Scene Files
You can save various settings for shooting a particular scene as a scene file. By loading the scene file, you can quickly recreate setup conditions suitable for the scene. You can save up to five scene files in the camcorder memory and up to 100 scene files on a USB flash drive.
You can also load data from the USB flash drive into the camcorder memory.
Data that can be saved in a scene file
You can save the following data in a scene file:
• Values adjusted using the PAINT menu
• Shutter speed settings made in the standard mode and ECS mode
• The white balance data included in a scene file depends on the SCENE WHITE DATA setting on the REFERENCE page of the FILE menu.
Saving a scene file
To save a scene file on a USB flash drive, connect the USB flash drive into the USB connector before starting the following operation.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the SCENE FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operation, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
?F04 SCENE FILE s 1 :STANDARD
2 :STANDARD s
3 :STANDARD s s
4 :STANDARD
5 :STANDARD
STANDARD
TOP
SCENE RECALL : EXEC
F.ID: STANDARD
To set a file ID for the data to be saved
Set the file ID before going to step 2 .
For details on setting the file ID, see “To set the file ID” (page 220).
222
2
Select SCENE STORE, and press the
MENU knob.
The SCENE STORE page appears.
3
Press the MENU knob, then select the desired file number, and press the
MENU knob again.
The file to be saved is selected.
When no USB flash drive is connected
Select the desired memory number, and press the MENU knob.
When the save is completed, the SCENE
FILE page appears again.
When you select a file number where data has already been saved
The message “OVERWRITE OK? YES b
NO” appears.
• To cancel the overwriting, press the MENU knob leaving b pointing to NO.
• To overwrite, select YES and press the
MENU knob.
When a USB flash drive is connected
You can use up to 20 pages, from P01 to P20, to save scene files on the USB flash drive.
Each page can hold up to five files.
1 Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file number appears, then press the MENU knob.
2 Select the desired file number, and press the MENU knob.
The message “STORE OK? YES b
NO” appears.
3 To carry out the save, select YES and press the MENU knob.
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b pointing to NO.
You can select the file information items to be displayed on each page of SCENE
STORE and SCENE RECALL.
For details, see “To select the file information items to be displayed” (page 221).
To save scene files stored in the camcorder memory on a USB flash drive
All five scene files stored in the camcorder memory can be saved on a USB flash drive in a single operation.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the SCENE FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select SCENE STORE, and press the
MENU knob.
One of the SCENE STORE pages appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select the desired SCENE STORE page, and press the MENU knob.
4
Select 5FILE SAVE B MEM1-5, and press the MENU knob.
The message “STORE OK? YES b
NO”appears.
5
To carry out the save, select YES and press the MENU knob.
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b pointing to NO.
When the save is completed, the message
“COMPLETE” appears.
Note
If files have been saved in the page selected in step 3 , those files are replaced with files loaded from the camcorder memory. For example, files from 001 to 005 are replaced by the above procedure.
To set the file ID
You can set an file ID before you save your data as a scene file. This will help you identify the scene file quickly. The file ID that has been set is saved together with the data.
You can carry out a scene file ID setting operation on the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu.
For details about this operation, see the description of step 2
and following of “To set the file ID”
223
To select the file information items to be displayed
You can select the items of file information to be displayed on the SCENE STORE pages (P01 to
P20) or the SCENE RECALL pages (P01 to P20) used for saving data to or loading data from a
USB flash drive.
You can select the scene file information items to be displayed on the SCENE STORE page and
SCENE RECALL page of the SCENE FILE menu.
For details about item selection, see the description of step 2
and following of “To select the file information items to be displayed” (page 221).
Loading scene files
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the SCENE FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
To load the scene file stored in the camcorder, select the desired file number, and press the MENU knob.
s on the left of the file number changes to x . The camcorder is set up according to the loaded scene file.
F04 SCENE FILE s s s
1 :SCENE 25
2 :SCENE 26
3 :SCENE 27
4 :SCENE 28
5 :NO FILE
STANDARD
TOP
SCENE RECALL : EXEC
SCENE STORE : EXEC
F.ID :SCENE21
When DISP SCENE FILE on the VF DISP 3 page of the OPERATION menu is set to
“ON”, the number of the currently loaded scene file is displayed on the viewfinder screen
.
To cancel the selected scene file
Turn the MENU knob to move b to x , and press the MENU knob again. x changes to s . The camcorder returns to the settings before selecting this scene file.
To load a scene file saved on a USB flash drive
1 Select SCENE RECALL, and press the
MENU knob.
The SCENE RECALL page appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file number appears, then press the MENU knob.
3 Select the desired file number, and press the MENU knob.
The message “RECALL OK? YES b
NO” appears.
3
To carry out the recall, select YES and press the MENU knob.
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b pointing to NO.
When the loading is completed, the message
“COMPLETE” appears. The camcorder is set up according to the loaded scene file. If no file is present with a particular file number, this is shown as “NO FILE”.
To load scene files from a USB flash drive into the camcorder memory
You can load up to five scene files stored on a
USB flash drive into the camcorder memory in a single operation.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the SCENE FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select SCENE RECALL, and press the
MENU knob.
The SCENE RECALL page appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob until the SCENE
RECALL page which contains the desired scene files appears, and press the MENU knob.
4
Select 5FILE LOAD b MEM1-5, and press the MENU knob.
The message “RECALL OK? YES b NO” appears.
224
P01 SCENE RECALL ESC
RECALL OK? YES NO
DISPLAY MODE : ALL
001.SCENE1
002.SCENE2
003.NO FILE
004.SCENE4
005.SCENE5
***.5FILE LOAD MEM1-5
Jumping to a File-
Related Menu Page when Connecting a USB
Flash Drive
5
To carry out the load (recall), select
YES and press the MENU knob.
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b pointing to NO.
When loading is complete, the message
“COMPLETE” appears and the access indicator goes off.
Notes
• The scene files loaded from a USB flash drive overwrite data saved in the camcorder memory.
• To load the scene file saved in the camcorder memory when the USB flash drive is connected, return to the P00 SCENE RECALL page and load the desired scene file in the camcorder memory.
• When there is no file to be loaded (shown as “NO
FILE”), an existing file of the same number is unaffected. In the example shown in step 4 ,
MEM3 is not overwritten.
Returning the scene file settings to the standard settings
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the SCENE FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select STANDARD, and press the
MENU knob.
s displayed on the left of STANDARD changes to x . When x changes to s once again, the settings of the camcorder are reset to the standard settings.
If you press the MENU knob again while x is displayed, the operation is cancelled and the camcorder returns to the settings before
STANDARD was selected.
A USB flash drive enables you to save user files, scene files, lens files, reference files and ALL files.
The camcorder menu system allows you to make a setting so that when a USB flash drive holding these files is connected while in menu operating mode, a menu page relating to the desired file is automatically displayed on the screen. Thus you can proceed to file operation quickly. This is very convenient especially when you manage data files using USB flash drives.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the USB MEMORY page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
2
Select USB IN > JUMP TO, and press the MENU knob.
The USB IN > JUMP TO page allows you to select one of the following settings.
Setting Description
OFF Disables this function. Menu pages do not change when a USB flash drive is connected.
USER Jumps to the USER FILE page.
ALL Jumps to the ALL FILE page.
SCENE Jumps to the SCENE FILE page.
LENS Jumps to the LENS FILE 1 page.
REFER Jumps to the REFERENCE page.
USER 1 Jumps to the USER 1 FILE page.
3
Turn the MENU knob until the name of the desired file page appears, then press the MENU knob.
Note
In the following cases, jumping to the target page is impossible even when a USB flash drive is inserted.
• When the power is turned on after you insert a USB flash drive.
225
• When OFF is selected on the USB IN > JUMP TO page.
• When any of the following menu pages is already displayed.
- A file-related page such as the USER FILE page of the FILE menu
- USB MEMORY, ALL FILE, SCENE FILE, LENS
FILE, or REFERENCE page
226
Chapter
8
File Operations
Overview
A remote computer can be connected to this unit via FTP and used to operate on recorded data which has been saved in data files, such as video and audio data files.
Connect the network connectors on this unit and the remote computer, using a network cable
.
Directory structure
The following figure shows the directory structure of discs visible to a remote computer.
Note
This structure is not the same as the actual structure recorded on the disc.
227
(Continued) a) Root directory b) Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE c) Files generated when voice over editing is executed on the PDW-HR1.
(Continued)
File operation restrictions
This section explains which operations are possible on files stored in each directory.
When required, the following operation tables distinguish reading and writing from partial reading and writing.
Read: Read data sequentially from the start to the end of the file.
Partial read: Read only a part of the data in the file.
Root directory
Write: Write data sequentially from the start to the end of the file.
Partial write: Write data to a part of the file only.
Note
Operations other than Read and Partial read are possible only when the Write Inhibit tab of the disc is set to recording enabled.
File name Content
INDEX.XML
ALIAS.XML a)
Contains data for management of the material on the disc.
Contains conversion tables for assigning user-defined names to clips and clip lists.
Yes
DISCMETA.XML
Contains metadata to indicate the disc properties.
MEDIAPRO.XML
Contains a list of materials on the disc, basic properties, related information, and information about access methods.
SYSPRO.XML Contains system setting information and menu setting information for the devices.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Operations
Read/
Partial read
Write/
Partial write
Rename Create Delete
Yes No No No No
No
Yes
No
No
b)
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
228
File name Content
Other files Files other than the above a) Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE.
b) Only files which can be written by XDCAM.
Operations
Read/
Partial
Write/
Partial
Rename Create Delete read
write
No No -
Notes
• Directories cannot be created in the root directory.
• The directories in the root directory (Clip, Edit, Sub,
UserData, General, and PROAV) cannot be deleted or renamed.
Clip directory
File name
C*.MXF
a)
C*M01.XML
C*M02.KLV
a)
a)
Content
Clip file created by recording (MXF file)
*: 0001 to 9999
Metadata file generated automatically when C*.MXF file is created.
*: 0001 to 9999
User metadata file. This type of file is generated automatically during recording via an FTP connection when the unit recognizes that an MXF file contains metadata that was generated by a non-
XDCAM device.
*: 0001 to 9999
Files other than the above
Yes
Yes
-
Operations
Read/
Partial read
Write/
Partial write
Yes
No
b), c)
Rename Create Delete
Yes
d)
Yes
c)
Yes
e)
Yes
Yes
No
f)
f)
No
No
-
g)
g)
No
Yes
No
h)
f)
No
Yes
-
i)
i)
Other files a) The “C*” part can be changed to a user-defined name.
b) Overwriting is not possible.
c) Only files which are 2 seconds or longer in length, in a format matching the format (system frequency
(59.94i, 50i, or 25P)) and recording format (MPEG
HD422 and number of audio channels) of the recorded sections of the disc, and which can be overwritten by
XDCAM. (Partial writing is not possible.) d) Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE.
e) Any clip may be selected and deleted.
f) Only files which can be written by XDCAM.
g) When the “C*” part of a C*.MXF file name is changed, a C*M01.XML file (or a C*M02.KLV file) with the same name in the “C*” part is also changed automatically.
h) When a C*.MXF file is created, a C*M01.XML file with the same name in the “C*” part is created automatically.
i) When a C*.MXF file is deleted, the C*M01.XML file
(or a C*M02.KLV file) with the same name in the
“C*” part is also deleted automatically.
Note
Directories cannot be created in the Clip directory.
229
Component directory
File name Content
P*.MXF
a) Audio clip files (MXF files) generated when you execute voice over editing on the PDW-HR1
*: 0001 to 0099
Other files Files other than the above -
Operations
Read/ Write/
Partial read
Partial write
Yes
Yes
b), c)
No a) The “P*” part can be handled like a file with a userdefined name.
b) Only files which are 2 seconds or longer in length and which can be written by XDCAM.
c) Overwriting is not possible.
d) Multiple files cannot be opened at the same time.
Rename
Yes
-
e)
Create
Yes
No
b), d)
Delete
Yes
-
f) e) Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu is set to “FREE”.
f) Selection and deletion of any specified clip is possible.
Note
Directories cannot be created in the Component directory.
Edit directory
File name Content Operations
Read/
Partial read
Write/
Partial write
Rename Create Delete
Yes
Yes
b)
Yes
c)
Yes d) Yes
Yes
Yes
b)
No
e)
No
f)
No
g)
E*E01.SMI
a)
E*M01.XML
Other files
a)
Clip list file
*: 0001 to 0099
Metadata file generated automatically when E*E01.SMI file is created.
*: 0001 to 0099
Files other than the above a) The “E*” part can be changed to a user-defined name.
b) Only files which can be written by XDCAM. Partial writing is not possible.
c) Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE.
d) Only files which can be written by XDCAM.
e) When the “E*” part of a E*E01.SMI is changed, an
E*M01.XML file with the same name in the “E*” part is also changed automatically. f) When an E*E01.SMI file is created, an E*M01.XML file with the same name in the “E*” part is also generated automatically. g) When an E*E01.SMI file is deleted, an E*M01.XML file with the same name in the “E*” part is also deleted automatically.
Note
Directories cannot be created in the Edit directory.
No No -
230
Sub directory
File name Content Operations
Read/ Write/
Partial read
Partial write
Rename Create Delete
Yes No
No
b)
No
c)
No
d)
C*S01.MXF
a) Proxy AV data (MXF file) generated automatically when a C*.MXF file is created.
*: 0001 to 9999
Files other than the above Other files a) The “C*” part can be changed to a user-defined name.
b) When the “C*” part of a C*.MXF file name is changed, a C*S01.MXF file with the same name in the
“C*” part is generated automatically.
c) When a C*.MXF file is created, a C*S01.MXF file with the same name in the “C*” part is generated automatically.
No No d) When a C*.MXF file is deleted, the C*S01.MXF file with the same name in the “C*” part is also deleted automatically.
Note
Directories cannot be created in the Sub directory.
UserData directory
File name Content
Any file a) UTF-8 file names can be up to 63 bytes in length.
(Depending on the character type, file names
(including extension) may be limited to 21 characters.)
Operations
Read/
Partial read
Write/
Partial write
Rename Create Delete
Yes Yes
Yes
a) Yes Yes
The following directory operations are possible in the
UserData directory.
• Directory creation (up to 62 levels, including the
UserData directory)
• Deletion and renaming of directories
General directory
File name Content
Any file a) UTF-8 file names can be up to 63 bytes in length.
(Depending on the character type, file names
(including extension) may be limited to 21 characters.)
The following directory operations are possible in the
General directory.
• Directory creation (up to 63 levels, including the
General directory)
• Deletion and renaming of directories
Operations
Read/
Partial read
Yes
Write/
Partial
Rename Create Delete write
Yes Yes
a) Yes Yes
Notes
• The maximum number of files that can be created on one disc, including directories, is 5,000 for a singlelayer disc and 6,000 for a dual-layer disc.
• File names and directory names can use letters, numbers, and symbols from the Unicode 2.0 (UTF-8) character set.
However, the following control characters and symbols cannot be used.
- Control characters: U+0000 to U+001F, U+007F
- Symbols: ", *, /, :, <, >, ', ?, \, |
231
• To create a new directory in the General directory, first create a directory on the desktop and rename it using only characters that can be used on this unit. Then drag it from the desktop and drop it in the General directory.
PROAV directory
This directory displays individual files on the disc.
To enable display of the PROAV directory, set
PROAV DISPLAY on the CAM CONFIG 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu to “ENABL”.
FTP File Operations
File operations between this unit and a remote computer can be carried out by the File Transfer
Protocol (called FTP below).
Preparations
1
Connect the network connectors of this unit and a remote computer with a network cable. Or connect this unit to the network to which the remote computer is connected.
2
On the NETWORK SETTING page of the MAINTENANCE menu, set the IP address and other network setting items for this unit.
1)
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu operations” (page 192).
If network settings have already been made
Check the IP address of this unit.
1) This unit is able to acquire an IP address automatically from a DHCP server. It also supports an Auto-IP function to assign an IP address automatically when access from this unit to the DHCP server times out. You can check
DHCP settings and the assigned IP address on the
NETWORK 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.
Note
If this unit is directly connected to a computer running Windows Vista or Windows 7 with a network cable, change the setting as follows:
(1) Open “Network and Sharing Center” >“Manage network connections” >“Local Area Connection” in the control panel. (2) In the “Local Area
Connection Properties”, uncheck the “Internet
Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6)”, and then click the
OK button.
3
Turn the MENU knob to scroll to the
POWER SAVE page of the
OPERATION menu, then press the
MENU knob.
232
U07 POWER SAVE TOP
ETHERNET/USB : DSABL
REC AUDIO OUT : EE
TEST OUT SAVE : ON
Wi-Fi : DSABL
4
Move b to ETHERNET/USB then press the MENU knob.
5
Turn the MENU knob to select
“ENABL”, then press the MENU knob.
Making FTP connections
FTP connections between this unit and a remote computer can be made with either of the following.
• The command prompt
• FTP client software
This section explains how to use the command prompt. For more information about using FTP client software, refer to the documentation of the
FTP client software on your system.
To log in
1
Load a disc into this unit and put the unit into the following state.
Recording, playback, serch, and other disc operations: Stopped
THUMBNAIL indicator: Off
Disc access by clip deletion, disc formatting, or other operation:
Stopped
Picture Cache function and Interval Rec function: Off
Recording of video from external devices:
Disabled
Connections between this unit and a computer by the Live Logging function: Disconnected
Setting of LIVE LOGGING on the REC
FUNCTION page of the
OPERATION menu: Values other than
VIEW (OFF or LIVE)
MENU ON/OFF switch: OFF
Unsaved current clip list: Save or clear
Note
Login is not possible unless the unit is in the state described above.
2
Start the command prompt.
3
Enter “ftp <SP> <IP address>”, and press the Enter key. (<SP> refers to a space.)
For example, if the IP address of this unit is set to 192.168.001.010, enter “ftp
192.168.1.10”.
Refer to the Windows help for more information about the FTP command.
If the connection succeeds, you are prompted to enter a user name.
4
Enter the user name “admin” and press the Enter key.
When the user name is verified, your are prompted to enter a password.
5
Enter the password and press the Enter key.
The password is set to the model name
(“pdw-850”) when the unit is shipped from the factory.
The login is complete when the password is verified.
See “Command list” (page 234) for the protocol
supported by this unit.
If the connection times out
This unit terminates FTP connections if no command is received within 90 seconds of the last command. If this occurs, log out (see the next section) and repeat steps 2 to 4 .
Note
If you power this unit off during an FTP connection, the data transferred thus far is discarded.
To log out
To log out after finishing file operations, enter
“QUIT” at the command prompt and press the
Enter key.
233
Command list
This unit supports standard protocol (see the next section)
, and extended protocol (see page 237) .
Notes
• To execute FTP commands, you must install application software with FTP function on your computer.
• The commands supported by application software vary.
• An FTP client that supports UTF-8 is required to use
Unicode characters other than ASCII characters.
Command prompt FTP commands do not support
UTF-8.
Standard commands
In the command syntax column, <SP> means a space, entered by pressing the space bar, and
<CRLF> means a new line, entered by pressing the Enter key.
U S ER
Send this command to begin the login process.
Syntax: USER <SP> <username> <CRLF>
Input example: USER admin
PA SS
After sending the USER command, send this command to complete the login process.
Syntax: PASS <SP> <password> <CRLF>
Input example: PASS pdw-850
QUIT
Terminates the FTP connection. If a file is being transferred, terminates after completion of the transfer.
Syntax: QUIT <CRLF>
PORT
Specifies the IP address and port to which this unit should connect for the next file transfer (for data transfer from this unit).
Syntax: PORT <SP> <h1,h2,h3,h4,p1,p2>
<CRLF> h1 (most significant byte) to h4 (least significant byte): IP address p1 (most significant byte), p2 (least significant byte): Port address
Input example: PORT 10,0,0,1,242,48
(IP address: 10.0.0.1, Port number: 62000)
PA S V
This command requests this unit to “Listen” on a data port (which is not its default data port). It puts this unit into passive mode, waiting for the remote computer to make a data connection.
Syntax: PASV <CRLF>
TYPE
Specifies the type of data to be transferred.
Syntax: TYPE <SP> <type-code (options delimited by <SP>)> <CRLF>
<type-code> can be any of the following. However, for XDCAM, data is always transferred as “I”, regardless of the type-code specification.
• A: ASCII
- N: Non-print
- T: Telnet format
- C: ASA Carriage Control
• E: EBCDIC
- N: Non-print
- T: Telnet format
- C: ASA Carriage Control
• I: IMAGE (Binary) (default)
• L: LOCAL BYTE
- SIZE: byte size
Input example: TYPE I
S TRU
Specifies the data structure.
Syntax: STRU <SP> <structure-code> <CRLF>
<structure-code> can be any of the following.
However, for XDCAM, the structure is always “F”, regardless of the structure-code specification.
• F: File structure (default)
• R: Record structure
• P: Page structure
Input example: STRU F
MODE
Specifies the transfer mode.
Syntax: MODE <SP> <mode-code> <CRLF>
<mode-code> can be any of the following.
However, for XDCAM, the mode is always “S”, regardless of the mode-code specification.
• S: Stream mode (default)
• B: Block mode
• C: Compressed mode
Input example: MODE S
234
LI S T
Sends a list of files from this unit to the remote computer.
Syntax: LIST <SP> <options> <SP> <path-name>
<CRLF>
<options> can be any of the following.
• -a: Also display file names that begin with “·”.
• -F: Append “/” to directory names.
The following data is transferred, depending on whether <path-name> specifies a directory or file.
• Directory specified: A list of the files in the specified directory
• File specified: Information about the specified file
• No specification: A list of the files in the current directory.
The wildcard characters “*” (any string) and “?”
(any character) may be used in <path-name>.
Input example 1: LIST -a Clip
Input example 2: LIST Clip/*.MXF
NL S T
Sends a list of file names from this unit to the remote computer, with no other information.
Syntax: NLST <SP> <options or path-name>
<CRLF>
The following options may be specified when no path name is specified.
• -a: Also display file names that begin with “.”
• -I: Display information other than file name
(gives the same result as the LIST command).
• -F: Append “/” to directory names.
The following data is transferred, depending on whether <path-name> specifies a directory or file.
• Directory specified: A list of the file names only in the specified directory
• No specification: A list of the file names only in the current directory.
The wildcard characters “*” (any string) and “?”
(any character) may be used in <path-name>.
Input example 1: NLST-I
Input example 2: NLST Clip/*.MXF
RETR
Begins transfer of a copy of a file in the specified path on this unit to the current directory on the remote computer.
Syntax: RETR <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>
Input example: RETR Clip/C0001.MXF
S TOR
Begins transfer of a copy of a file in the specified path on the remote computer to the current directory on this unit.
Depending on the type of file transferred, the following items are created.
• C*.MXF file
1), 3)
- C*M01.XML file (metadata)
- C*M02.KLV file (user metadata)
- C*S01.MXF file (proxy AV data)
- UMID (the UMID of the copy source file is not saved. However, it is saved if an immediately preceding SITE UMMD extended command has been issued.)
• E*E01.SMI file
2), 3)
- E*M01.XML file (metadata)
1) *: 0001 to 9999
2) *: 0001 to 0099
3) The unit can handle files with user-defined names in the “C*” and “E*”parts.
Notes
• For C*.MXF files, some data, such as file header metadata, may be missing.
• Depending on the transfer destination directory and the file type, transfer may not be possible.
• For C*.MXF files, the UMID of the copy source file is not saved. However, it is saved if an immediately preceding SITE UMMD extended command has been issued.
For details, see “File operation restrictions” (page
Syntax: STOR <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>
Input example: STOR Edit/E0001E01.SMI
RNFR
RNTO
Rename a file. Specify the file to be renamed with the
RNFR command, and specify the new name with the
RNTO command. (Always follow a RNFR command with a RNTO command.)
Syntax: RNFR <SP> <path-name (before change)> <CRLF>
RNTO <SP> <path-name (after change)>
<CRLF>
Input example: RNFR General/info.txt
RNTO General/clip_info.txt
DELE
Deletes the specified file on this unit.
Note
Depending on the directory and file type, deletion may not be possible.
235
For details, see “File operation restrictions” (page
Syntax: DELE <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>
Input example: DELE Clip/C0099.MXF
S TAT
Sends information about properties of the specified file, or about data transfer status, from this unit to the remote computer.
The following property information is sent, depending on the file type.
• MXF file
- File name
- File type
- CODEC type
- Frame rate
- Number of audio channels
- Duration
- UMID
• non-MXF file
- File name
Syntax: STAT <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>
The following data is transferred, depending on whether a file is specified with <path-name>.
• File specified: The properties of the specified file
• No specification: The size of the data transferred thus far (unit: bytes)
Input example: STAT Clip/C0001.MXF
ABOR
Requests this unit to abort a file transfer currently in progress.
Syntax: ABOR <CRLF>
S Y S T
Displays the system name of this unit.
Syntax: SYST <CRLF>
HELP
Displays a list of the commands supported by this unit, or an explanation of the specified command.
Syntax: HELP <SP> <command-name> <CRLF>
The following data is transferred, depending on whether a command name is specified with
<command-name>.
• Command name specified: Explanation of the specified command.
• No specification: Command list
• Input example: HELP RETR
NOOP
Does nothing except return a response. (Used to check whether this unit is running.)
Syntax: NOOP <CRLF>
PWD
Displays the current directory (“/” if the directory is the root directory).
Syntax: PWD <CRLF>
CWD
Changes the current directory (moves from the current directory to another directory).
Syntax: CWD <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>
Moves to a directory as follows, depending on whether a directory is specified with <path-name>.
• Directory specified: To the specified directory
• No specification: To the root directory
Input example: CWD General
CDUP
Moves one level up in the directory structure (makes the parent of the current directory be the current directory).
Syntax: CDUP <CRLF>
MKD
Creates a new directory.
Note
Directories can be created only in the General directory.
For details, see “File operation restrictions” (page
Syntax: MKD <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>
RMD
Deletes a directory.
Note
Directories can be deleted only in the General directory.
For details, see “File operation restrictions” (page
Syntax: RMD <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>
MDTM
Acquires the date and time of the most recent modification of the file in the format
236
“YYYYMMDDhhmmss” (YYYY: year, MM: month,
DD: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: second).
Note
The date and time cannot be acquired in the following cases.
• When the path name includes a wildcard (“*”, replaced by any string of characters, or “?”, replaced by any single character).
• When the size of the path name is greater than 1023 bytes.
Syntax: MDTM <SP> <path-name> <CRLF>
Input example: MDTM PROAV/
DISCMETA.XML
Extended commands
In the command syntax column, <SP> means a space, entered by pressing the space bar, and
<CRLF> means a new line, entered by pressing the Enter key.
S ITE REPF
Sends an MXF file from the specified path on this unit to the remote computer. This command allows you to specify a segment in the body of the MXF file (composed of video and audio data), for transfer of the required segment only.
Notes
• A segment greater than the file size cannot be specified.
• This command cannot be used when the path name contains a space. Use the SITE REPFL command instead.
Syntax: SITE REPF <SP> <path-name> <SP>
<start-frame> <SP> <transfer-size>
<CRLF>
<start-frame> specifies an offset from the start of the file. Data is transferred from the video frame at the offset (the first frame is 0).
<transfer-size> specifies the number of video frames to transfer (specify 0 to transfer to the end of the file).
Input example: SITE REPF Clip/C0001.MXF 5
150 (Transfer C0001.MXF. Body data is transferred only from frame 6 to frame
150.)
S ITE REPFL
Sends an MXF file from the specified path on this unit to the remote computer. This command allows you to
237 specify a segment in the body of the MXF file (composed of video and audio data), for transfer of the required segment only.
Note
A segment greater than the file size cannot be specified.
Syntax: SITE REPFL <SP> “<path-name>” <SP>
<start-frame> <SP> <transfer-size>
<CRLF>
<path-name> specifies the path name of the file to transfer. Enclose the path name in double quotation marks.
<start-frame> specifies an offset from the start of the file. Data is transferred from the video frame at the offset (the first frame is 0).
<transfer-size> specifies the number of video frames to transfer (specify 0 to transfer to the end of the file).
Input example: SITE REPFL “Clip/sakura
0001.MXF 5” 150 (Transfer sakura
0001.MXF. Body data is transferred only from frame 6 to frame 150.)
S ITE F S T S
Acquires the system status of this unit.
One of the following status codes is sent.
0: Initial state, or no disc is loaded.
1: File system mount is OK.
3: File system mount is not OK.
Syntax: SITE FSTS <CRLF>
S ITE MEID
Acquires the media ID of the disc loaded in this unit.
Syntax: SITE MEID <CRLF>
S ITE FUNC
Acquires the function and version of the expanded commands.
Information is sent in the following format.
<main function> <SP> <branch function> <SP>
<branch function version>
For XDCAM, sent in a format like “200 MXF DISK 1”
(200 is a response code).
Syntax: SITE FUNC <CRLF>
S ITE UMMD
When C*.MXF file is sent with the STOR, the copy source UMID is saved if this command is invoked immediately before the STOR command.
Syntax: SITE UMMD <CRLF>
S ITE DF
Acquires the amount of free disc space.
Syntax: SITE <SP> DF <CRLF>
S ITE CHMOD
Locks and unlocks clips. Also sets permissions for directories and files in the General directory.
Syntax: SITE CHMOD <SP> <flag> <SP> <pathname> <CRLF>
Specify one of the following values in <flag>, according to the specification in <path-name>.
• When a clip is specified in <path-name>:
444: Lock.
666: Unlock.
• When a directory in the General directory is specified in <path-name>:
555: Forbid writing to the directory.
777: Allow writing to the directory.
• When a file in the General directory is specified in <path-name>:
444: Forbid writing to and execution of the file.
555: Forbid writing to the file, but allow execution.
666: Allow writing to the file, but forbid execution.
777: Allow writing to and execution of the file.
Input example: SITE CHMOD 444 Clip/
C0001.MXF (Lock clip C0001.MXF)
S ITE TCPR
Presets the starting timecode of a clip copied with the
STOR command. Specify the timecode in the format
“ffssmmhh” (ff: frames, ss: seconds, mm: minutes, hh: hours).
Notes
• This command remains in effect until a STOR command is executed, or (if no STOR command is executed) until the FTP connection is terminated.
• If a SITE UMMD command is executed after this command, the SITE UMMD command takes priority and this command is discarded.
• If this command is executed several times in sequence, the last command takes priority.
Syntax: SITE TCPR <SP> <timecode > <CRLF>
Input example: SITE TCPR 00050001
(The starting timecode is preset to
01:00:05:00.)
Recording Continuous
Timecode via FTP
Connection
When you are connected to the unit via FTP, you can create new clips with timecode that is continuous with the timecode of the last frame of the last clip on the disc.
To record continuous timecode, set PRESET/
REGEN/CLOCK switch to “REGEN”, and then proceed as follows.
Use the “STOR” command to transfer clip files from the computer that is connected to this unit.
If you issue the “SITE UMMD” command immediately before the “STOR” command, the original timecode of the transferred file is recorded, regardless of the setting of PRESET/
REGEN/CLOCK switch.
238
Chapter
9
Maintenance
Testing the Camcorder before Shooting
4
After confirming that the disc is not write-protected, load the disc and close the disc compartment lid.
Testing the camera
Set the switches and selectors as follows.
Check the functions of the camcorder before setting out for a shooting session, preferably by operating the camcorder together with a color video monitor.
Preparations for testing
1
3 4 1
2
2
1
Attach a fully charged battery pack.
2
Set the POWER switch to ON and check that the BATT indicator shows at least five segments.
If the BATT indicator does not show at least five segments, replace the battery pack with a fully charged one.
3
Check that there are no obstructions near the disc compartment, and then press the EJECT button to open the disc compartment lid.
3 4 56
1 Iris switch: Automatic
2 Zoom selector: SERVO/MAN
3 VDR SAVE/STBY switch: SAVE
4 GAIN selector: Set as low as possible.
5 OUTPUT/DCC switch: BARS
6 WHITE BAL switch: A or B
Testing the viewfinder
1
Adjust the position of the viewfinder.
2
Check that the color bars are displayed on the viewfinder screen, and adjust the
BRIGHT, CONTRAST, and
PEAKING controls to give the best color bar display.
239
3
Check each of the following operations.
• The menu is displayed on the viewfinder screen.
• Turn the MENU knob and check that the menu page changes to the next page.
• Press the MENU knob and check that settings of each item of the selected page are displayed.
• Turn the MENU knob and check that b moves within the page.
• Press the MENU knob and check that b placed before the item changes to z and z placed before the setting of the item changes to ?
.
• Turn the MENU knob and check that the setting of the selected item changes.
4
Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM, and change the FILTER selector position in the sequence of 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Check that the FILTER indicator on the viewfinder screen displays the correct numbers.
5
Carry out of the following operations, and check that the ! indicator lights if the corresponding item has been turned on on the ‘!’ LED page of the USER menu.
• Set the gain to anything but 0 dB by using the GAIN selector and the GAIN SW page of the OPERATION menu.
• Set the SHUTTER selector to ON.
• Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.
• Use the lens extender.
• Set the reference value of the auto iris to other than the standard value.
6
Flick the SHUTTER selector from ON to SELECT repeatedly, and check that the shutter setting changes on the viewfinder screen.
7
Pointing the camera at a suitable subject, focus the camera and check the picture on the viewfinder screen.
8
Set both of the AUDIO IN switches to
FRONT, and check that when sound is input to a microphone connected to the
MIC IN connector on the front of the camcorder, the audio level indicators appear on the viewfinder screen.
9
Check that setting the ZEBRA switch to
ON and OFF makes the zebra pattern appear and disappear on the viewfinder screen.
Note
The results of checking in steps 3 to 9 may not be as expected, depending on the settings relating to the viewfinder display function. In this case, set the desired items on the VF DISP 1 and VF DISP 2 pages of the
USER menu.
For details, see “Selecting the display items” (page
Testing the iris and zoom functions
1
Set the zoom to automatic zoom mode and check that the power zoom operates correctly.
2
Set the zoom to manual zoom mode and check the zoom functions manually.
3
Set the iris switch on the lens to AUTO and point the camera at objects of different brightness. Check that the automatic iris adjustment operates correctly.
4
Set the iris switch on the lens to
MANUAL and check that turning the iris ring manually adjusts the iris correctly.
5
Set the iris switch on the lens back to
AUTO and check the following points when the GAIN selector is moved from
L to M to H.
• Even when the brightness of the object does not change, the iris is automatically adjusted in accordance with the change in the gain setting.
• The gain indicator on the viewfinder screen changes to correspond to the change in setting.
240
6
If an extender mechanism is incorporated in your lens, put the extender lever of the lens into the 2× position and check the following points.
• The indication “EX” appears at the top left on the viewfinder screen.
• The auto iris functions correctly.
Testing the VDR
Perform tests (1) to (7) consecutively.
(1) Testing the recording and playback functions
1
Set the VDR SAVE/STBY switch to
SAVE and check that the SAVE indicator in the viewfinder goes on.
2
Set the VDR SAVE/STBY switch to
STBY and check that the SAVE indicator in the viewfinder goes off.
3
Set the switches located below the color
LCD as follows.
BRIGHT button: H, M or L
DISP SEL/EXPAND button: STATUS
DISPLAY switch: COUNTER
4
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET, and set the F-RUN/
SET/R-RUN to R-RUN.
5
Press the REC START button and check the following points.
• The indication in the counter display on the
LCD monitor is changing.
• The REC indicator in the viewfinder is on.
• The RF and SERVO indicators on the color
LCD are off.
6
Press the REC START button again.
Check that recording stops and that the REC indicator in the viewfinder goes off.
7
Repeat the checks of steps 5 and 6, this time using the VTR button on the lens.
Press the RESET/RETURN button and check that the indication in the counter display on the LCD monitor is
“00:00:00:00”.
8
Press the F REV button, then press the
PLAY/PAUSE button.
Check that fast reverse playback and normal playback are performed.
9
Press the STOP button, then press the F
FWD button.
Check that playback stops and fast forward playback are performed.
10
Press the STOP button again, then press the PREV button.
Check that the image of the beginning of the current or previous clip is displayed.
11
Press the NEXT button, and check that the image of the beginning of the next clip is displayed.
(2) Testing the automatic audio level adjusting functions
1
Set the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches to FRONT.
2
Set the AUDIO SELECT (CH-1/CH-2) switches to AUTO.
3
Set the AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-4 switches to F (FRONT).
4
Aim the microphone connected to the
MIC IN connector at a suitable sound source. Check that the level indications for channels 1 to 4 correspond to the sound level, respectively.
(3) Testing the manual audio level adjusting functions
1
Set the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches to FRONT.
2
Turn the MIC LEVEL control. Check that the channel-1 and -2 audio level meters on the LCD monitor show more and more segments as you turn the control counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camcorder.
241
(4) Testing the earphone and speaker
1
Turn the MONITOR volume control and check that the speaker volume changes accordingly.
2
Connect an earphone to the front or rear EARPHONE jack.
3
Check that the speaker sound is cut off and that you can hear the sound from the microphone in the earphone.
4
Turn the MONITOR volume control and check that the earphone volume changes accordingly.
5
Connect the earphone to the other
EARPHONE jack. Check the earphone as in step 3.
(5) Testing external microphones
1
Connect external microphones to the
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors.
2
Set the +48V/OFF switches as follows.
• If the connected microphone is of the internal power supply type, set the switch to OFF.
• If the connected microphone is of the external power supply type, set the switch to +48V.
3
Set the AUDIO IN switches to REAR.
4
Aim the microphones at a sound source.
5
Check that the audio level meters on the
LCD monitor and the audio level indicators in the viewfinder reflect the changing sound level.
(6) Checking the XLR connection automatic detection function
Before starting to check, remove the front microphone connected to the MIC IN connector if it is connected.
1
Perform the operations of steps 1 and 2 explained in “(5) Testing external microphones”.
2
Set the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches to FRONT.
3
Perform the operations of steps 4 and 5 explained in “(5) Testing external microphones”.
If the audio level meters on the color and monochrome LCDs and the audio level indicators in the viewfinder reflect the changing sound level, the function of the
XLR connection automatic detection is working correctly.
If it does not reflect the changing sound level, the function of the XLR connection automatic detection function is off. Set
REAR XLR AUTO to “ON” on the VDR
MODE 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.
If it does not reflect even after making this setting, the XLR connection automatic detection function does not work correctly.
(7) Checking the user bit and timecode functions
1
Set the user bits as required.
For the operation, see “Setting the user bits”
2
Set the timecode.
For the operation, see “Setting the timecode”
3
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
R-RUN.
4
Press the REC START button, and check that recording starts and that the timecode indication in the counter display changes.
5
Press the REC START button again, and check that recording stops and that the timecode indication stops changing.
242
6
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
F-RUN, and check that the timecode indication starts changing again and continues to change even when you restart recording and stop recording again.
7
Set the DISPLAY switch to U-BIT, and check that the user bit data that was set is displayed.
Maintenance
Cleaning the viewfinder
Use a dust blower to clean the CRT screen and mirror inside the viewfinder barrel.
Clean the lens and protecting filter with a commercially available lens cleaner.
Caution
Never use organic solvents such as thinners.
Note about the battery terminal
The battery terminal of this unit (the connector for battery packs and AC adaptors) is a consumable part.
Power may not be supplied to the unit properly if the pins of the battery terminal are bent or deformed by shock or vibrations, or if they become corroded due to prolonged outdoor use.
Periodic inspections are recommended to keep the unit working properly and to prolong its usable lifetime.
Contact a Sony service or sales representative for more information about inspections.
243
Operation Warnings
If a problem occurs when the camcorder is powered or is being operated, a warning is issued by various visible and audible indicators. These visible and audible indicators are:
• In the status display on the LCD monitor: a warning message (“A” in the “Layout of the table of warning messages” below) and a warning indication (“B”)
• The WARNING indicator on the side panel of the camcorder (“C”), and a warning sound from the speaker and earphones (“D”)
• In the viewfinder: a warning message (“A”), and an indicator above or below the viewfinder screen (“E”)
The volume of the warning sound can be adjusted with the ALARM knob. Set the ALARM knob to the minimum position to suppress the sound.
Layout of the table of warning messages
Warning indication
B
Problem
State WARNING indicator
Warning sound REC/TALLY
C
VDR operation
D E
Action to take
BATT
E
• The operation of the WARNING indicator and the indicators in the viewfinder is represented by graphic symbols as follows.
: Continuous
: 1 flash/s
: 4 flashes/s
• The warning sounds are represented by graphic symbols as follows.
: Continuous beep
: 1 beep/s
: 4 beeps/s
244
Warning messages
Warning indication
—
Problem
Recording error
State
—
Warning indication
—
Problem
Input sync error
State
—
WARNING indicator
Warning sound REC/TALLY BATT
—
VDR operation
Recording stops.
WARNING indicator
Action to take
Turn off the power and consult a Sony service representative.
Warning sound REC/TALLY BATT b) b) b) —
Warning indication
—
Problem
State
—
Shockproof memory overflow
VDR operation
Recording continues but may be substandard.
Action to take
Protect the unit from shocks and vibrations.
Warning sound REC/TALLY BATT WARNING indicator b) b) b) —
VDR operation
Recording continues but may be substandard.
WARNING indicator
Action to take
Turn off the power and contact a Sony service representative. (This indication may be given momentarily when a
GENLOCK signal is connected or disconnected, but this does not indicate a problem.)
Warning sound REC/TALLY BATT b) b) b) —
Warning indication
—
Warning indication
—
State
—
Problem
An error was detected in the signals recorded on the disc.
State
—
VDR operation
Recording continues but may be substandard.
Action to take
Exchange the disc.
Warning sound REC/TALLY BATT WARNING indicator b) — b) —
Problem
Cache memory became full during a Disc Exchange Change mode operation.
VDR operation Action to take
Video and audio recording may be interrupted.
Exchange the disc quickly.
245
Warning indication
—
Warning indication
—
State
—
Problem
A disc defect was detected.
Warning indication
DISC
Problem
Disc almost full.
State flash f)
State
—
Problem
Nine or fewer clips remain.
Warning indication
DISC and E
State flash g)
Problem
Disc full.
Warning indication
—
State
—
Problem
Disc cannot be used in unit.
Warning indication
State
— —
Problem
Disc cannot be used.
WARNING indicator b)
Warning sound REC/TALLY BATT b) b)
—
VDR operation Action to take
Recording continues, avoiding the defect, but may be substandard.
WARNING indicator
If defects are detected repeatedly, exchange the disc.
Warning sound REC/TALLY BATT b) b)
—
VDR operation Action to take
Operation continues.
WARNING indicator
Be prepared to exchange the disc.
Warning sound REC/TALLY BATT b) —
(only when recording the
300th clip)
VDR operation
Operation continues.
Action to take
Be prepared to exchange the disc.
Warning sound REC/TALLY BATT WARNING indicator
d) d) d) —
VDR operation
Recording stops.
WARNING indicator
Action to take
Exchange the disc.
Warning sound REC/TALLY BATT
—
VDR operation
Automatically ejects.
WARNING indicator
Action to take
Exchange the disc.
Warning sound REC/TALLY BATT
—
VDR operation
Automatically ejects.
Action to take
Exchange the disc.
246
Warning indication
—
State
—
Problem
Disc cannot be salvaged.
WARNING indicator
—
VDR operation
Cannot record.
Warning sound REC/TALLY BATT
— —
Action to take
Salvage on device used to record.
—
Warning indication
—
Problem
The upper limit of 300 recorded clips reached.
Warning indication
—
State
—
VDR operation
Cannot record.
WARNING indicator
d)
Warning sound
d)
Action to take
Exchange the disc.
REC/TALLY d)
BATT
—
Problem VDR operation
The upper limit of files reached.
Cannot record.
Warning indication
BATT
State flash f)
WARNING indicator
Action to take
Exchange the disc.
Warning sound REC/TALLY BATT
e) e)
Problem
Battery almost exhausted.
State Warning indication
BATT and E flash g)
Problem
Battery exhausted.
Warning indication
State
— —
Problem
State
—
Internal temperature high.
WARNING indicator
d)
Warning sound
VDR operation
Operation continues.
WARNING indicator
VDR operation
d)
REC/TALLY d)
Action to take
BATT
—
Replace the battery.
Warning sound REC/TALLY BATT
Operation stops.
WARNING indicator
Replace the battery.
Warning sound REC/TALLY BATT
—
VDR operation
Operation continues.
Action to take
Action to take
Power the unit off and move it to a cool place.
247
Warning indication
—
State
—
Problem
Internal drive sensor error a) Asterisks (*) are replaced by digits in the display.
b) During recording c) During playback, fast forward, fast reverse, or stop d) During recording pause e) During recording or pause f) 1 flash/s g) 4 flashes/s h) During recording, displayed in the LCD monitor only
(When the DISP SEL/EXPAND button is set to
STATUS) i) During recording and recording pause, displayed in the LCD monitor only (When the DISP SEL/
EXPAND button is set to STATUS) j) When TL-RE (3-layer) disc is inserted k) When QL-R (4-layer) disc is inserted
For details about the warning displays and alarm messages on the viewfinder, see the next item.
Operation/alarm messages
Operation and alarm messages are displayed in the operation/alarm message display area
of the viewfinder screen.
AUTO
INTERVAL
**M**S
MANU
INTERVAL
*FRAME
The unit is operating in Auto
Interval Rec mode (**M**S:
Indicates the shooting interval in minutes and seconds).
The unit is operating in the singleshot mode of Manual Interval Rec mode (*FRAME: Indicates the number of frames recorded in one shot).
INTERVAL
**S (M/H)
*FRAME
The unit is operating in the consecutive mode of Manual
Interval Rec mode (**S (M/H):
Indicates the trigger interval, in seconds (minutes or hours),
*FRAME: Indicates the number of frames recorded in one shot).
LOW LIGHT Depending on the setting, the subject illumination is inadequate.
WARNING indicator
Warning sound
VDR operation
Operation continues.
REC/TALLY BATT
—
Action to take
Protect the unit from shocks and vibrations, turn off the power, and contact a Sony service representative.
ON-BOARD
BATTERY
EMPTY
The backup battery of the internal clock is empty.
a)
DCP
EEPROM
DATA NG!
DR EEPROM
DATA NG!
DCP/DR
EEPROM
DATA NG!
If this message continues to appear even after the unit is powered off and on again several times, then the factory adjustment data is invalid. Contact a Sony service representative.
a) Contact a Sony service representative to replace the battery.
VDR operation messages are displayed in the setting change and adjustment progress message
display area of the viewfinder screen (see page 31) . Take the actions listed in the following
table.
ILL. Disc!
A disc that cannot be used by this unit was inserted. Insert another
Professional Disc.
ILL. Index!
No FS!
Unknown FS!
Index file or file system error.
Exchange or format the disc.
No Support!
A recorded clip cannot be handled by this unit. Exchange or format the disc.
FORMAT
NG!
The disc could not be formatted automatically. Exchange the disc.
Disc Damage A disc that cannot be recorded was inserted. To record, exchange the disc.
Non AV Full
MAX # Files
Over DUR!
The disc is full. Exchange or format the disc.
DI read err
Read err
DRV ADJ err
The disc was not recognized. Try ejecting the disc and inserting it again. Or exchange the disc.
248
Run Salvage A disc that requires salvage was inserted. To record on the disc, eject the disc, insert it again, and execute salvage processing.
Salvage NG!
Salvage processing failed.
For details, see “Handling of discs when recording does not end normally (salvage function)”
Salvage
XXXX
The loaded disc cannot be salvaged by this unit. The
“XXXX” in the message is a code for XDCAM devices that can salvage the disc. Refer to the list of device codes
and salvage the disc using one of the indicated devices.
REC INHI.!
The Write Inhibit tab of the disc is in the recording disabled position, or salvage processing needs to be done on the loaded disc. Set the tab to the recording enabled position. Or eject the disc, insert it again, and perform salvage processing.
1080/50i
1080/25P
1080/59.94i
1080/29.97P
1080/23.98P
720/50P
720/59.94P
625/50i
525/59.94i
This appears when mixed format recording mode is disabled and the current resolution or system frequency setting of this unit does not match the resolution or system frequency of the inserted disc. To carry out recording operations, exchange the disc, or change the resolution or system frequency setting of this unit, or enable mixed format recording mode.
HD422 1080
HD422 720
HD420 1080
HD420 720
IMX50 Clip
IMX40 Clip
IMX30 Clip
DVCAM Clip
8CHx16 Clip
4CHx24 Clip
2CHx16 Clip
This appears when mixed format recording mode is disabled and the current recording format of this unit does not match the recording format of the inserted disc. To carry out recording operations, exchange the disc, or change the recording format of this unit, or enable mixed format recording mode.
System FREQ This appears when the current system frequency of this unit does not match the system frequency of clips recorded on the inserted disc.
To carry out recording operations, exchange the disc, or change the system frequency of this unit.
Mixed REC!
This appears when mixed format recording mode is disabled and the current recording format of this unit does not match the recording format of the inserted disc. To carry out recording operations, exchange the disc, or change the recording format of this unit, or enable mixed format recording mode.
Index File!
There is an unsupported index file on the disc to which you are trying to record. Exchange or format the disc.
File System There is an unsupported file system on the disc to which you are trying to record. Exchange or format the disc.
ILL. PLAY!
An A/V phase error occurred during playback. Stop the disc.
Lid Closed!
The lid of the disc compartment does not open. Check the lid.
Lid Open!
The lid of the disc compartment is not closed. Close it securely.
No Clip!
No Disc!
There are no clips recorded on the disc. Exchange for a recorded disc.
There is no disc loaded. Insert a disc and try the operation again.
STOP ONCE!
REC mode!
The operation is not possible while the disc is being played or recorded. Stop the disc.
Loading!
Unloading!
Disc Top!
Disc End!
Clip Top!
Clip End!
An operation was attempted while a disc was loading or unloading.
Wait for the disc to finish loading or unloading and try again.
The operation is not possible because the disc is at the top or end.
In single clip playback mode, the specified operation is not possible because playback has reached the top or end of the clip.
249
Formatting!
The disc is being automatically formatted. Wait until the format ends.
Recording The unit is writing to the file system. Wait until writing finishes.
No EM Space
EM Full!
Essence marks cannot be inserted.
For details, see
“Recording essence marks” (page 80) .
Cache REC!
An attempt was made to perform an operation that cannot be performed when the picture cache function is enabled. The operation will be ignored.
Disc Exchag!
An attempt was made to perform an operation that cannot be performed when the disc exchange cache function is enabled. The operation will be ignored.
Live Logg!
An attempt was made to perform an operation that cannot be performed when the Live Logging function is set to Live View mode.
The operation will be ignored.
SB CLP mode An essence mark or clip flag operation was attempted while the
SUB CLIP indicator was lit. Press the SUB CLIP/DISC MENU button to turn the indicator off and try again.
No SEL List No clip list is selected. Create a new clip list, or load a clip list from the disc.
No List!
There is no clip list. Create a clip list.
No SUB Clip There are no sub clips in the clip list. Register a sub clip, or load another clip list.
SUB Clip NG The In and Out point positions are invalid. Set correct In and Out points.
MAX# SB
CLP
The total number of sub clips is over the upper limit (300).
Resolution
CL OVER
DUR
An attempt was made to register a clip in a clip list with a different resolution.
The total duration of sub clips in the current clip list is over the upper limit (24 hours).
FAN Stopped
DR-FAN Stop
The main unit or drive fan has stopped. Avoid use under high temperatures, turn off the power, and contact a Sony service representative.
NVRAM NG!
An error was detected while accessing internal memory. Power the unit off and contact a Sony service representative.
Update Err!
A firmware update failed. Power the unit off and contact a Sony service representative.
Unknown
USB
NO USB
MEMORY!
An unsupported USB device was connected to this unit.
A USB flash drive write operation was attempted with no USB flash drive connected.
USB
MEMORY
INHIBIT!
USB M. INHI
A write inhibited USB flash drive was connected with MEMORY
REC on the MEMORY REC page of the OPERATION menu set to
ENABL.
USB
MEMORY
ERROR!
M. Shortage A USB flash drive write operation was attempted without enough free memory in the USB flash drive.
USB
MEMORY
FULL!
MEM REC
NG!
The connected USB flash drive was not usable when a USB flash drive write operation was attempted.
A USB flash drive write operation was attempted without free memory in the USB flash drive.
A USB flash drive write operation failed with MEMORY REC on the
MEMORY REC page of the
OPERATION menu set to
ENABL.
M. access!
An attempt was made to switch
GUI screens during a USB flash drive write operation.
ILL. TIME A clock error has occurred. Set the date and time of the internal clock again.
250
Alarm messages during thumbnail search, scene selection, and clip list operations
An alarm message may appear in the LCD monitor during thumbnail search, scene selection, and clip list operations. In that case, take the action indicated in the following table.
Cannot
Expand Clip any Further.
The clip cannot be expanded into more blocks. This alarm appears when the DISP SEL/EXPAND button is pressed when the number of blocks is maximum, or when the duration of an expanded thumbnail is one frame.
Selected
Essence Mark
Does not
Exist.
The selected essence mark does not exist.
This alarm appears in the essence mark selection screen when the specified essence mark does not exist on the disc.
Sub Clip is
Invalid. Set
Appropriate
IN/OUT
Points.
The temporal relationship between the specified In and Out points in a
TRIM operation
not correct. Reset so that the value of the Out point timecode is larger than the value of the In point timecode.
Duration of
One Clip List must be Less than 24
Hours.
The total duration of the current clip list exceeds the upper limit of
24 hours as the result of an Add
Sub Clips
or Trim
Sub Clip (see page 128) operation.
No More Sub
Clips can be
Added to the
Clip List.
The total number of the sub clips of the current clip list exceeds the upper limit of 300 as the result of
an Add Sub Clips (see page 126)
or Trim Sub Clip (see page 128)
operation.
Sub Clip does not Exist.
An attempt is made to execute a
,
Trim Sub Clip (see page 128) ,
Delete Sub Clips
or Set Start Time Code
(see page 129) operation with no sub
clips in the current clip list.
Clip List does not Exist.
An attempt is made to execute a
Delete Clip List operation
(see page 130) when there are no clip
lists on the disc.
Move is
Invalid.
Shot Mark does not
Exist.
An attempt is made to execute a
Move Sub Clips operation (see page 127)
when there are no sub clip in the current clip list, or when there is only one.
An attempt is made to execute a
Delete Shot Mark (see page 115)
operation on a clip with no shot marks recorded in.
Chapter does not Exist.
An attempt was made to display a nonexistent chapter.
Some Essence
Mark cannot be Deleted.
An attempt is made to delete an essence mark that cannot be deleted with a Delete Essence
Mark operation. Rec Start and Cut essence marks cannot be deleted.
Some Essence
Mark cannot be Moved.
An attempt is made to move an essence mark that cannot be moved with a Move Essence Mark operation. Rec Start and Cut essence marks cannot be moved.
Command
Disabled.
Clip is
Locked.
An attempt was made to execute the Format Disc command with
Setting Format Disc set to
“Disable”.
An attempt is made to delete a clip, set the clip thumbnail, or delete a shot mark when the clip is locked.
All Clips are
Locked.
All Clips are
Unlocked.
An attempt is made to execute a
Lock All Clips operation when all clips are already locked.
An attempt is made to execute an
Unlock All Clips operation when all clips are already unlocked.
A File with the Name you
Specified
Already
Exists.
Specify a
Different
Name.
A file name that was specified in a
Set Clip Name operation already exists.
Set NAMING
FORM to
“free”
An attempt was made to rename a clip with Set Clip Name when
NAMING FORM is not set to
“FREE”
.
251
“No Flash
Drive”
In the media selection screen of the Load Planning Metadata/
Select Drive command, “USB
Flash Drive” was selected with no
USB flash drive connected.
Not Loaded.
A command related to planning metadata was executed with no planning metadata loaded. Try again after loading planning metadata.
Syntax Error!
Loading of planning metadata failed because of a syntax error.
Correct the error and try loading it again.
Irregular Disc is Used.
Use
Professional
Disc.
The inserted disc cannot be recorded or played. This unit can record and play Professional
Discs. Insert a Professional Disc.
The Disc
Write Protect
TAB is set to
Save.
An attempt was made to format a write protected disc. Try formatting the disc after moving the write protect tab away from the
Save position.
Auto
Formatting was not
Completed.
Automatic disc formatting failed.
Video
Resolution
Differ from it on Clip List.
An attempt was made to add a clip to a clip list when the video resolution (number of system lines) did not match the video resolution of clips in the clip list.
Clips cannot be added to a clip list unless the video resolution matches.
No Clip
Meets the
Condition.
No clip meeting the clip filtering conditions was found.
252
Appendix
Important Notes on
Operation
Use and storage
Do not subject the unit to severe shocks
The internal mechanism may be damaged or the body warped.
Do not cover the unit while operating
Putting a cloth, for example, over the unit can cause excessive internal heat build-up.
After use
Always turn off the POWER switch.
Before storing the camcorder for a long period
Remove the battery pack.
Shipping
• Remove the disc before transporting the unit.
• If sending the unit by truck, ship, air or other transportation service, pack it in the shipping carton of the unit.
Care of the unit
Remove dust and dirt from the surfaces of the lenses or optical filters using a blower.
Do not clean the interior of the camera using a blower. Any dust particles in the air could be forced into internal components and may cause a malfunction.
If the body of the unit is dirty, clean it with a soft, dry cloth. In extreme cases, use a cloth steeped in a little neutral detergent, then wipe dry. Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol or thinners, as these may cause discoloration or other damage to the finish of the unit.
In the event of operating problems
If you should experience problems with the unit, contact a Sony representative.
Use and storage locations
Store in a level, ventilated place. Avoid using or storing the unit in the following places.
253
• In excessive heat or cold (operating temperature range: –5 °C to +40 °C (23 °F to 104 °F))
• Remember that in summer in warm climates the temperature inside a car with the windows closed can easily exceed 50 °C (122 °F).
• In damp or dusty locations
• Locations where the unit may be exposed to rain
• Locations subject to violent vibration
• Near strong magnetic fields
• Close to radio or TV transmitters producing strong electromagnetic fields.
• In direct sunlight or close to heaters for extended periods
To prevent electromagnetic interference from portable communications devices
The use of portable telephones and other communications devices near this unit can result in malfunctions and interference with audio and video signals.
It is recommended that the portable communications devices near this unit be powered off.
Note on laser beams
Laser beams may damage the CCDs.
If you shoot a scene that includes a laser beam, be careful not to let the laser beam be directed into the lens of the camera.
Condensation
If the unit is suddenly taken from a cold to a warm location, or if ambient temperature suddenly rises, moisture may form on the outer surface of the unit and/or inside of the unit. This is known as condensation. If condensation occurs, turn off the unit and wait until the condensation clears before operating the unit. Operating the unit while condensation is present may damage the unit.
Do the following to prevent this from happening.
• When you move or operate the camcorder in an environment where condensation may form, be sure to load a disc in advance and close the disc compartment lid.
For details, see “Loading and unloading a disc”
Fitting the zoom lens
It is important to fit the lens correctly, as otherwise damage may result. Be sure to refer to
the section “Mounting the Lens” (page 40) .
Viewfinder
• Do not leave the unit with the eyepiece pointing directly at the sun.
The eyepiece lens can concentrate the sun’s rays and melt the interior of the viewfinder.
• Do not use the viewfinder close to strong magnetic fields. This can cause picture distortion.
About the LCD panels
The LCD panel fitted to this unit is manufactured with high precision technology, giving a functioning pixel ratio of at least 99.99%. Thus a very small proportion of pixels may be “stuck”, either always off (black), always on (red, green, or blue), or flashing. In addition, over a long period of use, because of the physical characteristics of the liquid crystal display, such
“stuck” pixels may appear spontaneously. These problems are not a malfunction. Note that any such problems have no effect on recorded data.
Phenomena specific to image sensors
Note
The following phenomena that may occur in images are specific to image sensors. They do not indicate a malfunction.
White flecks
Although the image sensors are produced with high-precision technologies, fine white flecks may be generated on the screen in rare cases, caused by cosmic rays, etc.
This is related to the principle of image sensors and is not a malfunction.
The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the following cases:
- when operating at a high environmental temperature
- when you have raised the gain (sensitivity)
- when using the slow shutter
Vertical smear
When an extremely bright object, such as a strong spotlight or flashlight, is being shot, vertical tails may be produced on the screen, or the image may be distorted.
Monitor screen
Vertical tails shown on the image
Bright object (e.g., strong spotlight, strong reflected light, flashlight, the sun)
Aliasing
When fine patterns, stripes, or lines are shot, they may appear jagged or flicker.
254
Specifications
General
Mass
Approx. 4.1 kg (9 lb 0.6 oz) (body only)
Approx. 6.1 kg (13 lb 7.2 oz) (with viewfinder, microphone, disc, and
BP-FLX75 battery)
Dimensions
Unit: mm (inches), excluding protrusions, body only
1)
332 (13 1 /
8
)
1) The values for dimensions are approximate.
Power requirements
12 V DC (+5.0 V/
−
1.0 V DC)
Power consumption
Approx. 37 W
When recording (body only), LCD monitor on, VDR SAVE/STBY switch set to SAVE
Approx. 41 W
When recording (viewfinder, manual lens, and microphone attached), LCD monitor on, VDR SAVE/STBY switch set to SAVE
Notes
• Do not connect video lights with power consumption of 50 W or higher.
• When using battery with peripheral equipment attached to the camcorder, ensure that the total power consumption does not exceed 40 W.
• When using the AC-DN10 with peripheral devices attached to the camcorder, ensure that the total power consumption does not exceed 50 W.
• When using the AC-DN2B with peripheral devices attached to the camcorder, ensure that the total power consumption does not exceed 60 W.
• Connect only devices with current consumption of
1.0 A or lower to the DC OUT connector.
• When using an optional CA-FB70/TX70 Camera
Adaptor with peripheral devices attached to the camcorder, ensure that the total power consumption
1) does not exceed 67 W.
1) The power consumption of the optional CA-FB70/
CA-TX70 is not included in the total.
Operating temperature
–5 °C to +40 °C (23 °F to 104 °F)
Storage temperature
–20 °C to +60 °C (–4 °F to +140 °F)
Humidity
10% to 90% (relative humidity)
Continuous operating time
Approx. 115 min. with BP-L80S battery
Approx. 100 min. with BP-FL75 battery
Recording format (video)
MPEG HD422 (CBR: 50 Mbps)
MPEG HD:
HQ mode (VBR, 35 Mbps max.)
SP mode (CBR, 25 Mbps)
LP mode (VBR, 18 Mbps max.)
(playback only)
MPEG IMX (CBR, 50/40/30 Mbps)
DVCAM (CBR, 25 Mbps)
Recording format (audio)
MPEG HD422: 4 ch/24 bits/48 kHz
MPEG HD: 4 ch/16 bits/48 kHz
MPEG IMX: 4 ch/24 bits/48 kHz or
4 ch/16 bits/48 kHz
DVCAM: 4 ch/16 bits/48 kHz
Recording format (proxy video)
MPEG-4
Recording format (proxy audio)
A-law (4 ch/8 bits/8 kHz)
255
Recording/playback time (MPEG HD422)
50 Mbps: Approx. 95 min.
(PFD50DLA), Approx. 43 min.
(PFD23A)
Recording/playback time (MPEG HD)
35 Mbps, 4-ch audio: More than
145 min. (PFD50DLA), More than
65 min. (PFD23A)
35 Mbps, 2-ch audio (playback only):
More than 150 min. (PFD50DLA),
More than 68 min. (PFD23A)
25 Mbps, 4-ch audio: Approx. 190 min.
(PFD50DLA), Approx. 85 min.
(PFD23A)
25 Mbps, 2-ch audio (playback only):
Approx. 200 min. (PFD50DLA),
Approx. 90 min. (PFD23A)
18 Mbps, 4-ch audio (playback only):
More than 248 min. (PFD50DLA),
More than 112 min. (PFD23A)
18 Mbps, 2-ch audio (playback only):
More than 265 min. (PFD50DLA),
More than 122 min. (PFD23A)
Recording/playback time (MPEG IMX)
50 Mbps: Approx. 100 min.
(PFD50DLA), Approx. 45 min.
(PFD23A)
40 Mbps: Approx. 120 min.
(PFD50DLA), Approx. 55 min.
(PFD23A)
30 Mbps: Approx. 150 min.
(PFD50DLA), Approx. 68 min.
(PFD23A)
Recording/playback time (DVCAM)
25 Mbps: Approx. 185 min.
(PFD50DLA), Approx. 85 min.
(PFD23A)
Recording frame rate
MPEG HD422 50 Mbps:
1920
×
1080/59.94i, 29.97p, 50i, 25p,
23.98p
1280
×
720/59.94p, 50p
MPEG HD420 (HQ 35 Mbps,
SP 25 Mbps):
1440
×
1080/59.94i, 29.97p, 50i, 25p,
23.98p
1280
×
720/59.94p, 50p
MPEG HD420 (LP 18 Mbps):
1440
×
1080/59.94i, 29.97p, 50i, 25p,
23.98p (playback only)
MPEG IMX 50/40/30 Mbps/DVCAM mode:
720
×
486/59.94i, 29.97p
720
×
576/50i, 25p
Lens
Lens mount
2
/
3
-inch type 48 bayonet mount
Input/output
Inputs
Genlock input
BNC type (1)
1.0 Vp-p, 75
Ω
Timecode input
BNC type (1)
0.5 Vp-p to 18 Vp-p, 10 k
Ω
SDI input
BNC type (1)
HD/SD switchable
HD-SDI: SMPTE 292M (with embedded audio)
SD-SDI: SMPTE 259M (with embedded audio)
Audio input
CH-1/CH-2: XLR-type 3-pin (female)
(2)
Line/Mic/Mic +48V/AES/EBU selectable
Microphone input
XLR-type 5-pin (female, stereo) (1)
256
Outputs
Test output
BNC (1), switchable
HD: Y
SD: composite (character on/off)
SDI outputs
BNC type (2)
1 (HD/SD switchable):
HD-SDI: SMPTE 292M (with embedded audio)
SD-SDI: SMPTE 259M (with embedded audio)
2 (HD/SD switchable, character on/off)
HD-SDI: SMPTE 292M (with embedded audio)
SD-SDI: SMPTE 259M (with embedded audio)
Audio output
CH-1/CH-2: XLR-type 5-pin (male, stereo) (1)
Timecode output
BNC type (1)
1.0 Vp-p, 75
Ω
Earphone output
Mini-jack (2)
Front: monaural
Rear: stereo/monaural
Speaker output
Monaural
Others
DC input
XLR-type 4-pin (male) (1)
11 V to 17 V
DC output
4-pin (1) (for wireless adaptor or UHF synthesized diversity tuner)
11 V to 17 V DC (max. 1 A)
Lens
12-pin
Remote
8-pin
Light
2-pin, DC 12 V, max. 50 W
Camera adaptor
50-pin (1)
Ethernet
RJ-45 (1)
100BASE-TX: IEEE 802.3u
10BASE-T: IEEE 802.3
USB
For proxy recording on USB flash drive and firmware version update (1)
Audio performance
Frequency response
20 Hz to 20 kHz, +0.5 dB/–1.0 dB
Dynamic range
93 dB or higher
Distortion
0.08% or lower (at 1 kHz, reference level)
Crosstalk
–70 dB or lower (at 1 kHz, reference level)
Wow and flutter
Below measurable limit
Headroom
12/16/18/20 dB (selectable)
Camera section
Imager
3-chip
2
/
3
-inch type HD PowerHAD FX
CCDs
Effective Picture Elements
1920 (H)
×
1080 (V)
Optical system
F1.4 prism system
Built-in optical filters
CC filter (optical)
A: Cross filter
B: 3200K
C: 4300K
D: 6300K
257
ND filter (optical)
1: Clear
2:
1
/
4
ND
3:
1
/
16
ND
4:
1
/
64
ND
Shutter speed (time)
1080/59.94i: 1/100, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500,
1/1000, 1/2000, ECS
1)
, SLS
2)
1080/50i: 1/60, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500,
1/1000, 1/2000, ECS
1)
, SLS
2)
1080/29.97p: 1/40, 1/60, 1/120, 1/125,
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, ECS
1)
,
SLS
2)
1080/25p: 1/33, 1/50, 1/100, 1/125,
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, ECS
1)
,
SLS
2)
1080/23.98p: 1/32, 1/48, 1/50, 1/60,
1/96, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000,
1/2000, ECS
1)
, SLS
2)
720/59.94p: 1/100, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500,
1/1000, 1/2000, ECS
1)
, SLS
2)
720/50p: 1/60, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500,
1/1000, 1/2000, ECS
1)
, SLS
2)
1) ECS: Extended Clear Scan
2) SLS: Slow Shutter
Shutter speed (Slow Shutter (SLS))
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 16 frame
Slow & Quick Motion function
(MPEG HD422 50M/1080 mode only)
23.98p: Selectable from 1 to 48 frame/ sec as recording frame rate
25p: Selectable from 1 to 50 frame/sec as recording frame rate
29.97p: Selectable from 1 to 59.94 frame/sec as recording frame rate
Sensitivity (2000 lx, 89.9% reflectance)
1080/59.94i: F11 (typical)
1080/50i: F12 (typical)
Minimum illumination
Approx. 0.3 lx (F1.4 lens, +42 dB, with slow shutter: Off)
White balance
Preset (3200K), Memory A,
Memory B/ATW
Gain selection
−
6,
−
3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36,
42 dB
S/N ratio
62 dB (58 dB without noise suppressor)
Horizontal resolution
1000 TV lines or more (1920
×
1080i mode)
Registration
0.02% or less for entire screen area
(excluding distortion due to lens)
Modulation depth (screen center)
45% or higher at 27.5 MHz (typical)
Digital extender x2, x3, x4
Viewfinder and related equipment
Viewfinder
HDVF-EL20
Viewfinder Rotation Bracket
BKW-401
Note
Contact a Sony service representative for information about the viewfinders able to use the BKW-401.
Other equipment
Built-in LCD monitor
3.5-inch type color LCD monitor
960
×
540
1)
1) Viewable area measured diagonally.
Built-in speaker (1)
Optical disc drive section
General
Supported discs
PFD50DLA Professional Disc
(capacity: 50.0 GB)
PFD23A Professional Disc (capacity:
23.3 GB)
258
Data transfer rate
Max. 72 Mbps
Digital video performance
Sampling frequency
Y: 74.176 MHz (59.94i), 74.25 MHz
(50i/25P)
Pb/Pr: 37.088 MHz (59.94i),
37.125 MHz (50i/25P)
Quantization
8 bits/sample
Compression
MPEG-2 4:2:2P@HL 50 Mbps
Supplied accessories
Shoulder strap (1)
Microphone cable (1)
Microphone spacer (1)
Lens mount cap (1)
Operation Guide (1)
Operation Manual (CD-ROM) (1)
Additional equipment
Power supply and related equipment
BP-FLX75 Battery Pack
BC-L160/L500/L70A Battery Charger
AC-DN10/DN2B AC Adaptor
Equipment for remote control
RM-B170 Remote Control Unit
Audio equipment
ECM-680S Stereo/Monaural Microphone
ECM-678/673 Monaural Microphone
CAC-12 Microphone Holder
DWR-S02DN Digital Wireless Receiver
URX-S03D UHF Synthesized Diversity Tuner
DWT-B01N Digital Wireless Transmitter
UTX-B03/B03HR UHF Synthesized
Transmitter
DMX-P01 Portable Digital Mixer
Other peripheral devices
CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi Adaptor
CBK-WA100 Wireless Adaptor
PDW-HR1 XDCAM HD422 Field Station
CA-FB70 Camera Adaptor
CA-TX70 Camera Adaptor
Equipment for maintenance and easier handling
LC-H300 Hard Carrying Case
LC-DS300SFT Soft Carrying Case
VCT-14 Tripod Adaptor
Maintenance Manual
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
(Only when using the CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi
Adaptor)
SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING
FROM A FAILURE TO IMPLEMENT
PROPER SECURITY MEASURES ON
TRANSMISSION DEVICES,
UNAVOIDABLE DATA LEAKS
RESULTING FROM TRANSMISSION
SPECIFICATIONS, OR SECURITY
PROBLEMS OF ANY KIND.
259
Notes
• Always make a test recording, and verify that it was recorded successfully.
SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION
OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF
FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS
RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL
STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER
MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS TO
RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE.
• Always verify that the unit is operating properly before use. SONY WILL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT
ON ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF
PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS
DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT, EITHER
DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD OR
AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE
WARRANTY, OR FOR ANY OTHER
REASON WHATSOEVER.
• SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
CLAIMS OF ANY KIND MADE BY USERS
OF THIS UNIT OR MADE BY THIRD
PARTIES.
• SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE
LOSS, REPAIR, OR REPRODUCTION OF
ANY DATA RECORDED ON THE
INTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEM,
RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL
STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER
MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS.
• SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE
TERMINATION OR DISCONTINUATION
OF ANY SERVICES RELATED TO THIS
UNIT THAT MAY RESULT DUE TO
CIRCUMSTANCES OF ANY KIND.
260
Chart of Optional Components and Accessories
ECM-680S/678/
673 Microphone
CAC-12
Microphone Holder
HDVF-EL20
Viewfinder
LCD monitor
BVM-E series, PVM-A series, LMD-A series
XDCAM HD series recorder
PDW-HD1500/HD1550
DWR-S02DN Digital Wireless Receiver
URX-S03D UHF Synthesized Diversity Tuner
PDW-850
RM-B170
Remote Control Unit
VCT-14
Tripod adaptor
Tripod
PFD23A/PFD50DLA Professional disc
CBK-WA01
Wi-Fi Adaptor
CBK-WA100
Wireless Adaptor
CA-FB70
Camera Adaptor
CA-TX70
Camera Adaptor
LC-DS300 SFT
Soft carrying case
a)
BP-FLX75
Battery Pack
BC-L70A
Battery
Charger
BC-L160
Battery
Charger
LC-H300 Hard carrying case
BC-L500 Battery
Charger
AC-DN10/DN2B
AC Adaptor a) The carrying case is large enough to hold the camcorder with lens and microphone mounted.
However, remove them if they protrude more than 25 cm from the front of the main unit.
261
List of Supported USB Keyboards
When the area of use is set to NTSC AREA/PAL AREA and the font setting is European
Alphabet
1)
On this unit, you can enter any of the characters and symbols supported by the keyboards listed below.
Select the corresponding language by selecting
Settings >Select USB Keyboard Language in the
Disc Menu
.
1) When the font setting is “Simplified Chinese” or
“Traditional Chinese”, a keyboard with the same layout as the English [United States] keyboard is selected automatically.
English [United Kingdom]
English [United States]
French [France]
262
German [Germany]
Italian [Italy]
Polish (Programmers) [Poland]
Russian [Russia]
Spanish [Spain]
263
When the area of use is set to NTSC AREA/PAL AREA and the font setting is Korean
The keyboard is fixed as the Korean keyboard, and you can enter Hangul characters.
Note
The keyboard language cannot be changed.
When the area of use is set to NTSC(J)AREA
The keyboard is fixed as the Japanese keyboard.
Notes
• The keyboard language cannot be changed.
• It is not possible to enter Japanese hiragana, katakana, and kanji.
264
Recommended USB
Flash Drives (As of April
2014)
The following Sony USB flash drives are recommended for use with this unit.
Pocket Bit QX series
• USM128GQX
• USM64GQX
• USM32GQX
• USM16GQX
• USM8GQX
Pocket Bit T series
• USM128GT
• USM64GT
• USM32GT
• USM16GT
• USM8GT
Pocket Bit U series
• USM128GU
• USM64GU
• USM32GU
• USM16GU
• USM8GU
Note
USB flash drives other than the recommended flash drives listed above may not be recognized when connected to the USB connector.
Trademarks and
Licenses
MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio
License
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE
MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO
LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-
COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR
(i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE
WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD
(“MPEG-4 VIDEO”)
AND/OR
(ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN
A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL
ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM
A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG
LA TO PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE
IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING
THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL,
INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND
LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM
MPEG LA, LLC. SEE HTTP://
WWW.MPEGLA.COM
MPEG LA is offering licenses for (i) manufacturing/ sales of any storage media storing MPEG-4 Visual video information (ii) distribution/broadcasting of MPEG-4
Visual video information in any manner (such as online video distribution service, internet broadcasting, TV broadcasting). Other usage of this product may be required to obtain license from MPEGLA. Please contact
MPEG LA for any further information. MPEG LA,
L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER,
COLORADO 80206, http://www.mpegla.com
About IJG (Independent JPEG
Group)
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
265
Character display software
“iType”
This product includes technology from Monotype
Imaging Inc., including iType
®
and certain fonts.
About libupnp
Copyright (c) 2000-2003 Intel Corporation
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither name of Intel Corporation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
266
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
About OpenSSL
OpenSSL License
---------------
/* ====================================================================
* Copyright (c) 1998-2008 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
* the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
* distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
* software must display the following acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
* endorse or promote products derived from this software without
* prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
* nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
* permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
* acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* ====================================================================
267
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* ([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson ([email protected]).
*
*/
Original SSLeay License
-----------------------
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected])
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young ([email protected]).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
*
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* "This product includes cryptographic software written by
* Eric Young ([email protected])"
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
* being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
* the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
* "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
268
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
269
About GPS
What is GPS?
GPS (Global Positioning System) is a system for determining your exact location anywhere on the planet, using a constellation of high-precision satellites launched by the U.S.A.
The system is composed of a minimum of 24 GPS satellites, four each in six orbits at an altitude of approximately 20,000 km (12,400 miles). Signals are received from GPS satellites and are used to calculate your location based on satellite orbital information (almanac data) and the signal propagation time data.
Calculating your location is called positioning. If signals are received from three or more satellites, the latitude and longitude of a location can be determined.
• The positions of the GPS satellites is constantly changing, hence the time required for positioning may vary or positioning may not be possible, depending on the location and time of use.
• GPS is a positioning system that receives signals from satellites. GPS should be used in locations with a clear view of the sky to prevent obstruction or reflection of the GPS signals by nearby buildings, trees, and other tall structures.
• Positioning information may not be recorded in the following locations and conditions where signals from GPS satellites cannot be received.
- In tunnels, indoors, or beside buildings
- In narrow roadways between buildings and skyscrapers
- Underground, in dense areas of vegetation, under overhead structures, or near power lines or other equipment that generate magnetic fields
- Near 1.5 GHz band mobile phones or other equipment that emit radio waves of the same frequency
Errors in positioning
• Immediately after setting [GPS SETTING] to
ON, positioning may take longer if you are moving, compared to the time taken if you are stationary.
270
• Error due to GPS satellites
The unit automatically calculates your location when it receives signals from three or more GPS satellites. The positioning accuracy enabled by
GPS satellites is about 10 m (33 ft), but larger errors in positioning may occur due to the surroundings when positioning is used.
Accordingly, your actual location and the location shown on a map may vary. In addition, the GPS satellites are managed by the U.S.
Department of Defense, and the accuracy of the system may be altered intentionally.
• Error due to positioning time
The unit obtains positioning information at regular intervals during positioning.
Restrictions
Always use the GPS function in accordance with the rules and regulations of the country and/or region of use.
Geodetic reference system
The unit uses the “WGS-84” geodetic reference system.
Index
Symbols
Numerics
A
ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance) 17
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors 26
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4 witches 24
AUDIO LEVEL CH-1/CH-2 knobs 23
AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 switches 24
B
C
CA (camera adaptor) connector 14
Chapter
assigning user-defined name 92
assigning user-defined title 89
Clip Continuous Rec function 88
Clip flag
assigning user-defined name 92
271
Customization
assigning functions to ASSIGN switches
D
DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control) 17
Digital wireless receiver, attaching 44
Disc
restoring lost data 73 salvage function 73
Disc Exchange Cache function 87
E
ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode 59
Electric color temperature filter 31
Essence mark
272
Expand
External device control and single clip playback 30
F
File
lens 148 reference 148 scene 148 user 148
recording continuous timecode 238
Fitting for microphone holder 13
Flange focal length, adjusting 41
G
GUI screen
GUI screen operations section 23
H
I
Index picture
Iris setting/auto iris override 32
L
Lid of the disc compartment 24
LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selectors 26
Line input audio equipment, connecting 44
M
Marker display
Memory symbol and remaining memory capacity 29
Menu
273
Message
change confirmation/adjustment progress
Mixed format recording mode 52
Monochrome LCD
N
Noise suppression function 167
O
Operation/alarm message display area 31
P
Pixel noise reduction function 181
Playback
Power source voltage/battery remaining capacity 28
Protection cover of the audio control section
Protection cover of the GUI screen operations section 18
R
Recording
Remaining battery capacity indicator 22
Remaining disc capacity indicator 22
Remote control unit, connecting 48
S
Scene
Scene file
Setting change and adjustment progress message display area 31
Shooting
Shot data
Shot ID
Shot mark
Slow & Quick Motion shooting 86
SLS (Slow Speed Shutter) mode 59
Status confirmation screen 206
System frequency and frame rate 28
T
Thumbnail
selecting clip information 118
selecting multiple thumbnails 114
274
THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK button 23
U
USB flash drive
jumping to file-related menu page 225
User menu data
V
Video from external devices
Viewfinder
275
Viewfinder front-to-back positioning knob
Viewfinder front-to-back positioning lever
Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring 13
W
White balance
Wireless LAN
Wireless microphone reception level 28
X
XLR connection automatic detection function
Z
The material contained in this manual consists of information that is the property of Sony
Corporation and is intended solely for use by the purchasers of the equipment described in this manual.
Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose other than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described in this manual without the express written permission of Sony Corporation.
PDW-850
(SYM/CN)
4-544-82512 (1)
Sony Corporation
© 2014

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement
Key features
- Shoulder camcorder 50.8 / 3 mm (2 / 3") Black
- LCD Built-in display 8.89 cm (3.5")
- Full HD 1920 x 1080 pixels